Document:

EX-4.4

 Exhibit 4.4 
  

 
  

STONEMOR PARTNERS L.P. 

and 
 CORNERSTONE FAMILY
SERVICES OF WEST VIRGINIA SUBSIDIARY, INC., 
 as Issuers, 

any Subsidiary Guarantors party hereto, 

and 

                    , 

as Trustee 
 INDENTURE

 Dated as
of                      

Debt Securities 
  

 
  

 CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE 

 

			
	 TIA Section
	  	Indenture
Section
	310(a)	  	7.10
	      (b)	  	7.10
	      (c)	  	N.A.
	311(a)	  	7.11
	      (b)	  	7.11
	      (c)	  	N.A.
	312(a)	  	5.01
	      (b)	  	5.02
	      (c)	  	5.02
	313(a)	  	5.03
	      (b)	  	5.03
	      (c)	  	13.03
	      (d)	  	5.03
	314(a)	  	4.05
	      (b)	  	N.A.
	      (c)(1)	  	13.05
	      (c)(2)	  	13.05
	      (c)(3)	  	N.A.
	      (d)	  	N.A.
	      (e)	  	13.05
	      (f)	  	N.A.
	315(a)	  	7.01
	      (b)	  	6.07 & 13.03
	      (c)	  	7.01
	      (d)	  	7.01
	      (e)	  	6.08
	316(a) (last sentence)	  	1.01
	      (a)(1)(A)	  	6.06
	      (a)(1)(B)	  	6.06
	      (a)(2)	  	9.01(d)
	      (b)	  	6.04
	      (c)	  	5.04
	317(a)(1)	  	6.02
	      (a)(2)	  	6.02
	      (b)	  	4.04
	318(a)	  	13.07

  
 N.A. means
Not Applicable 
 NOTE: This Cross-Reference table shall not, for any purpose, be deemed part of this Indenture. 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

							
	ARTICLE I	  
	DEFINITIONS AND INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE	  
			
	Section 1.01    	  	Definitions	  	 	1	  
	Section 1.02	  	Other Definitions	  	 	7	  
	Section 1.03	  	Incorporation by Reference of Trust Indenture Act	  	 	7	  
	Section 1.04	  	Rules of Construction	  	 	7	  
	
	ARTICLE II	  
	DEBT SECURITIES	  
			
	Section 2.01	  	Forms Generally	  	 	8	  
	Section 2.02	  	Form of Trustee’s Certificate of Authentication	  	 	8	  
	Section 2.03	  	Principal Amount; Issuable in Series	  	 	9	  
	Section 2.04	  	Execution of Debt Securities	  	 	11	  
	Section 2.05	  	Authentication and Delivery of Debt Securities	  	 	11	  
	Section 2.06	  	Denomination of Debt Securities	  	 	13	  
	Section 2.07	  	Registration of Transfer and Exchange	  	 	13	  
	Section 2.08	  	Temporary Debt Securities	  	 	14	  
	Section 2.09	  	Mutilated, Destroyed, Lost or Stolen Debt Securities	  	 	15	  
	Section 2.10	  	Cancellation of Surrendered Debt Securities	  	 	16	  
	Section 2.11	  	Provisions of the Indenture and Debt Securities for the Sole Benefit of the Parties and the Holders	  	 	16	  
	Section 2.12	  	Payment of Interest; Interest Rights Preserved	  	 	16	  
	Section 2.13	  	Securities Denominated in Dollars	  	 	17	  
	Section 2.14	  	Wire Transfers	  	 	17	  
	Section 2.15	  	Securities Issuable in the Form of a Global Security	  	 	17	  
	Section 2.16	  	Medium Term Securities	  	 	20	  
	Section 2.17	  	Defaulted Interest	  	 	20	  
	Section 2.18	  	CUSIP and ISIN Numbers	  	 	21	  
	ARTICLE III	  
	REDEMPTION OF DEBT SECURITIES	  
			
	Section 3.01	  	Applicability of Article	  	 	21	  
	Section 3.02	  	Notice of Redemption; Selection of Debt Securities	  	 	21	  
	Section 3.03	  	Payment of Debt Securities Called for Redemption	  	 	23	  
	Section 3.04	  	Mandatory and Optional Sinking Funds	  	 	23	  
	Section 3.05	  	Redemption of Debt Securities for Sinking Fund	  	 	24	  
	
	ARTICLE IV	  
	PARTICULAR COVENANTS OF THE ISSUERS	  
			
	Section 4.01	  	Payment of Principal of, and Premium, If Any, and Interest on, Debt Securities	  	 	25	  

  
 i 

							
	Section 4.02    	  	Maintenance of Offices or Agencies for Registration of Transfer, Exchange and Payment of Debt Securities	  	 	26	  
	Section 4.03	  	Appointment to Fill a Vacancy in the Office of Trustee	  	 	26	  
	Section 4.04	  	Duties of Paying Agents, etc	  	 	26	  
	Section 4.05	  	SEC Reports; Financial Statements	  	 	27	  
	Section 4.06	  	Compliance Certificate	  	 	28	  
	Section 4.07	  	Further Instruments and Acts	  	 	28	  
	Section 4.08	  	Existence	  	 	28	  
	Section 4.09	  	Maintenance of Properties	  	 	28	  
	Section 4.10	  	Payment of Taxes and Other Claims	  	 	28	  
	Section 4.11	  	Waiver of Certain Covenants	  	 	29	  
	
	ARTICLE V	  
	HOLDERS’ LISTS AND REPORTS BY THE TRUSTEE	  
			
	Section 5.01	  	Issuers to Furnish Trustee Information as to Names and Addresses of Holders; Preservation of Information	  	 	29	  
	Section 5.02	  	Communications to Holders	  	 	29	  
	Section 5.03	  	Reports by Trustee	  	 	30	  
	Section 5.04	  	Record Dates for Action by Holders	  	 	30	  
	
	ARTICLE VI	  
	REMEDIES OF THE TRUSTEE AND HOLDERS IN EVENT OF DEFAULT	  
			
	Section 6.01	  	Events of Default	  	 	30	  
	Section 6.02	  	Collection of Debt by Trustee, etc	  	 	33	  
	Section 6.03	  	Application of Moneys Collected by Trustee	  	 	34	  
	Section 6.04	  	Limitation on Suits by Holders	  	 	35	  
	Section 6.05	  	Remedies Cumulative; Delay or Omission in Exercise of Rights Not a Waiver of Default	  	 	35	  
	Section 6.06	  	Rights of Holders of Majority in Principal Amount of Debt Securities to Direct Trustee and to Waive Default	  	 	35	  
	Section 6.07	  	Trustee to Give Notice of Events of Defaults Known to It, but May Withhold Such Notice in Certain Circumstances	  	 	36	  
	Section 6.08	  	Requirement of an Undertaking to Pay Costs in Certain Suits under the Indenture or Against the Trustee	  	 	36	  
	
	ARTICLE VII	  
	CONCERNING THE TRUSTEE	  
			
	Section 7.01	  	Certain Duties and Responsibilities	  	 	37	  
	Section 7.02	  	Certain Rights of Trustee	  	 	38	  
	Section 7.03	  	Trustee Not Liable for Recitals in Indenture or in Debt Securities	  	 	39	  
	Section 7.04	  	Trustee, Paying Agent or Registrar May Own Debt Securities	  	 	39	  
	Section 7.05	  	Moneys Received by Trustee to Be Held in Trust	  	 	39	  
	Section 7.06	  	Compensation and Reimbursement	  	 	40	  
	Section 7.07	  	Right of Trustee to Rely on an Officers’ Certificate Where No Other Evidence Specifically Prescribed	  	 	40	  

  
 ii 

							
	Section 7.08    	  	Separate Trustee; Replacement of Trustee	  	 	40	  
	Section 7.09	  	Successor Trustee by Merger	  	 	42	  
	Section 7.10	  	Eligibility; Disqualification	  	 	42	  
	Section 7.11	  	Preferential Collection of Claims Against Issuers	  	 	42	  
	Section 7.12	  	Compliance with Tax Laws	  	 	42	  
	
	ARTICLE VIII	  
	CONCERNING THE HOLDERS	  
			
	Section 8.01	  	Evidence of Action by Holders	  	 	43	  
	Section 8.02	  	Proof of Execution of Instruments and of Holding of Debt Securities	  	 	43	  
	Section 8.03	  	Who May Be Deemed Owner of Debt Securities	  	 	43	  
	Section 8.04	  	Instruments Executed by Holders Bind Future Holders	  	 	43	  
	
	ARTICLE IX	  
	SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURES	  
			
	Section 9.01	  	Purposes for Which Supplemental Indenture May Be Entered into Without Consent of Holders	  	 	44	  
	Section 9.02	  	Modification of Indenture with Consent of Holders of Debt Securities	  	 	46	  
	Section 9.03	  	Effect of Supplemental Indentures	  	 	47	  
	Section 9.04	  	Debt Securities May Bear Notation of Changes by Supplemental Indentures	  	 	47	  
	
	ARTICLE X	  
	CONSOLIDATION, MERGER, SALE OR CONVEYANCE	  
			
	Section 10.01	  	Consolidations and Mergers of the Issuers	  	 	47	  
	Section 10.02	  	Rights and Duties of Successor Company	  	 	48	  
	
	ARTICLE XI	  
	 SATISFACTION AND DISCHARGE OF INDENTURE; DEFEASANCE;

UNCLAIMED MONEYS
	  
   

			
	Section 11.01	  	Applicability of Article	  	 	49	  
	Section 11.02	  	Satisfaction and Discharge of Indenture; Defeasance	  	 	49	  
	Section 11.03	  	Conditions of Defeasance	  	 	50	  
	Section 11.04	  	Application of Trust Money	  	 	51	  
	Section 11.05	  	Repayment to Issuers	  	 	51	  
	Section 11.06	  	Indemnity for U.S. Government Obligations	  	 	51	  
	Section 11.07	  	Reinstatement	  	 	51	  
	
	ARTICLE XII	  
	SUBORDINATION OF DEBT SECURITIES AND GUARANTEE	  
			
	Section 12.01	  	Applicability of Article; Agreement to Subordinate	  	 	52	  
	Section 12.02	  	Liquidation, Dissolution, Bankruptcy	  	 	52	  
	Section 12.03	  	Default on Senior Indebtedness	  	 	52	  

  
 iii 

							
	Section 12.04  	  	Acceleration of Payment of Debt Securities	  	 	54	  
	Section 12.05	  	When Distribution Must Be Paid Over	  	 	54	  
	Section 12.06	  	Subrogation	  	 	54	  
	Section 12.07	  	Relative Rights	  	 	54	  
	Section 12.08	  	Subordination May Not Be Impaired by Issuers	  	 	54	  
	Section 12.09	  	Rights of Trustee and Paying Agent	  	 	54	  
	Section 12.10	  	Distribution or Notice to Representative	  	 	55	  
	Section 12.11	  	Article XII Not to Prevent Defaults or Limit Right to Accelerate	  	 	55	  
	Section 12.12	  	Trust Moneys Not Subordinated	  	 	55	  
	Section 12.13	  	Trustee Entitled to Rely	  	 	55	  
	Section 12.14	  	Trustee to Effectuate Subordination	  	 	56	  
	Section 12.15	  	Trustee Not Fiduciary for Holders of Senior Indebtedness	  	 	56	  
	Section 12.16	  	Reliance by Holders of Senior Indebtedness on Subordination Provisions	  	 	56	  
	
	ARTICLE XIII	  
	MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS	  
			
	Section 13.01	  	Successors and Assigns of Issuers Bound by Indenture	  	 	56	  
	Section 13.02	  	Acts of Board, Committee or Officer of Successor Issuer Valid	  	 	56	  
	Section 13.03	  	Required Notices or Demands	  	 	56	  
	Section 13.04	  	Indenture and Debt Securities to Be Construed in Accordance with the Laws of the State of New York	  	 	57	  
	Section 13.05	  	Officers’ Certificate and Opinion of Counsel to Be Furnished upon Application or Demand by the Issuers	  	 	58	  
	Section 13.06	  	Payments Due on Legal Holidays	  	 	58	  
	Section 13.07	  	Provisions Required by TIA to Control	  	 	58	  
	Section 13.08	  	Computation of Interest on Debt Securities	  	 	58	  
	Section 13.09	  	Rules by Trustee, Paying Agent and Registrar	  	 	58	  
	Section 13.10	  	No Recourse Against Others	  	 	59	  
	Section 13.11	  	Severability	  	 	59	  
	Section 13.12	  	Effect of Headings	  	 	59	  
	Section 13.13	  	Indenture May Be Executed in Counterparts	  	 	59	  
	
	ARTICLE XIV	  
	GUARANTEE	  
			
	Section 14.01	  	Unconditional Guarantee	  	 	59	  
	Section 14.02	  	Execution and Delivery of Guarantee	  	 	61	  
	Section 14.03	  	Limitation on Subsidiary Guarantors’ Liability	  	 	61	  
	Section 14.04	  	Release of Subsidiary Guarantors from Guarantee	  	 	62	  
	Section 14.05	  	Subsidiary Guarantor Contribution	  	 	62	  
	Notation of Guarantee	  	 	A-1	  

  
 iv 

 THIS INDENTURE dated as of
             is among StoneMor Partners L.P., a Delaware limited partnership (the “Partnership”), Cornerstone Family Services of West Virginia Subsidiary, Inc., a West Virginia
corporation (“Finance Corp.” and, together with the Partnership, the “Issuers”), any Subsidiary Guarantors (as defined herein party hereto and
                , a                 , as trustee (the “Trustee”). 

RECITALS OF THE ISSUERS AND ANY SUBSIDIARY GUARANTORS 

The Issuers and any Subsidiary Guarantors have duly authorized the execution and delivery of this Indenture to provide for the issuance from
time to time of the Issuers’ debentures, notes, bonds or other evidences of indebtedness to be issued in one or more series unlimited as to principal amount (herein called the “Debt Securities”), which Debt Securities may be
guaranteed by each of the Subsidiary Guarantors and may be subordinated in right of payment to Senior Indebtedness, as in this Indenture provided. 

All things necessary to make this Indenture a valid agreement of the Issuers and any Subsidiary Guarantors, in accordance with its terms, have
been done. 
 NOW, THEREFORE, THIS INDENTURE WITNESSETH 

That in order to declare the terms and conditions upon which the Debt Securities are authenticated, issued and delivered, and in consideration
of the premises, and of the purchase and acceptance of the Debt Securities by the Holders thereof, the Issuers, any Subsidiary Guarantor and the Trustee covenant and agree with each other, for the benefit of the respective Holders from time to time
of the Debt Securities or any series thereof, as follows: 
 ARTICLE I 

DEFINITIONS AND INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE 

Section 1.01 Definitions. 

“Affiliate” of any specified Person means any other Person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by or under direct or
indirect common control with such specified Person. For the purposes of this definition, “control” when used with respect to any specified Person means the power to direct the management and policies of such Person, directly or indirectly,
whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract or otherwise; and the terms “controlling” and “controlled” have meanings correlative to the foregoing. The Trustee may request and may conclusively rely upon an
Officers’ Certificate to determine whether any Person is an Affiliate of any specified Person. 
 “Agent” means any Registrar
or paying agent. 
 “Bankruptcy Law” means Title 11, U.S. Code or any similar federal or state law for the relief of debtors. 

“Board of Directors” means, (i) with respect to Finance Corp., the board of directors of the corporation or any committee
thereof duly authorized to act on behalf of such board, (ii) with respect to the Partnership, the Board of Directors of the General Partner or any authorized 

  
 1 

 
committee of the Board of Directors of the General Partner or any directors and/or officers of the General Partner to whom such Board of Directors or such committee shall have duly delegated its
authority to act hereunder. If the Partnership shall change its form of entity to other than a limited partnership, the references to the Board of Directors of the General Partner shall mean the Board of Directors (or other comparable governing
body) of the Partnership. 
 “Business Day” means any day other than a Legal Holiday. 

“capital stock” of any Person means and includes any and all shares, rights to purchase, warrants or options (whether or not
currently exercisable), participations or other equivalents of or interests in (however designated) the equity (which includes, but is not limited to, common stock, preferred stock and partnership and joint venture interests) of such Person
(excluding any debt securities that are convertible into, or exchangeable for, such equity). 
 “Custodian” means any receiver,
trustee, assignee, liquidator or similar official under any Bankruptcy Law. 
 “Debt” of any Person at any date means any
obligation created or assumed by such Person for the repayment of borrowed money and any guarantee thereof. 
 “Debt Security” or
“Debt Securities” has the meaning stated in the first recital of this Indenture and more particularly means any debt security or debt securities, as the case may be of any series authenticated and delivered under this Indenture. 

“Default” means any event, act or condition that is, or after notice or the passage of time or both would be, an Event of Default.

 “Depositary” means, unless otherwise specified by the Issuers pursuant to either Section 2.03 or 2.15, with respect to Debt
Securities of any series issuable or issued in whole or in part in the form of one or more Global Securities, The Depository Trust Company, New York, New York, or any successor thereto registered as a clearing agency under the Exchange Act or other
applicable statute or regulations. 
 “Designated Senior Indebtedness” means (i) any Senior Indebtedness which, at the date
of determination, has an aggregate principal amount outstanding of, or under which, at the date of determination, the holders thereof are committed to lend up to, at least $100 million and (ii) any other Senior Indebtedness designated, as
provided in Section 2.03, in respect of any series of Debt Securities. 
 “Dollar” or “$” means such currency of the
United States as at the time of payment is legal tender for the payment of public and private debts. 
 “Exchange Act” means the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and any successor statute. 
 “Finance Corp.” means the Person named as “Finance
Corp.” in the first paragraph of this instrument until a successor Person shall have become such pursuant to the applicable terms of this Indenture, and thereafter “Finance Corp.” shall mean such successor Person. 

  
 2 

 “Floating Rate Security” means a Debt Security that provides for the payment of
interest at a variable rate determined periodically by reference to an interest rate index specified pursuant to Section 2.03. 

“GAAP” means generally accepted accounting principles in the United States, as in effect from time to time. 

“General Partner” means StoneMor GP LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, and its successors and permitted assigns as managing
general partner of the Partnership or as the business entity with the ultimate authority to manage the business and operations of the Partnership. 

“Global Security” means with respect to any series of Debt Securities issued hereunder, a Debt Security which is executed by the
Issuers and authenticated and delivered by the Trustee to the Depositary or pursuant to the Depositary’s instruction, all in accordance with this Indenture and any indentures supplemental hereto, or resolution of the Board of Directors and set
forth in an Officers’ Certificate, which shall be registered in the name of the Depositary or its nominee and which shall represent, and shall be denominated in an amount equal to the aggregate principal amount of, all the Outstanding Debt
Securities of such series or any portion thereof, in either case having the same terms, including, without limitation, the same original issue date, date or dates on which principal is due and interest rate or method of determining interest. 

“guarantee” means any obligation, contingent or otherwise, of any Person directly or indirectly guaranteeing any Debt or other
obligation of any other Person and any obligation, direct or indirect, contingent or otherwise, of such Person (a) to purchase or pay (or advance or supply funds for the purchase or payment of) such Debt or other obligation of such other Person
(whether arising by virtue of partnership arrangements, or by agreement to keep-well, to purchase assets, goods, securities or services, to take-or-pay, or to maintain financial statement conditions or otherwise) or (b) entered into for
purposes of assuring in any other manner the obligee of such Debt or other obligation of the payment thereof or to protect such obligee against loss in respect thereof (in whole or in part); provided, however, that the term “guarantee”
shall not include endorsements for collection or deposit in the ordinary course of business. The term “guarantee” used as a verb has a corresponding meaning. 

“Holder,” “Holder of Debt Securities” or other similar terms means, a Person in whose name a Debt Security is registered
in the Debt Security Register (as defined in Section 2.07(a)). 
 “Indenture” means this instrument as originally executed, or, if
amended or supplemented as herein provided, as so amended or supplemented and shall include the form and terms of particular series of Debt Securities as contemplated hereunder, whether or not a supplemental indenture is entered into with respect
thereto. 
 “Issuers” means the Partnership and Finance Corp. 

“Issuer Order” means a written request or order signed on behalf of each of the Issuers by one of its Officers and delivered to the
Trustee. 

  
 3 

 “Legal Holiday” means a Saturday, a Sunday or a day on which banking institutions in
the City of New York, New York or at a Place of Payment are authorized by law, regulation or executive order to remain closed. If a payment date is a Legal Holiday at a Place of Payment, payment may be made at that place on the next succeeding
day that is not a Legal Holiday, and no interest shall accrue for the intervening period. 
 “Lien” means, with respect to any
asset, any mortgage, lien, security interest, pledge, charge or other encumbrance of any kind in respect of such asset, whether or not filed, recorded or otherwise perfected under applicable law. 

“Officer” means, with respect to any Person, the Chairman of the Board, the Chief Executive Officer, the President, the Chief
Operating Officer, the Chief Financial Officer, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Controller, the Secretary or any Vice President of such Person (or, if such Person is a limited partnership, the general partner of such Person, except it
shall be the General Partner in the case of the Partnership so long as it is a limited partnership). 
 “Officers’
Certificate” means a certificate signed on behalf of each Issuer by any two of its Officers, one of whom must be the principal executive officer, the principal financial officer or the principal accounting officer of such Issuer, that meets the
requirements of Section 13.05 hereof. 
 “Opinion of Counsel” means a written opinion from legal counsel who is acceptable to the
Trustee. The counsel may be an employee of or counsel to the Partnership or the Trustee. 
 “Original Issue Discount Debt
Security” means any Debt Security which provides for an amount less than the principal amount thereof to be due and payable upon a declaration of acceleration of the maturity thereof pursuant to Section 6.01. 

“Outstanding,” when used with respect to any series of Debt Securities, means, as of the date of determination, all Debt Securities
of that series theretofore authenticated and delivered under this Indenture, except: 
 (a) Debt Securities of that series theretofore
canceled by the Trustee or delivered to the Trustee for cancellation; 
 (b) Debt Securities of that series for whose payment or redemption
money in the necessary amount has been theretofore deposited with the Trustee or any paying agent (other than an Issuer) in trust or set aside and segregated in trust by the Issuers (if an Issuer shall act as its own paying agent) for the Holders of
such Debt Securities; provided, that, if such Debt Securities are to be redeemed, notice of such redemption has been duly given pursuant to this Indenture or provision therefor satisfactory to the Trustee has been made; and 

(c) Debt Securities of that series which have been paid pursuant to Section 2.09 or in exchange for or in lieu of which other Debt Securities
have been authenticated and delivered pursuant to this Indenture, other than any such Debt Securities in respect of which there shall have been presented to the Trustee proof satisfactory to it that such Debt Securities are held by a protected
purchaser in whose hands such Debt Securities are valid obligations of the Issuers; 

  
 4 

 
provided, however, that in determining whether the Holders of the requisite principal amount of the Outstanding Debt Securities of any series have given any request, demand, authorization,
direction, notice, consent or waiver hereunder, Debt Securities owned by either of the Issuers or any other obligor upon the Debt Securities or any Affiliate of the Partnership or of such other obligor shall be disregarded and deemed not to be
Outstanding, except that, in determining whether the Trustee shall be protected in relying upon any such request, demand, authorization, direction, notice, consent or waiver, only Debt Securities which a Trust Officer actually knows to be so owned
shall be so disregarded. Debt Securities so owned which have been pledged in good faith may be regarded as Outstanding if the pledgee establishes to the satisfaction of the Trustee the pledgee’s right so to act with respect to such Debt
Securities and that the pledgee is not an Issuer or any other obligor upon the Debt Securities or an Affiliate of the Partnership or of such other obligor. In determining whether the Holders of the requisite principal amount of Outstanding Debt
Securities have given any request, demand, authorization, direction, notice, consent or waiver hereunder, the principal amount of an Original Issue Discount Debt Security that shall be deemed to be Outstanding for such purposes shall be the amount
of the principal thereof that would be due and payable as of the date of such determination upon a declaration of acceleration of the maturity thereof pursuant to Section 6.01. 

“Partnership” means the Person named as the “Partnership” in the first paragraph of this instrument until a successor
Person shall have become such pursuant to the applicable provisions of this Indenture, and thereafter “Partnership” shall mean such successor Person. 

“Person” means any individual, corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited liability company, incorporated or unincorporated
association, joint-stock company, trust, unincorporated organization or government or other agency or political subdivision thereof or other entity of any kind. 

“Redemption Date,” when used with respect to any Debt Security to be redeemed, means the date fixed for such redemption by or
pursuant to this Indenture. 
 “Reporting Failure” means the failure of the Partnership to file with the Trustee the information,
documents, reports, financial statements or “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” required by Section 4.05. 

“Representative” means the trustee, agent or representative (if any) for an issue of Senior Indebtedness. 

“SEC” means the Securities and Exchange Commission. 

“Securities Act” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and any successor statute. 

“Senior Indebtedness,” unless otherwise provided with respect to the Debt Securities of a series as contemplated by Section 2.03,
means (1) all Debt of the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Issuers, whether currently outstanding or hereafter issued, unless, by the terms of the instrument creating or evidencing such Debt, it is provided that such Debt is subordinate or not
superior in right of payment to the Debt Securities, in the case of the Issuers, or the Guarantee, in the case of 

  
 5 

 
the Subsidiary Guarantors, or to other Debt which is pari passu with or subordinated to the Debt Securities, in the case of the Issuers, or the Guarantee, in the case of the Subsidiary
Guarantors, and (2) any modifications, refunding, deferrals, renewals, or extensions of any such Debt or securities, notes or other evidence of Debt issued in exchange for such Debt; provided that in no event shall “Senior
Indebtedness” include (a) Debt evidenced by the Debt Securities or any Guarantee, (b) Debt of any of the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Issuers owed or owing to any Subsidiary of the Partnership, (c) Debt of any of the Subsidiary
Guarantors owed or owing to the Issuers, (d) any liability to trade creditors, (e) any liability for taxes owed or owing by any of the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Issuers or (f) Debt of any Subsidiary Guarantor in the event there is
no series of Debt Securities Outstanding that is entitled to the benefits of a Guarantee. 
 “Stated Maturity” means, with respect
to any security, the date specified in such security as the fixed date on which the payment of principal of such security is due and payable, including pursuant to any mandatory redemption provision (but excluding any provision providing for the
repurchase of such security at the option of the holder thereof upon the happening of any contingency beyond the control of the issuer unless such contingency has occurred). 

“Subsidiary” of any Person means: 

(1) any corporation, association or other business entity of which more than 50% of the total voting power of equity interests entitled,
without regard to the occurrence of any contingency, to vote in the election of directors, managers, trustees or equivalent Persons thereof is at the time of determination owned or controlled, directly or indirectly, by such Person or one or more of
the other Subsidiaries of such Person or combination thereof; or 
 (2) in the case of a partnership, more than 50% of the partners’
equity interests, considering all partners’ equity interests as a single class, is at such time of determination owned or controlled, directly or indirectly, by such Person or one or more of the other Subsidiaries of such Person or combination
thereof. 
 “Subsidiary Guarantors” means any Subsidiary of the Partnership (except Finance Corp.) who may execute this Indenture,
or a supplement hereto, for the purpose of providing a Guarantee of Debt Securities pursuant to this Indenture until a successor Person shall have become such pursuant to the applicable provisions of this Indenture, and thereafter “Subsidiary
Guarantors” shall mean such successor Person. 
 “TIA” means the Trust Indenture Act of 1939, as amended (15 U.S.C.
§§ 77aaa-77bbbb), as in effect on the date of this Indenture as originally executed and, to the extent required by law, as amended. 

“Trustee” initially means                  and any
other Person or Persons appointed as such from time to time pursuant to Section 7.08, and, subject to the provisions of Article VII, includes its or their successors and assigns. If at any time there is more than one such Person, “Trustee”
as used with respect to the Debt Securities of any series shall mean the Trustee with respect to the Debt Securities of that series. 

  
 6 

 “Trust Officer” means any officer or assistant officer of the Trustee assigned by the
Trustee to administer its corporate trust matters. 
 “United States” means the United States of America (including the States and
the District of Columbia), its territories, its possessions and other areas subject to its jurisdiction. 
 “U.S. Government
Obligations” means direct obligations of the United States of America, obligations on which the payment of principal and interest is fully guaranteed by the United States of America or obligations or guarantees for the payment of which the full
faith and credit of the United States of America is pledged. 
 “Yield to Maturity” means the yield to maturity, calculated at the
time of issuance of a series of Debt Securities, or, if applicable, at the most recent redetermination of interest on such series and calculated in accordance with accepted financial practice. 

Section 1.02 Other Definitions. 
  

					
	 Term
	  	Defined in
Section	 
	 “Debt Security Register”
	  	 	2.07	  
	 “Defaulted Interest”
	  	 	2.17	  
	 “Event of Default”
	  	 	6.01	  
	 “Funding Guarantor”
	  	 	14.05	  
	 “Guarantee”
	  	 	14.01	  
	 “Place of Payment”
	  	 	2.03	  
	 “Registrar”
	  	 	2.07	  
	 “Subordinated Debt Securities”
	  	 	12.01	  
	 “Successor Company”
	  	 	10.01	  

 Section 1.03 Incorporation by Reference of Trust Indenture Act. Whenever this Indenture refers to
a provision of the TIA, the provision is incorporated by reference in and made a part of this Indenture. 
 All terms used in this Indenture
that are defined by the TIA, defined by TIA reference to another statute or defined by SEC rule under the TIA have the meanings so assigned to them. 

Section 1.04 Rules of Construction. Unless the context otherwise requires: 

(a) a term has the meaning assigned to it; 

(b) an accounting term not otherwise defined has the meaning assigned to it in accordance with GAAP; 

(c) “or” is not exclusive; 

(d) words in the singular include the plural, and in the plural include the singular; 

  
 7 

 (e) provisions apply to successive events and transactions; 

(f) if the applicable series of Debt Securities are subordinated pursuant to Article XII, unsecured Debt shall not be deemed to be subordinate
or junior to secured Debt merely by virtue of its nature as unsecured Debt; and 
 (g) the principal amount of any noninterest bearing or
other discount security at any date shall be the principal amount thereof that would be shown on a balance sheet of the issuer dated such date prepared in accordance with GAAP. 

ARTICLE II 
 DEBT
SECURITIES 
 Section 2.01 Forms Generally. The Debt Securities of each series shall be in substantially the form
established without the approval of any Holder by or pursuant to a resolution of the Board of Directors of each Issuer or in one or more indentures supplemental hereto, in each case with such appropriate insertions, omissions, substitutions and
other variations as are required or permitted by this Indenture, and may have such letters, numbers or other marks of identification and such legends or endorsements placed thereon as the Issuers may deem appropriate (and, if not contained in a
supplemental indenture entered into in accordance with Article IX, as are not prohibited by the provisions of this Indenture) or as may be required or appropriate to comply with any law or with any rules made pursuant thereto or with any rules of
any securities exchange on which such series of Debt Securities may be listed, or to conform to general usage, or as may, consistently herewith, be determined by the officers executing such Debt Securities as evidenced by their execution of the Debt
Securities. 
 The definitive Debt Securities of each series shall be printed, lithographed or engraved on steel engraved borders or may be
produced in any other manner, all as determined by the Officers executing such Debt Securities, as evidenced by their execution of such Debt Securities. 

Section 2.02 Form of Trustee’s Certificate of Authentication. The Trustee’s certificate of authentication on all Debt
Securities authenticated by the Trustee shall be in substantially the following form: 
 TRUSTEE’S CERTIFICATE OF AUTHENTICATION

 This is one of the Debt Securities of the series designated therein referred to in the within-mentioned Indenture. 

 

			
	
                         
                                         
                  ,

	 As Trustee

		
	 By:
	 	
                         
                                         
            

		 	 Authorized Signatory

  
 8 

 Section 2.03 Principal Amount; Issuable in Series. The aggregate principal amount of
Debt Securities which may be issued, executed, authenticated, delivered and outstanding under this Indenture is unlimited. 
 The Debt
Securities may be issued in one or more series in fully registered form. There shall be established, without the approval of any Holders, in or pursuant to a resolution of the Board of Directors of each Issuer and set forth in an Officers’
Certificate, or established in one or more indentures supplemental hereto, prior to the issuance of Debt Securities of any series any or all of the following: 

(a) the title of the Debt Securities of the series (which shall distinguish the Debt Securities of the series from all other Debt Securities);

 (b) any limit upon the aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities of the series which may be authenticated and delivered under
this Indenture (except for Debt Securities authenticated and delivered upon registration of transfer of, or in exchange for, or in lieu of, other Debt Securities of the series pursuant to this Article II); 

(c) the date or dates on which the principal of and premium, if any, on the Debt Securities of the series are payable; 

(d) the rate or rates (which may be fixed or variable) at which the Debt Securities of the series shall bear interest, if any, or the method
of determining such rate or rates, the date or dates from which such interest shall accrue, the interest payment dates on which such interest shall be payable, or the method by which such date will be determined, the record dates for the
determination of Holders thereof to whom such interest is payable; and the basis upon which interest will be calculated if other than that of a 360-day year of twelve thirty-day months; 

(e) the place or places, if any, in addition to or instead of the corporate trust office of the Trustee, where the principal of, and premium,
if any, and interest on, Debt Securities of the series shall be payable (“Place of Payment”); 
 (f) the price or prices at which,
the period or periods within which and the terms and conditions upon which Debt Securities of the series may be redeemed, in whole or in part, at the option of the Issuers or otherwise; 

(g) whether Debt Securities of the series are entitled to the benefits of any Guarantee of any Subsidiary Guarantors pursuant to this
Indenture; 
 (h) the obligation, if any, of the Issuers to redeem, purchase or repay Debt Securities of the series pursuant to any sinking
fund or analogous provisions or at the option of a Holder thereof, and the price or prices at which and the period or periods within which and the terms and conditions upon which Debt Securities of the series shall be redeemed, purchased or repaid,
in whole or in part, pursuant to such obligations; 
 (i) (i) the terms, if any, upon which the Debt Securities of the series may be
convertible into or exchanged for capital stock (which may be represented by depositary shares), other Debt Securities or warrants for capital stock or Debt or other securities of any kind of 

  
 9 

 
either of the Issuers or any other obligor and the terms and conditions upon which such conversion or exchange shall be effected, including the initial conversion or exchange price or rate, the
conversion or exchange period and any other provision in addition to or in lieu of those described herein; 
 (j) if other than
denominations of $1,000 and any integral multiple thereof, the denominations in which Debt Securities of the series shall be issuable; 

(k) if the amount of principal of or any premium or interest on Debt Securities of the series may be determined with reference to an index or
pursuant to a formula, the manner in which such amounts will be determined; 
 (l) if the principal amount payable at the Stated Maturity of
Debt Securities of the series will not be determinable as of any one or more dates prior to such Stated Maturity, the amount which will be deemed to be such principal amount as of any such date for any purpose, including the principal amount thereof
which will be due and payable upon any maturity other than the Stated Maturity or which will be deemed to be Outstanding as of any such date (or, in any such case, the manner in which such deemed principal amount is to be determined); 

(m) any changes or additions to Article XI, including the addition of additional covenants that may be subject to the covenant defeasance
option pursuant to Section 11.02(b); 
 (n) if other than the principal amount thereof, the portion of the principal amount of Debt
Securities of the series which shall be payable upon declaration of acceleration of the maturity thereof pursuant to Section 6.01 or provable in bankruptcy pursuant to Section 6.02; 

(o) the terms, if any, of the transfer, mortgage, pledge or assignment as security for the Debt Securities of the series of any properties,
assets, moneys, proceeds, securities or other collateral, including whether certain provisions of the TIA are applicable and any corresponding changes to provisions of this Indenture as currently in effect; 

(p) any addition to or change in the Events of Default with respect to the Debt Securities of the series and any change in the right of the
Trustee or the Holders to declare the principal of, and premium and interest on, such Debt Securities due and payable; 
 (q) if the Debt
Securities of the series shall be issued in whole or in part in the form of a Global Security or Securities, the terms and conditions, if any, upon which such Global Security or Securities may be exchanged in whole or in part for other individual
Debt Securities in definitive registered form; and the Depositary for such Global Security or Securities and the form of any legend or legends to be borne by any such Global Security or Securities in addition to or in lieu of the legend referred to
in Section 2.15(a); 
 (r) any trustees, authenticating or paying agents, transfer agents or registrars; 

(s) the applicability of, and any addition to or change in the covenants and definitions currently set forth in this Indenture or in the terms
currently set forth in Article X, including conditioning any merger, conveyance, transfer or lease permitted by Article X upon the satisfaction of any Debt coverage standard by the Issuers and Successor Company (as defined in Article X); 

  
 10 

 (t) the subordination, if any, of the Debt Securities of the series pursuant to Article XII and
any changes or additions to Article XII or designation of any Designated Senior Indebtedness; 
 (u) with regard to Debt Securities of the
series that do not bear interest, the dates for certain required reports to the Trustee; and 
 (v) any other terms of the Debt Securities
of the series (which terms shall not be prohibited by the provisions of this Indenture). 
 All Debt Securities of any one series shall be
substantially identical except as to denomination and except as may otherwise be provided in or pursuant to such resolution of the Board of Directors and as set forth in such Officers’ Certificate or in any such indenture supplemental hereto.

 Section 2.04 Execution of Debt Securities. The Debt Securities shall be signed on behalf of each of the Issuers by at least
one of its Officers. Such signatures upon the Debt Securities may be the manual or facsimile signatures of the present or any future such authorized officers and may be imprinted or otherwise reproduced on the Debt Securities. 

Only such Debt Securities as shall bear thereon a certificate of authentication substantially in the form hereinbefore recited, signed
manually by the Trustee, shall be entitled to the benefits of this Indenture or be valid or obligatory for any purpose. Such certificate by the Trustee upon any Debt Security executed on behalf of each of the Issuers by at least one of its
Officers shall be conclusive evidence that the Debt Security so authenticated has been duly authenticated and delivered hereunder. 
 In
case any Officer of either Issuer who shall have signed any of the Debt Securities shall cease to be such Officer before the Debt Securities so signed shall have been authenticated and delivered by the Trustee, or disposed of by the Issuers, such
Debt Securities nevertheless may be authenticated and delivered or disposed of as though the Person who signed such Debt Securities had not ceased to be such Officer; and any Debt Security may be signed on behalf of either Issuer by such Persons as,
at the actual date of the execution of such Debt Security, shall be the proper Officers of such Issuer, although at the date of such Debt Security or of the execution of this Indenture any such Person was not such Officer. 

Section 2.05 Authentication and Delivery of Debt Securities. At any time and from time to time after the execution and delivery of
this Indenture, the Issuers may deliver to the Trustee for authentication Debt Securities of any series executed by the Issuers, and the Trustee shall thereupon authenticate and deliver said Debt Securities to or upon an Issuer Order. In
authenticating such Debt Securities, and accepting the additional responsibilities under this Indenture in relation to such Debt Securities, the Trustee shall be entitled to receive, and (subject to Section 7.01) shall be fully protected in relying
upon: 

  
 11 

 (a) a copy of any resolution or resolutions of the Board of Directors of each Issuer, certified
by the Secretary or Assistant Secretary of each of the General Partner and Finance Corp., authorizing the terms of issuance of any series of Debt Securities; 

(b) an executed supplemental indenture, if any; 

(c) an Officers’ Certificate; and 

(d) an Opinion of Counsel prepared in accordance with Section 13.05 which shall also state: 

(i) that the form of such Debt Securities has been established by or pursuant to a resolution of the Board of Directors of each
Issuer or by a supplemental indenture as permitted by Section 2.01 in conformity with the provisions of this Indenture; 

(ii) that the terms of such Debt Securities have been established by or pursuant to a resolution of the Board of Directors or
by a supplemental indenture as permitted by Section 2.03 in conformity with the provisions of this Indenture; 
 (iii) that
such Debt Securities, when authenticated and delivered by the Trustee and issued by the Issuers in the manner and subject to any conditions specified in such Opinion of Counsel, will constitute valid and legally binding obligations of the Issuers,
enforceable in accordance with their terms except as the enforceability thereof may be limited by bankruptcy, insolvency or similar laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights generally and rights of acceleration and the availability of
equitable remedies may be limited by equitable principles of general applicability; 
 (iv) that the Issuers have the power
to issue such Debt Securities and has duly taken all necessary action with respect to such issuance; 
 (v) that the issuance
of such Debt Securities will not contravene the organizational documents of the Issuers or result in any material violation of any of the terms or provisions of any law or regulation or of any material indenture, mortgage or other agreement known to
such counsel by which the Issuers are bound; 
 (vi) that authentication and delivery of such Debt Securities and the
execution and delivery of any supplemental indenture will not violate the terms of this Indenture; and 
 (vii) such other
matters as the Trustee may reasonably request. 
 Such Opinion of Counsel need express no opinion as to whether a court in the United States
would render a money judgment in a currency other than that of the United States. 
 The Trustee shall have the right to decline to
authenticate and deliver any Debt Securities under this Section 2.05 if the Trustee, being advised by counsel, determines that such action may not lawfully be taken or if the Trustee in good faith by its board of directors or trustees, executive
committee or a trust committee of directors, trustees or Officers (or any combination thereof) shall determine that such action would expose the Trustee to personal liability to existing Holders. 

  
 12 

 The Trustee may appoint an authenticating agent reasonably acceptable to the Issuers to
authenticate Debt Securities of any series. Unless limited by the terms of such appointment, an authenticating agent may authenticate Debt Securities whenever the Trustee may do so. Each reference in this Indenture to authentication by the
Trustee includes authentication by such agent. An authenticating agent has the same rights as any Registrar, paying agent or agent for service of notices and demands. 

Unless otherwise provided in the form of Debt Security for any series, each Debt Security shall be dated the date of its authentication. 

Section 2.06 Denomination of Debt Securities. Unless otherwise provided in the form of Debt Security for any series, the Debt
Securities of each series shall be issuable only as fully registered Debt Securities in such Dollar denominations as shall be specified or contemplated by Section 2.03. In the absence of any such specification with respect to the Debt
Securities of any series, the Debt Securities of such series shall be issuable in denominations of $1,000 and any integral multiple thereof. 

Section 2.07 Registration of Transfer and Exchange. 

(a) The Issuers shall keep or cause to be kept a register for each series of Debt Securities issued hereunder (hereinafter collectively
referred to as the “Debt Security Register”), in which, subject to such reasonable regulations as it may prescribe, the Issuers shall provide for the registration of all Debt Securities and the registration of transfer and exchange of Debt
Securities as in this Article II provided. At all reasonable times the Debt Security Register shall be open for inspection by the Trustee. Subject to Section 2.15, upon due presentment for registration of transfer of any Debt Security at any office
or agency to be maintained by the Issuers in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.02, the Issuers shall execute and the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver in the name of the transferee or transferees a new Debt Security or Debt Securities
of authorized denominations for a like aggregate principal amount. In no event may Debt Securities be issued as, or exchanged for, bearer securities. 

Unless and until otherwise determined by the Issuers by resolutions of each Issuer’s Board of Directors, the Debt Security Register shall
be kept at the corporate trust office of the Trustee referred to in Section 13.03 and, for this purpose, the Trustee referred to in Section 13.03 shall be designated “Registrar.” 

Debt Securities of any series (other than a Global Security, except as set forth below) may be exchanged for a like aggregate principal amount
of Debt Securities of the same series of other authorized denominations. Subject to Section 2.15, Debt Securities to be exchanged shall be surrendered at the office or agency to be maintained by the Issuers as provided in Section 4.02, and the
Issuers shall execute and the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver in exchange therefor the Debt Security or Debt Securities which the Holder making the exchange shall be entitled to receive. 

  
 13 

 (b) All Debt Securities presented or surrendered for registration of transfer, exchange or
payment shall (if so required by the Issuers, the Trustee or the Registrar) be duly endorsed or be accompanied by a written instrument or instruments of transfer, in form satisfactory to the Issuers, the Trustee and the Registrar, duly executed by
the Holder or his attorney duly authorized in writing. 
 All Debt Securities issued in exchange for or upon registration of transfer of
Debt Securities shall be the valid obligations of the Issuers, evidencing the same debt, and entitled to the same benefits under this Indenture as the Debt Securities surrendered for such exchange or transfer. 

No service charge shall be made for any exchange or registration of transfer of Debt Securities (except as provided by Section 2.09), but the
Issuers may require payment of a sum sufficient to cover any tax, fee, assessment or other governmental charge that may be imposed in relation thereto, other than those expressly provided in this Indenture to be made at the Issuers’ own expense
or without expense or without charge to the Holders. 
 The Issuers shall not be required to (i) issue, register the transfer of or
exchange any Debt Securities for a period of 15 days next preceding any mailing of notice of redemption of Debt Securities of such series or (ii) register the transfer of or exchange any Debt Securities selected, called or being called for
redemption; except the portion of any such Debt Security not so selected or called. 
 Prior to the due presentation for registration of
transfer of any Debt Security, the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors, the Trustee, any paying agent or any Registrar may deem and treat the Person in whose name a Debt Security is registered as the absolute owner of such Debt Security for the
purpose of receiving payment of or on account of the principal of, and premium, if any, and (subject to Section 2.12) interest on, such Debt Security and for all other purposes whatsoever, whether or not such Debt Security is overdue, and none of
the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors, the Trustee, any paying agent or any Registrar shall be affected by notice to the contrary. 
 None
of the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors, the Trustee, any agent of the Trustee, any paying agent or any Registrar will have any responsibility or liability for any aspect of the records relating to, or payments made on account of, beneficial
ownership interests of a Global Security or for maintaining, supervising or reviewing any records relating to such beneficial ownership interests. 

Section 2.08 Temporary Debt Securities. Pending the preparation of definitive Debt Securities of any series, the Issuers may
execute and the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver temporary Debt Securities (printed, lithographed, photocopied, typewritten or otherwise produced) of any authorized denomination, and substantially in the form of the definitive Debt Securities
in lieu of which they are issued, in registered form with such omissions, insertions and variations as may be appropriate for temporary Debt Securities, all as may be determined by the Issuers with the concurrence of the Trustee. Temporary Debt
Securities may contain such reference to any provisions of this Indenture as may be appropriate. Every temporary Debt Security shall be executed by the Issuers and be authenticated by the Trustee upon the same conditions and in substantially
the same manner, and with like effect, as the definitive Debt Securities. 

  
 14 

 If temporary Debt Securities of any series are issued, the Issuers will cause definitive Debt
Securities of such series to be prepared without unreasonable delay. After the preparation of definitive Debt Securities of such series, the temporary Debt Securities of such series shall be exchangeable for definitive Debt Securities of such
series upon surrender of the temporary Debt Securities of such series at the office or agency of the Issuers at a Place of Payment for such series, without charge to the Holder thereof, except as provided in Section 2.07 in connection with a
transfer. Upon surrender for cancellation of any one or more temporary Debt Securities of any series, the Issuers shall execute and the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver in exchange therefor a like principal amount of definitive Debt
Securities of the same series of authorized denominations and of like tenor. Until so exchanged, temporary Debt Securities of any series shall in all respects be entitled to the same benefits under this Indenture as definitive Debt Securities
of such series. 
 Upon any exchange of a portion of a temporary Global Security for a definitive Global Security or for the individual Debt
Securities represented thereby pursuant to Section 2.07 or this Section 2.08, the temporary Global Security shall be endorsed by the Trustee to reflect the reduction of the principal amount evidenced thereby, whereupon the principal amount of such
temporary Global Security shall be reduced for all purposes by the amount to be exchanged and endorsed. 
 Section 2.09 Mutilated,
Destroyed, Lost or Stolen Debt Securities. If (a) any mutilated Debt Security is surrendered to the Trustee at its corporate trust office or (b) the Issuers and the Trustee receive evidence to their satisfaction of the
destruction, loss or theft of any Debt Security, and there is delivered to the Issuers and the Trustee such security or indemnity as may be required by them to save each of them and any paying agent harmless, and neither the Issuers nor the Trustee
receives notice that such Debt Security has been acquired by a protected purchaser, then the Issuers shall execute and, upon an Issuer Order, the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver, in exchange for or in lieu of any such mutilated, destroyed,
lost or stolen Debt Security, a new Debt Security of the same series of like tenor, form, terms and principal amount, bearing a number not contemporaneously Outstanding. Upon the issuance of any substituted Debt Security, the Issuers or the
Trustee may require the payment of a sum sufficient to cover any tax, fee, assessment or other governmental charge that may be imposed in relation thereto and any other expenses connected therewith. In case any Debt Security which has matured
or is about to mature or which has been called for redemption shall become mutilated or be destroyed, lost or stolen, the Issuers may, instead of issuing a substituted Debt Security, pay or authorize the payment of the same (without surrender
thereof except in the case of a mutilated Debt Security) if the applicant for such payment shall furnish the Issuers and the Trustee with such security or indemnity as either may require to save it harmless from all risk, however remote, and, in
case of destruction, loss or theft, evidence to the satisfaction of the Issuers and the Trustee of the destruction, loss or theft of such Debt Security and of the ownership thereof. 

Every substituted Debt Security of any series issued pursuant to the provisions of this Section 2.09 by virtue of the fact that any Debt
Security is destroyed, lost or stolen shall constitute an original additional contractual obligation of the Issuers, whether or not the 

  
 15 

 
destroyed, lost or stolen Debt Security shall be found at any time, and shall be entitled to all the benefits of this Indenture equally and proportionately with any and all other Debt Securities
of that series duly issued hereunder. All Debt Securities shall be held and owned upon the express condition that the foregoing provisions are exclusive with respect to the replacement or payment of mutilated, destroyed, lost or stolen Debt
Securities, and shall preclude any and all other rights or remedies, notwithstanding any law or statute existing or hereafter enacted to the contrary with respect to the replacement or payment of negotiable instruments or other securities without
their surrender. 
 Section 2.10 Cancellation of Surrendered Debt Securities. All Debt Securities surrendered for payment,
redemption, registration of transfer or exchange shall, if surrendered to an Issuer or any paying agent or a Registrar, be delivered to the Trustee for cancellation by it, or if surrendered to the Trustee, shall be canceled by it, and no Debt
Securities shall be issued in lieu thereof except as expressly permitted by any of the provisions of this Indenture. All canceled Debt Securities held by the Trustee shall be destroyed (subject to the record retention requirements of the
Exchange Act) and certification of their destruction delivered to the Issuers, unless otherwise directed. On request of the Issuers, the Trustee shall deliver to the Issuers canceled Debt Securities held by the Trustee. If either of the
Issuers shall acquire any of the Debt Securities, however, such acquisition shall not operate as a redemption or satisfaction of the Debt represented thereby unless and until the same are delivered or surrendered to the Trustee for
cancellation. The Issuers may not issue new Debt Securities to replace Debt Securities that have been redeemed, paid or delivered to the Trustee for cancellation. 

Section 2.11 Provisions of the Indenture and Debt Securities for the Sole Benefit of the Parties and the Holders. Nothing in this
Indenture or in the Debt Securities, expressed or implied, shall give or be construed to give to any Person, other than the parties hereto, the holders of any Senior Indebtedness, the Holders or any Registrar or paying agent, any legal or equitable
right, remedy or claim under or in respect of this Indenture, or under any covenant, condition or provision herein contained; all its covenants, conditions and provisions being for the sole benefit of the parties hereto, the Holders and any
Registrar and paying agents. 
 Section 2.12 Payment of Interest; Interest Rights Preserved. 

(a) Interest on any Debt Security that is payable and is punctually paid or duly provided for on any interest payment date shall be paid to
the Person in whose name such Debt Security is registered at the close of business on the regular record date for such interest notwithstanding the cancellation of such Debt Security upon any transfer or exchange subsequent to the regular record
date. Payment of interest on Debt Securities shall be made at the corporate trust office of the Trustee specified in Section 13.03 (except as otherwise specified pursuant to Section 2.03), or at the option of the Issuers, by check mailed to the
address of the Person entitled thereto as such address shall appear in the Debt Security Register or, if provided pursuant to Section 2.03 and in accordance with arrangements satisfactory to the Trustee, at the option of the Holder by wire transfer
to an account designated by the Holder. 
 (b) Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section 2.12 and Section 2.17, each Debt Security
of a particular series delivered under this Indenture upon registration of transfer of or in exchange for or in lieu of any other Debt Security of the same series shall carry the rights to interest accrued and unpaid, and to accrue, which were
carried by such other Debt Security. 

  
 16 

 Section 2.13 Securities Denominated in Dollars. Except as otherwise specified
pursuant to Section 2.03 for Debt Securities of any series, payment of the principal of, and premium, if any, and interest on, Debt Securities of such series will be made in Dollars. 

Section 2.14 Wire Transfers. Notwithstanding any other provision to the contrary in this Indenture, the Issuers may make any
payment of moneys required to be deposited with the Trustee on account of principal of, or premium, if any, or interest on, the Debt Securities (whether pursuant to optional or mandatory redemption payments, interest payments or otherwise) by wire
transfer in immediately available funds to an account designated by the Trustee before 11:00 a.m., New York City time, on the date such moneys are to be paid to the Holders of the Debt Securities in accordance with the terms hereof. 

Section 2.15 Securities Issuable in the Form of a Global Security. 

(a) If the Issuers shall establish pursuant to Sections 2.01 and 2.03 that the Debt Securities of a particular series are to be issued in
whole or in part in the form of one or more Global Securities, then the Issuers shall execute and the Trustee or its agent shall, in accordance with Section 2.05, authenticate and deliver, such Global Security or Securities, which shall represent,
and shall be denominated in an amount equal to the aggregate principal amount of, the Outstanding Debt Securities of such series to be represented by such Global Security or Securities, or such portion thereof as the Issuers shall specify in an
Officers’ Certificate, shall be registered in the name of the Depositary for such Global Security or Securities or its nominee, shall be delivered by the Trustee or its agent to the Depositary or pursuant to the Depositary’s instruction
and shall bear a legend substantially to the following effect: 
 “UNLESS THIS CERTIFICATE IS PRESENTED BY AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE OF THE DEPOSITORY TRUST COMPANY, A NEW YORK CORPORATION (“DTC”), NEW YORK, NEW YORK, TO THE ISSUERS OR THEIR AGENT FOR REGISTRATION OF TRANSFER, EXCHANGE OR PAYMENT, AND ANY CERTIFICATE ISSUED IS REGISTERED IN THE NAME OF
CEDE & CO. OR SUCH OTHER NAME AS IS REQUESTED BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF DTC (AND ANY PAYMENT IS MADE TO CEDE & CO., OR TO SUCH OTHER ENTITY AS IS REQUESTED BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF DTC), ANY TRANSFER, PLEDGE OR
OTHER USE HEREOF FOR VALUE OR OTHERWISE BY OR TO ANY PERSON IS WRONGFUL INASMUCH AS THE REGISTERED OWNER HEREOF, CEDE & CO., HAS AN INTEREST HEREIN. 

TRANSFERS OF THIS GLOBAL SECURITY SHALL BE LIMITED TO TRANSFERS IN WHOLE, BUT NOT IN PART, TO NOMINEES OF DTC OR TO A SUCCESSOR
THEREOF OR SUCH SUCCESSOR’S NOMINEE AND TRANSFERS OF PORTIONS OF THIS GLOBAL SECURITY SHALL BE LIMITED TO TRANSFERS MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RESTRICTIONS SET FORTH IN THE INDENTURE REFERRED TO HEREIN.” 

  
 17 

 or such other legend as may then be required by the Depositary for such Global Security or Securities. 

(b) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Section 2.15 or of Section 2.07 to the contrary, and subject to the provisions of paragraph
(c) below, unless the terms of a Global Security expressly permit such Global Security to be exchanged in whole or in part for definitive Debt Securities in registered form, a Global Security may be transferred, in whole but not in part and in
the manner provided in Section 2.07, only by the Depositary to a nominee of the Depositary for such Global Security, or by a nominee of the Depositary to the Depositary or another nominee of the Depositary, or by the Depositary or a nominee of the
Depositary to a successor Depositary for such Global Security selected or approved by the Issuers, or to a nominee of such successor Depositary. 

(c) (i) If at any time the Depositary for a Global Security or Securities notifies the Issuers that it is unwilling or unable to continue as
Depositary for such Global Security or Securities or if at any time the Depositary for the Debt Securities for such series shall no longer be eligible or in good standing under the Exchange Act or other applicable statute, rule or regulation, the
Issuers shall appoint a successor Depositary with respect to such Global Security or Securities. If a successor Depositary for such Global Security or Securities is not appointed by the Issuers within 90 days after the Issuers receive such
notice or become aware of such ineligibility, the Issuers shall execute, and the Trustee or its agent, upon receipt of an Issuer Order for the authentication and delivery of such individual Debt Securities of such series in exchange for such Global
Security or Securities, will authenticate and deliver, individual Debt Securities of such series of like tenor and terms in definitive form in an aggregate principal amount equal to the principal amount of the Global Security or Securities in
exchange for such Global Security or Securities. 
 (ii) If an Event of Default occurs and the Depositary for a Global
Security or Securities notifies the Trustee of its decision to require that the Debt Securities of any series or portion thereof issued or issuable in the form of one or more Global Securities shall no longer be represented by such Global Security
or Securities, the Issuers shall appoint a successor Depositary with respect to such Global Security or Securities. In such event the Issuers will execute, and the Trustee, upon receipt of an Issuer Order for the authentication and delivery of
individual Debt Securities of such series in exchange in whole or in part for such Global Security or Securities, will authenticate and deliver individual Debt Securities of such series of like tenor and terms in definitive form in an aggregate
principal amount equal to the principal amount of such series or portion thereof in exchange for such Global Security or Securities. 

(iii) If specified by the Issuers pursuant to Sections 2.01 and 2.03 with respect to Debt Securities issued or issuable in the
form of a Global Security, the Depositary for such Global Security may surrender such Global Security in exchange in whole or in part for individual Debt Securities of such series of like tenor and terms in definitive form on such terms as are
acceptable to the Issuers, the Trustee and such Depositary. Thereupon 

  
 18 

 
the Issuers shall execute, and the Trustee or its agent upon receipt of an Issuer Order for the authentication and delivery of definitive Debt Securities of such series shall authenticate and
deliver, without service charge, to each Person specified by such Depositary a new Debt Security or Securities of the same series of like tenor and terms and of any authorized denomination as requested by such Person in aggregate principal amount
equal to and in exchange for such Person’s beneficial interest in the Global Security; and to such Depositary a new Global Security of like tenor and terms and in an authorized denomination equal to the difference, if any, between the principal
amount of the surrendered Global Security and the aggregate principal amount of Debt Securities delivered to Holders thereof. 

(iv) In any exchange provided for in any of the preceding three paragraphs, the Issuers will execute and the Trustee or its
agent will authenticate and deliver individual Debt Securities. Upon the exchange of the entire principal amount of a Global Security for individual Debt Securities, such Global Security shall be canceled by the Trustee or its agent. Except as
provided in the preceding paragraph, Debt Securities issued in exchange for a Global Security pursuant to this Section 2.15 shall be registered in such names and in such authorized denominations as the Depositary for such Global Security, pursuant
to instructions from its direct or indirect participants or otherwise, shall instruct the Trustee or the Registrar. The Trustee or the Registrar shall deliver such Debt Securities to the Persons in whose names such Debt Securities are so
registered. 
 (v) Payments in respect of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on any Debt Securities registered
in the name of the Depositary or its nominee will be payable to the Depositary or such nominee in its capacity as the registered owner of such Global Security. The Issuers, any Subsidiary Guarantors and the Trustee may treat the Person in whose name
the Debt Securities, including the Global Security, are registered as the owner thereof for the purpose of receiving such payments and for any and all other purposes whatsoever. None of the Issuers, any Subsidiary Guarantors, the Trustee, any
Registrar, the paying agent or any other agent of the Issuers, any Subsidiary Guarantors or the Trustee will have any responsibility or liability for any aspect of the records relating to or payments made on account of the beneficial ownership
interests of the Global Security by the Depositary or its nominee or any of the Depositary’s direct or indirect participants, or for maintaining, supervising or reviewing any records of the Depositary, its nominee or any of its direct or
indirect participants relating to the beneficial ownership interests of the Global Security, the payments to the beneficial owners of the Global Security of amounts paid to the Depositary or its nominee, or any other matter relating to the actions
and practices of the Depositary, its nominee or any of its direct or indirect participants. None of the Issuers, any Subsidiary Guarantors, the Trustee or any such agent will be liable for any delay by the Depositary, its nominee, or any of its
direct or indirect participants in identifying the beneficial owners of the Debt Securities, and the Issuers, any Subsidiary Guarantors, the Trustee and any such agents may conclusively rely on, and will be protected in relying on, instructions from
the Depositary or its nominee for all purposes (including with respect to the registration and delivery, and the respective principal amounts, of the Debt Securities to be issued). 

  
 19 

 Section 2.16 Medium Term Securities. Notwithstanding any contrary provision herein, if all
Debt Securities of a series are not to be originally issued at one time, it shall not be necessary for either of the Issuers to deliver to the Trustee an Officers’ Certificate, resolutions of each such Issuer’s Board of Directors,
supplemental indenture, Opinion of Counsel or written order or any other document otherwise required pursuant to Section 2.01, 2.03, 2.05 or 13.05 at or prior to the time of authentication of each Debt Security of such series if such documents are
delivered to the Trustee or its agent at or prior to the authentication upon original issuance of the first such Debt Security of such series to be issued; provided, that any subsequent request by the Issuers to the Trustee to authenticate Debt
Securities of such series upon original issuance shall constitute a representation and warranty by the Issuers that, as of the date of such request, the statements made in the Officers’ Certificate delivered pursuant to Section 2.05 or 13.05
shall be true and correct as if made on such date and that the Opinion of Counsel delivered at or prior to such time of authentication of an original issuance of Debt Securities shall specifically state that it shall relate to all subsequent
issuances of Debt Securities of such series that are identical to the Debt Securities issued in the first issuance of Debt Securities of such series. 

An Issuer Order delivered by the Issuers to the Trustee in the circumstances set forth in the preceding paragraph, may provide that Debt
Securities which are the subject thereof will be authenticated and delivered by the Trustee or its agent on original issue from time to time upon the telephonic or written order of Persons designated in such written order (any such telephonic
instructions to be promptly confirmed in writing by such Person) and that such Persons are authorized to determine, consistent with the Officers’ Certificate, supplemental indenture or resolution of the Board of Directors relating to such
written order, such terms and conditions of such Debt Securities as are specified in such Officers’ Certificate, supplemental indenture or such resolution. 

Section 2.17 Defaulted Interest. Any interest on any Debt Security of a particular series which is payable, but is not punctually paid
or duly provided for, on the dates and in the manner provided in the Debt Securities of such series and in this Indenture (herein called “Defaulted Interest”) shall forthwith cease to be payable to the Holder thereof on the relevant record
date by virtue of having been such Holder, and such Defaulted Interest may be paid by the Issuers, at their election in each case, as provided in clause (i) or (ii) below: 

(i) The Issuers may elect to make payment of any Defaulted Interest to the Persons in whose names the Debt Securities of such
series are registered at the close of business on a special record date for the payment of such Defaulted Interest, which shall be fixed in the following manner. The Issuers shall notify the Trustee in writing of the amount of Defaulted
Interest proposed to be paid on each such Debt Security of such series and the date of the proposed payment, and at the same time the Issuers shall deposit with the Trustee an amount of money equal to the aggregate amount proposed to be paid in
respect of such Defaulted Interest or shall make arrangements satisfactory to the Trustee for such deposit prior to the date of the proposed payment, such money when deposited to be held in trust for the benefit of the Persons entitled to such
Defaulted Interest as in this clause provided. Thereupon the Trustee shall fix a special record date for the payment of such Defaulted Interest which shall be not more than 15 days and not less than 10 days prior to the date of the proposed
payment and not less than 10 days after the receipt by the Trustee of the notice of the proposed payment. The Trustee shall 

  
 20 

 
promptly notify the Issuers of such special record date and, in the name and at the expense of the Issuers, shall cause notice of the proposed payment of such Defaulted Interest and the special
record date therefor to be mailed, first class postage pre-paid, to each Holder thereof at its address as it appears in the Debt Security Register, not less than 10 days prior to such special record date. Notice of the proposed payment of such
Defaulted Interest and the special record date therefor having been so mailed, such Defaulted Interest shall be paid to the Persons in whose names the Debt Securities of such series are registered at the close of business on such special record
date. 
 (ii) The Issuers may make payment of any Defaulted Interest on the Debt Securities of such series in any other
lawful manner not inconsistent with the requirements of any securities exchange on which the Debt Securities of such series may be listed, and upon such notice as may be required by such exchange, if, after notice given by the Issuers to the Trustee
of the proposed payment pursuant to this clause, such manner of payment shall be deemed practicable by the Trustee. 
 Section 2.18 CUSIP
and ISIN Numbers. The Issuers in issuing the Debt Securities may use “CUSIP” and “ISIN” numbers (if then generally in use), and, if so, the Trustee shall use such numbers in notices of redemption as a convenience to Holders;
provided that any such notice may state that no representation is made as to the accuracy of such numbers either as printed on the Debt Securities or as contained in any notice of a redemption and that reliance may be placed only on the other
identification numbers printed on the Debt Securities, and any such redemption shall not be affected by any defect in or omission of such numbers. The Issuers will promptly notify the Trustee in writing of any change in the “CUSIP” or
“ISIN” numbers. 
 ARTICLE III 

REDEMPTION OF DEBT SECURITIES 

Section 3.01 Applicability of Article. The provisions of this Article shall be applicable to the Debt Securities of any series
which are redeemable before their Stated Maturity except as otherwise specified as contemplated by Section 2.03 for Debt Securities of such series. 

Section 3.02 Notice of Redemption; Selection of Debt Securities. In case the Issuers shall desire to exercise the right to redeem
all or, as the case may be, any part of the Debt Securities of any series in accordance with their terms, by resolution of the Board of Directors of each Issuer or a supplemental indenture, the Issuers shall fix a date for redemption and shall give
notice of such redemption at least 30 and not more than 60 days prior to the date fixed for redemption to the Holders of Debt Securities of such series so to be redeemed as a whole or in part, in the manner provided in Section 13.03. The notice
if given in the manner herein provided shall be conclusively presumed to have been duly given, whether or not the Holder receives such notice. In any case, failure to give such notice or any defect in the notice to the Holder of any Debt
Security of a series designated for redemption as a whole or in part shall not affect the validity of the proceedings for the redemption of any other Debt Security of such series. 

Each such notice of redemption shall specify (i) the date fixed for redemption, (ii) the redemption price at which Debt Securities
of such series are to be redeemed (or the method of calculating such redemption price), (iii) the Place or Places of Payment that payment will be 

  
 21 

 
made upon presentation and surrender of such Debt Securities, (iv) that any interest accrued to the date fixed for redemption will be paid as specified in said notice, (v) that the
redemption is for a sinking fund payment (if applicable), (vi) that, unless otherwise specified in such notice, if the Issuers default in making such redemption payment or if such payment is prohibited by the terms of Article XII, the paying
agent is prohibited from making such payment pursuant to the terms of this Indenture, (vii) that on and after said date any interest thereon or on the portions thereof to be redeemed will cease to accrue, (viii) that in the case of
Original Issue Discount Securities original issue discount accrued after the date fixed for redemption will cease to accrue, (ix) the terms of the Debt Securities of that series pursuant to which the Debt Securities of that series are being
redeemed and (x) that no representation is made as to the correctness or accuracy of any CUSIP or ISIN number, if any, listed in such notice or printed on the Debt Securities of that series. If less than all the Debt Securities of a series
are to be redeemed the notice of redemption shall specify the certificate numbers of any Debt Securities of that series to be redeemed that are not in global form. In case any Debt Security of a series is to be redeemed in part only, the notice
of redemption shall state the portion of the principal amount thereof to be redeemed and shall state that on and after the date fixed for redemption, upon surrender of such Debt Security, a new Debt Security or Debt Securities of that series in
principal amount equal to the unredeemed portion thereof, will be issued. 
 At least five days before the giving of any notice of
redemption, unless the Trustee consents to a shorter period, the Issuers shall give written notice to the Trustee of the Redemption Date, the principal amount of Debt Securities to be redeemed and the series and terms of the Debt Securities pursuant
to which such redemption will occur. Such notice shall be accompanied by an Officers’ Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel from the Issuers to the effect that such redemption will comply with the conditions herein, and such notice may be
revoked at any time prior to the giving of a notice of redemption to the Holders pursuant to this Section 3.02. If fewer than all the Debt Securities of a series are to be redeemed, the record date relating to such redemption shall be selected by
the Issuers and given in writing to the Trustee, which record date shall be not less than three days after the date of notice to the Trustee. 

By 11 a.m., New York City time, on the Redemption Date for any Debt Securities, the Issuers shall deposit with the Trustee or with a paying
agent (or, if an Issuer is acting as its own paying agent, segregate and hold in trust) an amount of money in Dollars (except as provided pursuant to Section 2.03) sufficient to pay the redemption price of such Debt Securities or any portions
thereof that are to be redeemed on that date, together with any interest accrued to the Redemption Date. 
 If less than all the Debt
Securities of like tenor and terms of a series are to be redeemed (other than pursuant to mandatory sinking fund redemptions), the Trustee shall select, on a pro rata basis, by lot or by such other method as in its sole discretion it shall deem
appropriate and fair, the Debt Securities of that series or portions thereof (in multiples of $1,000) to be redeemed. In any case where more than one Debt Security of such series is registered in the same name, the Trustee in its discretion may
treat the aggregate principal amount so registered as if it were represented by one Debt Security of such series. The Trustee shall promptly notify the Issuers in writing of the Debt Securities selected for redemption and, in the case of any
Debt Securities selected for partial redemption, the principal amount thereof to be redeemed. If any Debt Security called for redemption shall not be so paid upon surrender thereof on such Redemption

  
 22 

 
Date, the principal, premium, if any, and interest shall bear interest until paid from the Redemption Date at the rate borne by the Debt Securities of that series. If less than all the Debt
Securities of unlike tenor and terms of a series are to be redeemed, the particular Debt Securities to be redeemed shall be selected by the Issuers. Provisions of this Indenture that apply to Debt Securities called for redemption also apply to
portions of Debt Securities called for redemption. 
 Section 3.03 Payment of Debt Securities Called for Redemption. If notice
of redemption has been given as provided in Section 3.02, the Debt Securities or portions of Debt Securities of the series with respect to which such notice has been given shall become due and payable on the date and at the Place or Places of
Payment stated in such notice at the applicable redemption price, together with any interest accrued to the date fixed for redemption, and on and after said date (unless the Issuers shall default in the payment of such Debt Securities at the
applicable redemption price, together with any interest accrued to said date, or the terms of Article XII shall prohibit such payment) any interest on the Debt Securities or portions of Debt Securities of any series so called for redemption shall
cease to accrue, and any original issue discount in the case of Original Issue Discount Securities shall cease to accrue. On presentation and surrender of such Debt Securities at the Place or Places of Payment in said notice specified, the said
Debt Securities or the specified portions thereof shall be paid and redeemed by the Issuers at the applicable redemption price, together with any interest accrued thereon to the date fixed for redemption. 

Any Debt Security that is to be redeemed only in part shall be surrendered at the Place of Payment with, if the Issuers, the Registrar or the
Trustee so requires, due endorsement by, or a written instrument of transfer in form satisfactory to the Issuers, the Registrar and the Trustee duly executed by, the Holder thereof or his attorney duly authorized in writing, and the Issuers shall
execute, and the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver to the Holder of such Debt Security without service charge, a new Debt Security or Debt Securities of the same series, of like tenor and form, of any authorized denomination as requested by
such Holder in aggregate principal amount equal to and in exchange for the unredeemed portion of the principal of the Debt Security so surrendered; except that if a Global Security is so surrendered, the Issuers shall execute, and the Trustee shall
authenticate and deliver to the Depositary for such Global Security, without service charge, a new Global Security in a denomination equal to and in exchange for the unredeemed portion of the principal of the Global Security so surrendered. In
the case of a Debt Security providing appropriate space for such notation, at the option of the Holder thereof, the Trustee, in lieu of delivering a new Debt Security or Debt Securities as aforesaid, may make a notation on such Debt Security of the
payment of the redeemed portion thereof. 
 Section 3.04 Mandatory and Optional Sinking Funds. The minimum amount of any sinking fund
payment provided for by the terms of Debt Securities of any series, resolution of the Board of Directors or a supplemental indenture is herein referred to as a “mandatory sinking fund payment,” and any payment in excess of such minimum
amount provided for by the terms of Debt Securities of any series, resolution of the Board of Directors or a supplemental indenture is herein referred to as an “optional sinking fund payment.” 

In lieu of making all or any part of any mandatory sinking fund payment with respect to any Debt Securities of a series in cash, the Issuers
may at their option (a) deliver to the Trustee 

  
 23 

 
Debt Securities of that series theretofore purchased or otherwise acquired by the Issuers or (b) receive credit for the principal amount of Debt Securities of that series which have been
redeemed either at the election of the Issuers pursuant to the terms of such Debt Securities or through the application of permitted optional sinking fund payments pursuant to the terms of such Debt Securities, resolution or supplemental indenture;
provided, that such Debt Securities have not been previously so credited. Such Debt Securities shall be received and credited for such purpose by the Trustee at the redemption price specified in such Debt Securities, resolution or supplemental
indenture for redemption through operation of the sinking fund and the amount of such mandatory sinking fund payment shall be reduced accordingly. 

Section 3.05 Redemption of Debt Securities for Sinking Fund. Not less than 60 days prior to each sinking fund payment date for any
series of Debt Securities, the Issuers will deliver to the Trustee an Officers’ Certificate specifying the amount of the next ensuing sinking fund payment for that series pursuant to the terms of that series, any resolution or supplemental
indenture, the portion thereof, if any, which is to be satisfied by payment of cash and the portion thereof, if any, which is to be satisfied by delivering and crediting Debt Securities of that series pursuant to this Section 3.05 (which Debt
Securities, if not previously redeemed, will accompany such certificate) and whether the Issuers intend to exercise its right to make any permitted optional sinking fund payment with respect to such series. Such certificate shall also state that no
Event of Default has occurred and is continuing with respect to such series. Such certificate shall be irrevocable and upon its delivery the Issuers shall be obligated to make the cash payment or payments therein referred to, if any, by 11 a.m., New
York City time, on the next succeeding sinking fund payment date. Failure of the Issuers to deliver such certificate (or to deliver the Debt Securities specified in this paragraph) shall not constitute a Default, but such failure shall require that
the sinking fund payment due on the next succeeding sinking fund payment date for that series shall be paid entirely in cash and shall be sufficient to redeem the principal amount of such Debt Securities subject to a mandatory sinking fund payment
without the option to deliver or credit Debt Securities as provided in this Section 3.05 and without the right to make any optional sinking fund payment, if any, with respect to such series. 

Any sinking fund payment or payments (mandatory or optional) made in cash plus any unused balance of any preceding sinking fund payments made
in cash which shall equal or exceed $100,000 (or a lesser sum if the Issuers shall so request) with respect to the Debt Securities of any particular series shall be applied by the Trustee on the sinking fund payment date on which such payment is
made (or, if such payment is made before a sinking fund payment date, on the sinking fund payment date following the date of such payment) to the redemption of such Debt Securities at the redemption price specified in such Debt Securities,
resolution or supplemental indenture for operation of the sinking fund together with any accrued interest to the date fixed for redemption. Any sinking fund moneys not so applied or allocated by the Trustee to the redemption of Debt Securities
shall be added to the next cash sinking fund payment received by the Trustee for such series and, together with such payment, shall be applied in accordance with the provisions of this Section 3.05. Any and all sinking fund moneys with respect
to the Debt Securities of any particular series held by the Trustee on the last sinking fund payment date with respect to Debt Securities of such series and not held for the payment or redemption of particular Debt Securities shall be applied by the
Trustee, together with other moneys, if necessary, to be deposited sufficient for the purpose, to the payment of the principal of the Debt Securities of that series at its Stated Maturity. 

  
 24 

 The Trustee shall select the Debt Securities to be redeemed upon such sinking fund payment date
in the manner specified in the last paragraph of Section 3.02 and the Issuers shall cause notice of the redemption thereof to be given in the manner provided in Section 3.02 except that the notice of redemption shall also state that the Debt
Securities are being redeemed by operation of the sinking fund. Such notice having been duly given, the redemption of such Debt Securities shall be made upon the terms and in the manner stated in Section 3.03. 

The Trustee shall not redeem any Debt Securities of a series with sinking fund moneys or mail any notice of redemption of such Debt Securities
by operation of the sinking fund for such series during the continuance of a Default in payment of interest on such Debt Securities or of any Event of Default (other than an Event of Default occurring as a consequence of this paragraph) with respect
to such Debt Securities, except that if the notice of redemption of any such Debt Securities shall theretofore have been mailed in accordance with the provisions hereof, the Trustee shall redeem such Debt Securities if cash sufficient for that
purpose shall be deposited with the Trustee for that purpose in accordance with the terms of this Article III. Except as aforesaid, any moneys in the sinking fund for such series at the time when any such Default or Event of Default shall occur
and any moneys thereafter paid into such sinking fund shall, during the continuance of such Default or Event of Default, be held as security for the payment of such Debt Securities; provided, however, that in case such Default or Event of Default
shall have been cured or waived as provided herein, such moneys shall thereafter be applied on the next sinking fund payment date for such Debt Securities on which such moneys may be applied pursuant to the provisions of this Section 3.05. 

ARTICLE IV 
 PARTICULAR
COVENANTS OF THE ISSUERS 
 Section 4.01 Payment of Principal of, and Premium, If Any, and Interest on, Debt Securities. The
Issuers, for the benefit of each series of Debt Securities, will duly and punctually pay or cause to be paid the principal of, and premium, if any, and interest on, each of the Debt Securities at the place, at the respective times and in the manner
provided herein or in the Debt Securities. Each installment of interest on any Debt Securities not in global form may at the Issuers’ option be paid by mailing checks for such interest payable to the Person entitled thereto pursuant to Section
2.07(a) to the address of such Person as it appears on the Debt Security Register. 
 Principal of and premium and interest on Debt
Securities of any series shall be considered paid on the date due if, by 11 a.m., New York City time, on such date the Trustee or any paying agent holds in accordance with this Indenture money sufficient to pay all principal, premium and interest
then due and, in the case of Debt Securities subordinated pursuant to the terms of Article XII, the Trustee or such paying agent, as the case may be, is not prohibited from paying such money to the Holders on that date pursuant to the terms of this
Indenture. 
 The Issuers shall pay interest on overdue principal or premium, if any, at the rate specified therefor in the Debt Securities,
and it shall pay interest on overdue installments of interest at the same rate to the extent lawful. 

  
 25 

 Section 4.02 Maintenance of Offices or Agencies for Registration of Transfer, Exchange and
Payment of Debt Securities. The Issuers will maintain in each Place of Payment for any series of Debt Securities an office or agency where Debt Securities of such series may be presented or surrendered for payment, and it shall also
maintain (in or outside such Place of Payment) an office or agency where Debt Securities of such series may be surrendered for registration of transfer or exchange and where notices and demands to or upon the Issuers in respect of the Debt
Securities of such series and this Indenture may be served. The Issuers will give prompt written notice to the Trustee of the location, and any change in the location, of such office or agency. If at any time the Issuers shall fail to
maintain any such required office or agency or shall fail to furnish the Trustee with the address thereof, such presentations, surrenders, notices and demands may be made or served at the office of the Trustee referred to in Section 13.03 hereof,
and the Issuers hereby appoint the Trustee as their agent to receive all presentations, surrenders, notices and demands. 
 The Issuers may
also from time to time designate different or additional offices or agencies to be maintained for such purposes (in or outside of such Place of Payment), and may from time to time rescind any such designation; provided, however, that no such
designation or rescission shall in any manner relieve the Issuers of their obligations described in the preceding paragraph. The Issuers will give prompt written notice to the Trustee of any such additional designation or rescission of
designation and any change in the location of any such different or additional office or agency. 
 Section 4.03 Appointment to Fill a
Vacancy in the Office of Trustee. The Issuers, whenever necessary to avoid or fill a vacancy in the office of Trustee, will appoint, in the manner provided in Section 7.08, a Trustee, so that there shall at all times be a Trustee hereunder
with respect to each series of Debt Securities. 
 Section 4.04 Duties of Paying Agents, etc. 

(a) The Issuers shall cause each paying agent, if any, other than the Trustee, to execute and deliver to the Trustee an instrument in which
such agent shall agree with the Trustee, subject to the provisions of this Section 4.04, 
 (i) that it will hold all sums
held by it as such agent for the payment of the principal of, and premium, if any, or interest on, the Debt Securities of any series (whether such sums have been paid to it by the Issuers or by any other obligor on the Debt Securities of such
series) in trust for the benefit of the Holders of the Debt Securities of such series; 
 (ii) that it will give the Trustee
notice of any failure by the Issuers (or by any other obligor on the Debt Securities of such series) to make any payment of the principal of, and premium, if any, or interest on, the Debt Securities of such series when the same shall be due and
payable; and 
 (iii) that it will at any time during the continuance of an Event of Default, upon the written request of the
Trustee, forthwith pay to the Trustee all sums so held by it as such agent. 

  
 26 

 (b) If either of the Issuers shall act as its own paying agent, it will, on or before each due
date of the principal of, and premium, if any, or interest on, the Debt Securities of any series, set aside, segregate and hold in trust for the benefit of the Holders of the Debt Securities of such series a sum sufficient to pay such principal,
premium, if any, or interest so becoming due. The Issuers will promptly notify the Trustee of any failure by either of the Issuers to take such action or the failure by any other obligor on such Debt Securities to make any payment of the
principal of, and premium, if any, or interest on, such Debt Securities when the same shall be due and payable. 
 (c) Anything in this
Section 4.04 to the contrary notwithstanding, either of the Issuers may, at any time, for the purpose of obtaining a satisfaction and discharge of this Indenture, or for any other reason, pay or cause to be paid to the Trustee all sums held in trust
by it or any paying agent, as required by this Section 4.04, such sums to be held by the Trustee upon the same trusts as those upon which such sums were held by such Issuer or such paying agent. 

(d) Whenever the Issuers shall have one or more paying agents with respect to any series of Debt Securities, they will, prior to each due date
of the principal of, and premium, if any, or interest on, any Debt Securities of such series, deposit with any such paying agent a sum sufficient to pay the principal, premium or interest so becoming due, such sum to be held in trust for the benefit
of the Persons entitled thereto, and (unless any such paying agent is the Trustee) the Issuers will promptly notify the Trustee of its action or failure so to act. 

(e) Anything in this Section 4.04 to the contrary notwithstanding, the agreement to hold sums in trust as provided in this Section 4.04 is
subject to the provisions of Section 11.05. 
 Section 4.05 SEC Reports; Financial Statements. 

(a) The Partnership shall, so long as any of the Debt Securities are Outstanding, file with the Trustee, within 30 days after it files the
same with the SEC, copies of the annual reports and the information, documents and other reports (or copies of such portions of any of the foregoing as the SEC may by rules and regulations prescribe) that the Partnership is required to file with the
SEC pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act. If the Partnership is not subject to the requirements of such Section 13 or 15(d), the Partnership shall file with the Trustee, within 30 days after it would have been required to file the
same with the SEC, financial statements, including any notes thereto (and with respect to annual reports, an auditors’ report by a firm of established national reputation), and a “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations,” both comparable to that which the Partnership would have been required to include in such annual reports, information, documents or other reports if the Partnership had been subject to the requirements of
such Section 13 or 15 (d). The Issuers shall also comply with the provisions of TIA Section 314 (a). 
 (b) The Partnership shall provide
the Trustee with a sufficient number of copies of all reports and other documents and information that the Trustee may be required to deliver to Holders under this Section. 

(c) The Partnership shall, so long as any of the Debt Securities are Outstanding, deliver to the Trustee, within 30 days of any Officer of the
Partnership becoming aware of the occurrence of any Event of Default, an Officers’ Certificate specifying such Event of Default, the status thereof and what action the Partnership is taking or proposes to take with respect thereto. 

  
 27 

 Section 4.06 Compliance Certificate. Each of the Issuers and any Subsidiary Guarantor
shall, so long as any of the Debt Securities are Outstanding, deliver to the Trustee, within 120 days after the end of each fiscal year of the Partnership, an Officers’ Certificate stating that a review of the activities of the Partnership and
its Subsidiaries during the preceding fiscal year has been made under the supervision of the Officers signing the certificate with a view to determining whether each of the Issuers and any Subsidiary Guarantor has kept, observed, performed and
fulfilled its obligations under this Indenture, and further stating, as to each such Officer signing such certificate, that to the best of his knowledge each of the Issuers and any Subsidiary Guarantor has kept, observed, performed and fulfilled
each and every covenant contained in this Indenture and is not in default in the performance or observance of any of the terms, provisions and conditions hereof, without regard to any grace period or requirement of notice required by this Indenture
(or, if a Default or Event of Default shall have occurred, describing all such Defaults or Events of Default of which such Officer may have knowledge and what action the Issuers or any Subsidiary Guarantor is taking or proposes to take with respect
thereto) and that to the best of his knowledge no event has occurred and remains in existence by reason of which payments on account of the principal of, or premium, if any, or interest, if any, on the Debt Securities are prohibited or, if such
event has occurred, a description of the event and what action the Partnership or any Subsidiary Guarantor is taking or proposes to take with respect thereto. 

Section 4.07 Further Instruments and Acts. The Issuers will, upon request of the Trustee, execute and deliver such further
instruments and do such further acts as may reasonably be necessary or proper to carry out more effectually the purposes of this Indenture. 

Section 4.08 Existence. Except as permitted by Article X hereof, each Issuer shall do or cause to be done all things necessary to
preserve and keep in full force and effect its existence. 
 Section 4.09 Maintenance of Properties. The Partnership shall cause
all properties owned by the Partnership or any of its Subsidiaries or used or held for use in the conduct of its business or the business of any such Subsidiary to be maintained and kept in good condition, repair and working order (reasonable wear
and tear excepted) and supplied with all necessary equipment and will cause to be made all necessary repairs, renewals, replacements, betterments and improvements thereof, all as in the judgment of the Partnership may be necessary so that the
business carried on in connection therewith may be properly and advantageously conducted at all times; provided that nothing in this Section shall prevent the Partnership from discontinuing the operation or maintenance of any of such properties if
such discontinuance is, in the judgment of the Partnership, desirable in the conduct of its business or the business of any such Subsidiary and not disadvantageous in any material respect to the Holders. 

Section 4.10 Payment of Taxes and Other Claims. The Partnership shall pay or discharge or cause to be paid or discharged, before the
same shall become delinquent, (i) all taxes, assessments and governmental charges levied or imposed upon the Partnership or any of its Subsidiaries or upon the income, profits or property of the Partnership or any of its Subsidiaries, and
(ii) all lawful claims for labor, materials and supplies which, if unpaid, might 

  
 28 

 
by law become a Lien upon the property of the Partnership or any of its Subsidiaries; provided that the Partnership shall not be required to pay or discharge or cause to be paid or discharged any
such tax, assessment, charge or claim whose amount, applicability or validity is being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings. 

Section 4.11 Waiver of Certain Covenants. The Issuers and the Subsidiary Guarantors may, with respect to the Debt Securities of any
series, omit in any particular instance to comply with any covenant set forth in this Article IV (except Sections 4.01 through 4.08) or made applicable to such Debt Securities pursuant to Section 2.03, if, before or after the time for such
compliance, the Holders of at least a majority in principal amount of the Outstanding Debt Securities of each series affected, waive such compliance in such instance with such covenant, but no such waiver shall extend to or affect such covenant
except to the extent so expressly waived, and, until such waiver shall become effective, the obligations of the Issuers and the Subsidiary Guarantors and the duties of the Trustee in respect of any such covenant shall remain in full force and
effect. 
 ARTICLE V 

HOLDERS’ LISTS AND REPORTS BY THE TRUSTEE 

Section 5.01 Issuers to Furnish Trustee Information as to Names and Addresses of Holders; Preservation of Information. The
Issuers covenant and agree that they will furnish or cause to be furnished to the Trustee with respect to the Debt Securities of each series: 

(a) not more than 10 days after each record date with respect to the payment of interest, if any, a list, in such form as the Trustee may
reasonably require, of the names and addresses of the Holders as of such record date, and 
 (b) at such other times as the Trustee may
request in writing, within 30 days after the receipt by the Issuers of any such request, a list of similar form and contents as of a date not more than 15 days prior to the time such list is furnished; 

provided, however, that so long as the Trustee shall be the Registrar, such lists shall not be required to be furnished. 

The Trustee shall preserve, in as current a form as is reasonably practicable, all information as to the names and addresses of the Holders
(i) contained in the most recent list furnished to it as provided in this Section 5.01 or (ii) received by it in the capacity of paying agent or Registrar (if so acting) hereunder. 

The Trustee may destroy any list furnished to it as provided in this Section 5.01 upon receipt of a new list so furnished. 

Section 5.02 Communications to Holders. Holders may communicate pursuant to Section 312(b) of the TIA with other Holders with respect
to their rights under this Indenture or the Debt Securities. The Issuers, the Trustee, the Registrar and anyone else shall have the protection of Section 312(c) of the TIA. 

  
 29 

 Section 5.03 Reports by Trustee. Within 60 days after each January 31, beginning with
the first January 31 following the date of this Indenture, and in any event on or before April 1 in each year, the Trustee shall mail to Holders a brief report dated as of such January 31 that complies with TIA Section 313 (a);
provided, however, that if no event described in TIA Section 313 (a) has occurred within the twelve months preceding the reporting date, no report need be transmitted. The Trustee also shall comply with TIA Section 313 (b). 

Reports pursuant to this Section 5.03 shall be transmitted by mail: 

(a) to all Holders, as the names and addresses of such Holders appear in the Debt Security Register; and 

(b) except in the cases of reports under Section 313(b)(2) of the TIA, to each Holder of a Debt Security of any series whose name and address
appear in the information preserved at the time by the Trustee in accordance with Section 5.01. 
 A copy of each report at the time of its
mailing to Holders shall be filed with the SEC and each stock exchange (if any) on which the Debt Securities of any series are listed. The Issuers agree to notify promptly the Trustee whenever the Debt Securities of any series become listed on
any stock exchange and of any delisting thereof. 
 Section 5.04 Record Dates for Action by Holders. If the Issuers shall solicit
from the Holders of Debt Securities of any series any action (including the making of any demand or request, the giving of any direction, notice, consent or waiver or the taking of any other action), the Issuers may, at their option, by resolution
of their respective Boards of Directors, fix in advance a record date for the determination of Holders of Debt Securities entitled to take such action, but the Issuers shall have no obligation to do so. Any such record date shall be fixed at the
Issuers’ discretion. If such a record date is fixed, such action may be sought or given before or after the record date, but only the Holders of Debt Securities of record at the close of business on such record date shall be deemed to be
Holders of Debt Securities for the purpose of determining whether Holders of the requisite proportion of Debt Securities of such series Outstanding have authorized or agreed or consented to such action, and for that purpose the Debt Securities of
such series Outstanding shall be computed as of such record date. 
 ARTICLE VI 

REMEDIES OF THE TRUSTEE AND HOLDERS IN EVENT OF DEFAULT 

Section 6.01 Events of Default. If any one or more of the following shall have occurred and be continuing with respect to Debt
Securities of any series (each of the following, an “Event of Default”): 
 (a) default in the payment of any installment of
interest upon any Debt Securities of that series as and when the same shall become due and payable, whether or not such payment shall be prohibited by Article XII, if applicable, and continuance of such default for a period of 30 days; or 

  
 30 

 (b) default in the payment of the principal of or premium, if any, on any Debt Securities of that
series as and when the same shall become due and payable, whether at Stated Maturity, upon redemption, by declaration, upon required repurchase or otherwise, whether or not such payment shall be prohibited by Article XII, if applicable; or 

(c) default in the payment of any sinking fund payment with respect to any Debt Securities of that series as and when the same shall become
due and payable, whether or not such payment is prohibited by Article XII, if applicable; or 
 (d) failure on the part of the Issuers, or
if any series of Debt Securities Outstanding under this Indenture is entitled to the benefits of the Guarantee, any of the Subsidiary Guarantors, duly to observe or perform (i) any of its covenants or agreements under Article X or (ii) any
other of the covenants or agreements on the part of the Issuers, or if applicable, any of the Subsidiary Guarantors, in the Debt Securities of that series, in any resolution of the Board of Directors of each Issuer authorizing the issuance of that
series of Debt Securities, in this Indenture with respect to such series or in any supplemental indenture with respect to such series (other than a covenant a default in the performance of which is elsewhere in this Section specifically dealt with),
and in the case of clause (ii) continuing for a period of 60 days (or 180 days in the case of a Reporting Failure) after the date on which written notice specifying such failure and requiring the Issuers, or if applicable, the Subsidiary
Guarantors, to remedy the same shall have been given to the Issuers, or if applicable, the Subsidiary Guarantors, by the Trustee or to the Issuers, or if applicable, the Subsidiary Guarantors, and the Trustee by the Holders of at least 25% in
aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities of that series at the time Outstanding; or 
 (e) either of the Issuers, or if any series
of Debt Securities Outstanding under this Indenture is entitled to the benefits of the Guarantee, any of the Subsidiary Guarantors, pursuant to or within the meaning of any Bankruptcy Law, 

(i) commences a voluntary case, 

(ii) consents to the entry of an order for relief against it in an involuntary case, 

(iii) consents to the appointment of a Custodian of it or for all or substantially all of its property; or 

(iv) makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors; 

(f) a court of competent jurisdiction enters an order or decree under any Bankruptcy Law that: 

(i) is for relief against either of the Issuers, or if any series of Debt Securities Outstanding under this Indenture is
entitled to the benefits of the Guarantee, any of the Subsidiary Guarantors, as debtor in an involuntary case, 
 (ii)
appoints a Custodian of either of the Issuers, or if any series of Debt Securities Outstanding under this Indenture is entitled to the benefits of the Guarantee, any of the Subsidiary Guarantors, or a Custodian for all or substantially all of the
property of either of the Issuers, or if applicable, any of the Subsidiary Guarantors, or 

  
 31 

 (iii) orders the liquidation of either of the Issuers, or if any series of Debt
Securities Outstanding under this Indenture is entitled to the benefits of the Guarantee, any of the Subsidiary Guarantors, 
 and the order or decree
remains unstayed and in effect for 60 days; 
 (g) if any series of Debt Securities Outstanding under this Indenture is entitled to the
benefits of the Guarantee, the Guarantee of any of the Subsidiary Guarantors ceases to be in full force and effect with respect to Debt Securities of that series (except as otherwise provided in this Indenture) or is declared null and void in a
judicial proceeding or any of the Subsidiary Guarantors denies or disaffirms its obligations under this Indenture or such Guarantee; or 

(h) any other Event of Default provided with respect to Debt Securities of that series; 

then and in each and every case that an Event of Default described in clause (a), (b), (c), (d), (g) or (h) with respect to Debt Securities of that
series at the time Outstanding occurs and is continuing, unless the principal of, premium, if any, and accrued and unpaid interest on all the Debt Securities of that series shall have already become due and payable, either the Trustee or the Holders
of not less than 25% in aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities of that series then Outstanding hereunder, by notice in writing to the Issuers (and to the Trustee if given by Holders), may declare the principal of (or, if the Debt
Securities of that series are Original Issue Discount Debt Securities, such portion of the principal amount as may be specified in the terms of that series), premium, if any, and interest on all the Debt Securities of that series to be due and
payable immediately, and upon any such declaration the same shall become and shall be immediately due and payable, anything in this Indenture or in the Debt Securities of that series contained to the contrary notwithstanding. If an Event of
Default described in clause (e) or (f) occurs with respect to either of the Issuers, then and in each and every such case, unless the principal of and accrued and unpaid interest on all the Debt Securities shall have become due and
payable, the principal of (or, if the Debt Securities of that series are Original Issue Discount Debt Securities, such portion of the principal amount as may be specified in the terms thereof), premium, if any, and interest on all the Debt
Securities then Outstanding hereunder shall ipso facto become and be immediately due and payable without any declaration or other act on the part of the Trustee or any Holders, anything in this Indenture or in the
Debt Securities contained to the contrary notwithstanding. 
 The Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities
of a particular series by written notice to the Trustee may rescind an acceleration and its consequences if the rescission would not conflict with any judgment or decree of a court of competent jurisdiction already rendered and if all existing
Events of Default with respect to that series have been cured or waived except nonpayment of principal, premium, if any, or interest that has become due solely because of acceleration. Upon any such rescission, the parties hereto shall be
restored respectively to their several positions and rights hereunder, and all rights, remedies and powers of the parties hereto shall continue as though no such proceeding had been taken. 

  
 32 

 Section 6.02 Collection of Debt by Trustee, etc. If an Event of Default occurs and is
continuing, the Trustee, in its own name and as trustee of an express trust, shall be entitled and empowered to institute any action or proceedings at law or in equity for the collection of the sums so due and unpaid or enforce the performance of
any provision of the Debt Securities of the affected series or this Indenture, and may prosecute any such action or proceedings to judgment or final decree, and may enforce any such judgment or final decree against any of the Subsidiary Guarantors
or the Issuers or any other obligor upon the Debt Securities of such series (and collect in the manner provided by law out of the property of any of the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Issuers or any other obligor upon the Debt Securities of such
series wherever situated the moneys adjudged or decreed to be payable). 
 In case there shall be pending proceedings for the bankruptcy or
for the reorganization of any of the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Issuers or any other obligor upon the Debt Securities of any series under any Bankruptcy Law, or in case a Custodian shall have been appointed for its property, or in case of any
other similar judicial proceedings relative to any of the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Issuers or any other obligor upon the Debt Securities of any series, its creditors or its property, the Trustee, irrespective of whether the principal of Debt
Securities of any series shall then be due and payable as therein expressed or by declaration or otherwise and irrespective of whether the Trustee shall have made any demand pursuant to the provisions of this Section 6.02, shall be entitled and
empowered, by intervention in such proceedings or otherwise, to file and prove a claim or claims for the whole amount of principal, premium, if any, and interest (or, if the Debt Securities of such series are Original Issue Discount Debt Securities,
such portion of the principal amount as may be specified in the terms of such series) owing and unpaid in respect of the Debt Securities of such series, and to file such other papers or documents as may be necessary or advisable in order to have the
claims of the Trustee (including any claim for reasonable compensation to the Trustee, its agents, attorneys and counsel, and for reimbursement of all expenses and liabilities incurred, and all advances made, by the Trustee except as a result of its
negligence or bad faith) and of the Holders thereof allowed in any such judicial proceedings relative to any of the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Issuers, or any other obligor upon the Debt Securities of such series, its creditors or its property,
and to collect and receive any moneys or other property payable or deliverable on any such claims, and to distribute all amounts received with respect to the claims of such Holders and of the Trustee on their behalf, and any receiver, assignee or
trustee in bankruptcy or reorganization is hereby authorized by each of such Holders to make payments to the Trustee, and, in the event that the Trustee shall consent to the making of payments directly to such Holders, to pay to the Trustee such
amount as shall be sufficient to cover reasonable compensation to the Trustee, its agents, attorneys and counsel, and all other reasonable expenses and liabilities incurred, and all advances made, by the Trustee except as a result of its negligence
or bad faith. 
 All rights of action and of asserting claims under this Indenture, or under any of the Debt Securities of any series, may
be enforced by the Trustee without the possession of any such Debt Securities, or the production thereof in any trial or other proceedings relative thereto, and any such action or proceedings instituted by the Trustee shall be brought in its own
name as trustee of an express trust, and any recovery of judgment (except for any amounts payable to the Trustee pursuant to Section 7.06) shall be for the ratable benefit of the Holders of all the Debt Securities in respect of which such action was
taken. 

  
 33 

 In case of an Event of Default hereunder the Trustee may in its discretion proceed to protect and
enforce the rights vested in it by this Indenture by such appropriate judicial proceedings as the Trustee shall deem most effectual to protect and enforce any of such rights, either at law or in equity or in bankruptcy or otherwise, whether for the
specific enforcement of any covenant or agreement contained in this Indenture or in aid of the exercise of any power granted in this Indenture, or to enforce any other legal or equitable right vested in the Trustee by this Indenture or by law. 

Section 6.03 Application of Moneys Collected by Trustee. Any moneys or other property collected by the Trustee pursuant to Section 6.02
with respect to Debt Securities of any series shall be applied, after giving effect to the provisions of Article XII, if applicable, in the order following, at the date or dates fixed by the Trustee for the distribution of such moneys or other
property, upon presentation of the several Debt Securities of such series in respect of which moneys or other property have been collected, and the notation thereon of the payment, if only partially paid, and upon surrender thereof if fully paid:

 FIRST: To the payment of all money due the Trustee pursuant to Section 7.06; 

SECOND: In case the principal of the Outstanding Debt Securities in respect of which such moneys have been collected shall not have
become due, to the payment of interest on the Debt Securities of such series in the order of the maturity of the installments of such interest, with interest (to the extent that such interest has been collected by the Trustee) upon the overdue
installments of interest at the rate or Yield to Maturity (in the case of Original Issue Discount Debt Securities) borne by the Debt Securities of such series, such payments to be made ratably to the Persons entitled thereto, without discrimination
or preference; 
 THIRD: In case the principal of the Outstanding Debt Securities in respect of which such moneys have been collected
shall have become due, by declaration or otherwise, to the payment of the whole amount then owing and unpaid upon the Debt Securities of such series for principal and premium, if any, and interest, with interest on the overdue principal and premium,
if any, and (to the extent that such interest has been collected by the Trustee) upon overdue installments of interest at the rate or Yield to Maturity (in the case of Original Issue Discount Debt Securities) borne by the Debt Securities of such
series; and, in case such moneys shall be insufficient to pay in full the whole amount so due and unpaid upon the Debt Securities of such series, then to the payment of such principal and premium, if any, and interest, without preference or priority
of principal and premium, if any, over interest, or of interest over principal and premium, if any, or of any installment of interest over any other installment of interest, or of any Debt Security of such series over any Debt Security of such
series, ratably to the aggregate of such principal and premium, if any, and interest; and 
 FOURTH: The remainder, if any, shall be
paid to the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Issuers, as applicable, or to whomsoever may be lawfully entitled to receive the same, or as a court of competent jurisdiction may direct. 

The Trustee may fix a record date and payment date for any payment to Holders pursuant to this Section 6.03. At least 15 days before such
record date, the Issuers shall mail to each Holder and the Trustee a notice that states the record date, the payment date and amount to be paid. 

  
 34 

 Section 6.04 Limitation on Suits by Holders. No Holder of any Debt Security of any series
shall have any right by virtue or by availing of any provision of this Indenture to institute any action or proceeding at law or in equity or in bankruptcy or otherwise, upon or under or with respect to this Indenture, or for the appointment of a
receiver or trustee, or for any other remedy hereunder, unless such Holder previously shall have given to the Trustee written notice of an Event of Default with respect to Debt Securities of that same series and of the continuance thereof and unless
the Holders of not less than 25% in aggregate principal amount of the Outstanding Debt Securities of that series shall have made written request upon the Trustee to institute such action or proceedings in respect of such Event of Default in its own
name as Trustee hereunder and shall have offered to the Trustee such reasonable indemnity or security as it may require against the costs, expenses and liabilities to be incurred therein or thereby, and the Trustee, for 60 days after its receipt of
such notice, request and offer of indemnity or security shall have failed to institute any such action or proceedings and no direction inconsistent with such written request shall have been given to the Trustee pursuant to Section 6.06; it being
understood and intended, and being expressly covenanted by the Holder of every Debt Security with every other Holder and the Trustee, that no one or more Holders shall have any right in any manner whatever by virtue or by availing of any provision
of this Indenture to affect, disturb or prejudice the rights of any Holders, or to obtain or seek to obtain priority over or preference to any other such Holder, or to enforce any right under this Indenture, except in the manner herein provided and
for the equal, ratable and common benefit of all such Holders. For the protection and enforcement of the provisions of this Section 6.04, each and every Holder and the Trustee shall be entitled to such relief as can be given either at law or in
equity. 
 Notwithstanding any other provision in this Indenture, however, the right of any Holder of any Debt Security to receive payment
of the principal of, and premium, if any, and (subject to Section 2.12) interest on, such Debt Security, on or after the respective due dates expressed in such Debt Security, and to institute suit for the enforcement of any such payment on or after
such respective dates, shall not be impaired or affected without the consent of such Holder. 
 Section 6.05 Remedies Cumulative; Delay
or Omission in Exercise of Rights Not a Waiver of Default. All powers and remedies given by this Article VI to the Trustee or to the Holders shall, to the extent permitted by law, be deemed cumulative and not exclusive of any thereof or of any
other powers and remedies available to the Trustee or the Holders, by judicial proceedings or otherwise, to enforce the performance or observance of the covenants and agreements contained in this Indenture, and no delay or omission of the Trustee or
of any Holder to exercise any right or power accruing upon any Default occurring and continuing as aforesaid, shall impair any such right or power, or shall be construed to be a waiver of any such Default or an acquiescence therein; and, subject to
the provisions of Section 6.04, every power and remedy given by this Article VI or by law to the Trustee or to the Holders may be exercised from time to time, and as often as shall be deemed expedient, by the Trustee or by the Holders. 

Section 6.06 Rights of Holders of Majority in Principal Amount of Debt Securities to Direct Trustee and to Waive Default. The Holders
of not less than a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities of any series at the time Outstanding shall have the right 

  
 35 

 
to direct the time, method and place of conducting any proceeding for any remedy available to the Trustee, or of exercising any right, trust or power conferred on the Trustee, with respect to the
Debt Securities of such series; provided, however, that such direction shall not be otherwise than in accordance with law and the provisions of this Indenture, and that subject to the provisions of Section 7.01, the Trustee shall have the right to
decline to follow any such direction if the Trustee being advised by counsel shall determine that the action so directed may not lawfully be taken or is inconsistent with any provision of this Indenture, or if the Trustee shall by a responsible
officer or officers determine that the action so directed would involve it in personal liability or would be unduly prejudicial to Holders of Debt Securities of such series not taking part in such direction; and provided, further, however, that
nothing in this Indenture contained shall impair the right of the Trustee to take any action deemed proper by the Trustee and which is not inconsistent with such direction by such Holders. The Holders of not less than a majority in aggregate
principal amount of the Debt Securities of any series at the time Outstanding may on behalf of the Holders of all the Debt Securities of that series waive any past Default or Event of Default and its consequences for that series, except a Default or
Event of Default in the payment of the principal of, and premium, if any, or interest on, any of the Debt Securities and a Default or Event of Default in respect of a provision that under Section 9.02 cannot be amended without the consent of each
Holder affected thereby. In case of any such waiver, such Default shall cease to exist, any Event of Default arising therefrom shall be deemed to have been cured for every purpose of this Indenture, and the Subsidiary Guarantors, the Issuers,
the Trustee and the Holders of the Debt Securities of that series shall be restored to their former positions and rights hereunder, respectively; but no such waiver shall extend to any subsequent or other Default or Event of Default or impair any
right consequent thereon. 
 Section 6.07 Trustee to Give Notice of Events of Defaults Known to It, but May Withhold Such Notice in
Certain Circumstances. The Trustee shall, within 90 days after the occurrence of an Event of Default, or if later, within 30 days after the Trustee obtains actual knowledge of the Event of Default, with respect to a series of Debt Securities
give to the Holders thereof, in the manner provided in Section 13.03, notice of all Events of Default with respect to such series known to the Trustee, unless such Events of Default shall have been cured or waived before the giving of such notice;
provided, that, except in the case of an Event of Default in the payment of the principal of, or premium, if any, or interest on, any of the Debt Securities of such series or in the making of any sinking fund payment with respect to the Debt
Securities of such series, the Trustee shall be protected in withholding such notice if and so long as the board of directors, the executive committee or a committee of directors or responsible officers of the Trustee in good faith determines that
the withholding of such notice is in the interests of the Holders thereof. 
 Section 6.08 Requirement of an Undertaking to Pay Costs in
Certain Suits under the Indenture or Against the Trustee. All parties to this Indenture agree, and each Holder of any Debt Security by his acceptance thereof shall be deemed to have agreed, that any court may in its discretion require, in any
suit for the enforcement of any right or remedy under this Indenture, or in any suit against the Trustee for any action taken or omitted by it as Trustee, the filing by any party litigant in such suit of an undertaking to pay the costs of such suit
in the manner and to the extent provided in the TIA, and that such court may in its discretion assess reasonable costs, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses, against any party litigant in such suit, having due regard to the merits
and good faith of the claims or defenses made by such party litigant; but 

  
 36 

 
the provisions of this Section 6.08 shall not apply to any suit instituted by the Trustee, to any suit instituted by any Holder, or group of Holders, holding in the aggregate more than 25 percent
in principal amount of the Outstanding Debt Securities of that series or to any suit instituted by any Holder for the enforcement of the payment of the principal of, or premium, if any, or interest on, any Debt Security on or after the due date for
such payment expressed in such Debt Security. 
 ARTICLE VII 

CONCERNING THE TRUSTEE 

Section 7.01 Certain Duties and Responsibilities. The Trustee, prior to the occurrence of an Event of Default and after the curing or
waiving of all Events of Default which may have occurred, undertakes to perform such duties and only such duties as are specifically set forth in this Indenture. In case an Event of Default has occurred (which has not been cured or waived), the
Trustee shall exercise such of the rights and powers vested in it by this Indenture, and use the same degree of care and skill in their exercise, as a prudent man would exercise or use under the circumstances in the conduct of his own affairs. 

No provision of this Indenture shall be construed to relieve the Trustee from liability for its own negligent action, its own negligent
failure to act, its own bad faith or its own willful misconduct, except that: 
 (a) this paragraph shall not be construed to limit the
effect of the first paragraph of this Section 7.01; 
 (b) prior to the occurrence of an Event of Default with respect to the Debt
Securities of a series and after the curing or waiving of all Events of Default with respect to such series which may have occurred: 

(i) the duties and obligations of the Trustee with respect to Debt Securities of any series shall be determined solely by the
express provisions of this Indenture, and the Trustee shall not be liable except for the performance of such duties and obligations with respect to such series as are specifically set forth in this Indenture, and no implied covenants or obligations
with respect to such series shall be read into this Indenture against the Trustee; 
 (ii) in the absence of bad faith on the
part of the Trustee, the Trustee may conclusively rely, as to the truth of the statements and the correctness of the opinions expressed therein, upon any certificates or opinions furnished to the Trustee and conforming to the requirements of this
Indenture; but in the case of any such certificates or opinions which by any provision hereof are specifically required to be furnished to the Trustee, the Trustee shall be under a duty to examine the same to determine whether or not they conform to
the requirements of this Indenture; but the Trustee shall examine the evidence furnished to it pursuant to Sections 4.05 and 4.06 to determine whether or not such evidence conforms to the requirement of this Indenture; 

  
 37 

 (iii) the Trustee shall not be liable for an error of judgment made in good faith
by a responsible officer, unless it shall be proved that the Trustee was negligent in ascertaining the pertinent facts; and 

(iv) the Trustee shall not be liable with respect to any action taken or omitted to be taken by it with respect to Debt
Securities of any series in good faith in accordance with the direction of the Holders of not less than a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Outstanding Debt Securities of that series relating to the time, method and place of conducting
any proceeding for any remedy available to the Trustee, or exercising any trust or power conferred upon the Trustee, under this Indenture with respect to Debt Securities of such series. 

None of the provisions of this Indenture shall require the Trustee to expend or risk its own funds or otherwise incur any personal financial
liability in the performance of any of its duties hereunder, or in the exercise of any of its rights or powers, if there shall be reasonable grounds for believing that repayment of such funds or adequate security or indemnity against such risk or
liability is not reasonably assured to it. 
 Whether or not therein expressly so provided, every provision of this Indenture relating to
the conduct or affecting the liability of or affording protection to the Trustee shall be subject to the provisions of this Section. 

Section 7.02 Certain Rights of Trustee. Except as otherwise provided in Section 7.01: 

(a) the Trustee may rely and shall be protected in acting or refraining from acting upon any resolution, certificate, statement, instrument,
opinion, report, notice, request, direction, consent, order, bond, debenture, note or other paper or document (whether in its original or facsimile form) believed by it to be genuine and to have been signed or presented by the proper party or
parties; 
 (b) any request, direction, order or demand of either of the Issuers mentioned herein shall be sufficiently evidenced by an
Issuer Order (unless other evidence in respect thereof be herein specifically prescribed); and any resolution of the Board of Directors of an Issuer may be evidenced to the Trustee by a copy thereof certified by its Secretary or an Assistant
Secretary; 
 (c) the Trustee may consult with counsel, and the advice of such counsel or any Opinion of Counsel shall be full and complete
authorization and protection in respect of any action taken or suffered or omitted by it hereunder in good faith and in accordance with such advice or Opinion of Counsel; 

(d) the Trustee shall be under no obligation to exercise any of the rights or powers vested in it by this Indenture at the request, order or
direction of any of the Holders of Debt Securities of any series pursuant to the provisions of this Indenture, unless such Holders shall have offered to the Trustee reasonable security or indemnity against the costs, expenses and liabilities which
may be incurred therein or thereby; 

  
 38 

 (e) the Trustee shall not be liable for any action taken or omitted by it in good faith and
reasonably believed by it to be authorized or within the discretion or rights or powers conferred upon it by this Indenture; 
 (f) prior to
the occurrence of an Event of Default and after the curing of all Events of Default which may have occurred, the Trustee shall not be bound to make any investigation into the facts or matters stated in any resolution, certificate, statement,
instrument, opinion, report, notice, request, direction, consent, order, approval or other paper or document, unless requested in writing to do so by the Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the then Outstanding Debt Securities of
a series affected by such matter; provided, however, that if the payment within a reasonable time to the Trustee of the costs, expenses or liabilities likely to be incurred by it in the making of such investigation is not, in the opinion of the
Trustee, reasonably assured to the Trustee by the security afforded to it by the terms of this Indenture, the Trustee may require reasonable indemnity against such costs, expenses or liabilities as a condition to so proceeding, and the reasonable
expense of every such investigation shall be paid by the Issuers or, if paid by the Trustee, shall be repaid by the Issuers upon demand; 

(g) the Trustee may execute any of the trusts or powers hereunder or perform any duties hereunder either directly or by or through agents or
attorneys and the Trustee shall not be responsible for any misconduct or negligence on the part of any agent or attorney appointed by it with due care hereunder; and 

(h) if any property other than cash shall at any time be subject to a Lien in favor of the Holders, the Trustee, if and to the extent
authorized by a receivership or bankruptcy court of competent jurisdiction or by the supplemental instrument subjecting such property to such Lien, shall be entitled to make advances for the purpose of preserving such property or of discharging tax
Liens or other prior Liens or encumbrances thereon. 
 Section 7.03 Trustee Not Liable for Recitals in Indenture or in Debt
Securities. The recitals contained herein, in the Debt Securities (except the Trustee’s certificate of authentication) shall be taken as the statements of the Issuers, and the Trustee assumes no responsibility for the correctness of the
same. The Trustee makes no representations as to the validity or sufficiency of this Indenture or of the Debt Securities of any series, except that the Trustee represents that it is duly authorized to execute and deliver this Indenture, authenticate
the Debt Securities and perform its obligations hereunder, and that the statements made by it or to be made by it in a Statement of Eligibility and Qualification on Form T-1 supplied to the Issuers are true and accurate. The Trustee shall not be
accountable for the use or application by the Issuers of any of the Debt Securities or of the proceeds thereof. 
 Section 7.04 Trustee,
Paying Agent or Registrar May Own Debt Securities. The Trustee or any paying agent or Registrar, in its individual or any other capacity, may become the owner or pledgee of Debt Securities and subject to the provisions of the TIA relating to
conflicts of interest and preferential claims may otherwise deal with the Issuers with the same rights it would have if it were not Trustee, paying agent or Registrar. 

Section 7.05 Moneys Received by Trustee to Be Held in Trust. Subject to the provisions of Section 11.05, all moneys received by the
Trustee shall, until used or applied as herein 

  
 39 

 
provided, be held in trust for the purposes for which they were received, but need not be segregated from other funds except to the extent required by law. The Trustee shall be under no
liability for interest on any moneys received by it hereunder. So long as no Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, all interest allowed on any such moneys shall be paid from time to time to the Issuers upon an Issuer Order.

 Section 7.06 Compensation and Reimbursement. The Issuers covenant and agree to pay in Dollars to the Trustee from time to time,
and the Trustee shall be entitled to, reasonable compensation for all services rendered by it hereunder (which shall not be limited by any provision of law in regard to the compensation of a trustee of an express trust), and, except as otherwise
expressly provided herein, the Issuers will pay or reimburse in Dollars the Trustee upon its request for all reasonable expenses, disbursements and advances incurred or made by the Trustee in accordance with any of the provisions of this Indenture
(including the reasonable compensation and the expenses and disbursements of its agents, attorneys and counsel and of all Persons not regularly in its employ), including without limitation, Section 6.02, except any such expense, disbursement or
advances as may arise from its negligence, willful misconduct or bad faith. The Issuers also covenant to indemnify in Dollars the Trustee for, and to hold it harmless against, any loss, liability or expense incurred without negligence, willful
misconduct or bad faith on the part of the Trustee, arising out of or in connection with the acceptance or administration of this trust or trusts hereunder, including the reasonable costs and expenses of defending itself against any claim of
liability in connection with the exercise or performance of any of its powers or duties hereunder. The obligations of the Issuers under this Section 7.06 to compensate and indemnify the Trustee and to pay or reimburse the Trustee for expenses,
disbursements and advances shall constitute additional Debt hereunder and shall survive the satisfaction and discharge of this Indenture. The Issuers and the Holders agree that such additional Debt shall be secured by a Lien prior to that of
the Debt Securities upon all property and funds held or collected by the Trustee, as such, except funds held in trust for the payment of principal of, and premium, if any, or interest on, particular Debt Securities. 

When the Trustee incurs expenses or renders services after an Event of Default specified in Section 6.01(e) or (f) occurs, the expenses
and the compensation for the services are intended to constitute expenses of administration under any Bankruptcy Law. 
 Section 7.07
Right of Trustee to Rely on an Officers’ Certificate Where No Other Evidence Specifically Prescribed. Except as otherwise provided in Section 7.01, whenever in the administration of the provisions of this Indenture the Trustee shall deem
it necessary or desirable that a matter be proved or established prior to taking or suffering or omitting any action hereunder, such matter (unless other evidence in respect thereof be herein specifically prescribed) may, in the absence of
negligence or bad faith on the part of the Trustee, be deemed to be conclusively proved and established by an Officers’ Certificate delivered to the Trustee and such certificate, in the absence of negligence or bad faith on the part of the
Trustee, shall be full warrant to the Trustee for any action taken, suffered or omitted by it under the provisions of this Indenture upon the faith thereof. 

Section 7.08 Separate Trustee; Replacement of Trustee. The Issuers may, but need not, appoint a separate Trustee for any one or more
series of Debt Securities. The Trustee may resign with respect to one or more or all series of Debt Securities at any time by giving notice to the 

  
 40 

 
Issuers. The Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities of a particular series may remove the Trustee for such series and only such series by so notifying the
Trustee and may appoint a successor Trustee. The Issuers shall remove the Trustee if: 
 (a) the Trustee fails to comply with Section
7.10; 
 (b) the Trustee is adjudged bankrupt or insolvent; 

(c) a Custodian takes charge of the Trustee or its property; or 

(d) the Trustee otherwise becomes incapable of acting. 

If the Trustee resigns, is removed by the Issuers or by the Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities of a
particular series and such Holders do not reasonably promptly appoint a successor Trustee, or if a vacancy exists in the office of Trustee for any reason (the Trustee in such event being referred to herein as the retiring Trustee), the Issuers shall
promptly appoint a successor Trustee. No resignation or removal of the Trustee and no appointment of a successor Trustee shall become effective until the acceptance of appointment by the successor Trustee in accordance with the applicable
requirements of this Section 7.08. 
 A successor Trustee shall deliver a written acceptance of its appointment to the retiring Trustee and
to the Issuers. Thereupon the resignation or removal of the retiring Trustee shall become effective, and the successor Trustee shall have all the rights, powers and duties of the Trustee under this Indenture. The successor Trustee shall
mail a notice of its succession to Holders of Debt Securities of each applicable series. The retiring Trustee shall promptly transfer all property held by it as Trustee to the successor Trustee, subject to the Lien provided for in Section 7.06.

 If a successor Trustee does not take office within 60 days after the retiring Trustee gives notice of resignation or is removed, the
retiring Trustee or the Holders of 25% in aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities of any applicable series may petition any court of competent jurisdiction for the appointment of a successor Trustee for the Debt Securities of such series.

 If the Trustee fails to comply with Section 7.10, any Holder of Debt Securities of any applicable series may petition any court of
competent jurisdiction for the removal of the Trustee and the appointment of a successor Trustee for the Debt Securities of such series. 

Notwithstanding the replacement of the Trustee pursuant to this Section 7.08, the Issuers’ obligations under Section 7.06 shall continue
for the benefit of the retiring Trustee. 
 In the case of the appointment hereunder of a separate or successor Trustee with respect to the
Debt Securities of one or more series, the Issuers, any retiring Trustee and each successor or separate Trustee with respect to the Debt Securities of any applicable series shall execute and deliver an indenture supplemental hereto (i) which
shall contain such provisions as shall be deemed necessary or desirable to confirm that all the rights, powers, trusts and duties of any retiring Trustee with respect to the Debt Securities of any series as to which any such retiring

  
 41 

 
Trustee is not retiring shall continue to be vested in such retiring Trustee and (ii) that shall add to or change any of the provisions of this Indenture as shall be necessary to provide for
or facilitate the administration of the trusts hereunder by more than one trustee, it being understood that nothing herein or in such supplemental indenture shall constitute such Trustees co-trustees of the same trust and that each such separate,
retiring or successor Trustee shall be Trustee of a trust or trusts hereunder separate and apart from any trust or trusts hereunder administered by any other such Trustee. 

Section 7.09 Successor Trustee by Merger. If the Trustee consolidates with, merges or converts into, or transfers all or substantially
all its corporate trust business or assets to, another corporation or banking association, the resulting, surviving or transferee corporation or banking association without any further act shall be the successor Trustee. 

In case at the time such successor or successors to the Trustee by merger, conversion, consolidation or transfer shall succeed to the trusts
created by this Indenture any of the Debt Securities shall have been authenticated but not delivered, any such successor to the Trustee may adopt the certificate of authentication of any predecessor Trustee, and deliver such Debt Securities so
authenticated; and in case at that time any of the Debt Securities shall not have been authenticated, any successor to the Trustee may authenticate such Debt Securities either in the name of any predecessor hereunder or in the name of the successor
to the Trustee; and in all such cases such certificates shall have the full force which it is anywhere in the Debt Securities or in this Indenture provided that the certificate of the Trustee shall have. 

Section 7.10 Eligibility; Disqualification. The Trustee shall at all times satisfy the requirements of Section 310(a) of the
TIA. The Trustee shall have a combined capital and surplus of at least $50,000,000 as set forth in its most recent published annual report of condition. No obligor upon the Debt Securities of a particular series or Person directly or
indirectly controlling, controlled by or under common control with such obligor shall serve as Trustee for the Debt Securities of such series. The Trustee shall comply with Section 310(b) of the TIA; provided, however, that there shall be
excluded from the operation of Section 310(b)(1) of the TIA this Indenture or any indenture or indentures under which other securities or certificates of interest or participation in other securities of the Issuers are outstanding if the
requirements for such exclusion set forth in Section 310(b)(1) of the TIA are met. 
 Section 7.11 Preferential Collection of Claims
Against Issuers. The Trustee shall comply with Section 311(a) of the TIA, excluding any creditor relationship listed in Section 311(b) of the TIA. A Trustee who has resigned or been removed shall be subject to Section 311(a) of the TIA to
the extent indicated therein. 
 Section 7.12 Compliance with Tax Laws. The Trustee hereby agrees to comply with all U.S. Federal
income tax information reporting and withholding requirements applicable to it with respect to payments of premium (if any) and interest on the Debt Securities, whether acting as Trustee, Registrar, paying agent or otherwise with respect to the Debt
Securities. 

  
 42 

 ARTICLE VIII 

CONCERNING THE HOLDERS 

Section 8.01 Evidence of Action by Holders. Whenever in this Indenture it is provided that the Holders of a specified percentage in
aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities of any or all series may take action (including the making of any demand or request, the giving of any direction, notice, consent or waiver or the taking of any other action) the fact that at the
time of taking any such action the Holders of such specified percentage have joined therein may be evidenced (a) by any instrument or any number of instruments of similar tenor executed by Holders in Person or by agent or proxy appointed in
writing, (b) by the record of the Holders voting in favor thereof at any meeting of Holders duly called and held in accordance with the provisions of Section 5.02, (c) by a combination of such instrument or instruments and any such record
of such a meeting of Holders or (d) in the case of Debt Securities evidenced by a Global Security, by any electronic transmission or other message, whether or not in written format, that complies with the Depositary’s applicable
procedures. 
 Section 8.02 Proof of Execution of Instruments and of Holding of Debt Securities. Subject to the provisions of
Sections 7.01, 7.02 and 13.09, proof of the execution of any instrument by a Holder or his agent or proxy shall be sufficient if made in accordance with such reasonable rules and regulations as may be prescribed by the Trustee or in such manner as
shall be satisfactory to the Trustee. The ownership of Debt Securities of any series shall be proved by the Debt Security Register or by a certificate of the Registrar for such series. The Trustee may require such additional proof of any
matter referred to in this Section 8.02 as it shall deem necessary. 
 Section 8.03 Who May Be Deemed Owner of Debt Securities. Prior
to due presentment for registration of transfer of any Debt Security, the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors, the Trustee, any paying agent and any Registrar may deem and treat the Person in whose name any Debt Security shall be registered upon the
books of the Issuers as the absolute owner of such Debt Security (whether or not such Debt Security shall be overdue and notwithstanding any notation of ownership or other writing thereon) for the purpose of receiving payment of or on account of the
principal of and premium, if any, and (subject to Section 2.12) interest on such Debt Security and for all other purposes, and none of the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Trustee nor any paying agent nor any Registrar shall be affected by
any notice to the contrary; and all such payments so made to any such Holder for the time being, or upon his order, shall be valid and, to the extent of the sum or sums so paid, effectual to satisfy and discharge the liability for moneys payable
upon any such Debt Security. 
 Section 8.04 Instruments Executed by Holders Bind Future Holders. At any time prior to (but not
after) the evidencing to the Trustee, as provided in Section 8.01, of the taking of any action by the Holders of the percentage in aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities of any series specified in this Indenture in connection with such
action and subject to the following paragraph, any Holder of a Debt Security which is shown by the evidence to be included in the Debt Securities the Holders of which have consented to such action may, by filing written notice with the Trustee at
its corporate trust office referred to in Section 13.03 and upon proof of holding as provided in Section 8.02, revoke such action so far as concerns such Debt Security. Except as aforesaid any such action taken by the Holder of any Debt
Security shall be conclusive 

  
 43 

 
and binding upon such Holder and upon all future Holders and owners of such Debt Security and of any Debt Security issued upon transfer thereof or in exchange or substitution therefor,
irrespective of whether or not any notation in regard thereto is made upon such Debt Security or such other Debt Securities. Any action taken by the Holders of the percentage in aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities of any series
specified in this Indenture in connection with such action shall be conclusively binding upon the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors, the Trustee and the Holders of all the Debt Securities of such series. 

The Issuers may, but shall not be obligated to, fix a record date for the purpose of determining the Holders of Debt Securities entitled to
give their consent or take any other action required or permitted to be taken pursuant to this Indenture. If a record date is fixed, then notwithstanding the immediately preceding paragraph, those Persons who were Holders of Debt Securities at
such record date (or their duly designated proxies), and only those Persons, shall be entitled to give such consent or to revoke any consent previously given or to take any such action, whether or not such Persons continue to be Holders of Debt
Securities after such record date. No such consent shall be valid or effective for more than 120 days after such record date unless the consent of the Holders of the percentage in aggregate principal amount of the Debt Securities of such series
specified in this Indenture shall have been received within such 120-day period. 
 ARTICLE IX 

SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURES 

Section 9.01 Purposes for Which Supplemental Indenture May Be Entered into Without Consent of Holders. The Issuers and any Subsidiary
Guarantors, when authorized by resolutions of each Issuer’s Board of Directors, and the Trustee may from time to time and at any time, without the consent of Holders, enter into an indenture or indentures supplemental hereto (which shall
conform to the provisions of the TIA as in force at the date of the execution thereof) for one or more of the following purposes: 
 (a) to
evidence the succession pursuant to Article X of another Person to either of the Issuers, or successive successions, and the assumption by the Successor Company (as defined in Section 10.01) of the covenants, agreements and obligations of its
predecessor Issuer in this Indenture and in the Debt Securities; 
 (b) to surrender any right or power herein conferred upon the Issuers or
the Subsidiary Guarantors, to add to the covenants of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors such further covenants, restrictions, conditions or provisions for the protection of the Holders of all or any series of Debt Securities (and if such
covenants are to be for the benefit of less than all series of Debt Securities, stating that such covenants are expressly being included solely for the benefit of such series) as the Board of Directors shall consider to be for the protection of the
Holders of such Debt Securities, and to make the occurrence, or the occurrence and continuance, of a Default in any of such additional covenants, restrictions, conditions or provisions a Default or an Event of Default permitting the enforcement of
all or any of the several remedies provided in this Indenture; provided, that in respect of any such additional covenant, restriction, condition or provision such supplemental indenture may provide for a particular period of grace after Default
(which period may be shorter or longer than that allowed in the case of other Defaults) or may 

  
 44 

 
provide for an immediate enforcement upon such Default or may limit the remedies available to the Trustee upon such Default or may limit the right of the Holders of a majority in aggregate
principal amount of any or all series of Debt Securities to waive such Default; 
 (c) to cure any ambiguity or omission or to correct or
supplement any provision contained herein, in any supplemental indenture or in any Debt Securities of any series that may be defective or inconsistent with any other provision contained herein, in any supplemental indenture or in the Debt Securities
of such series; or to convey, transfer, assign, mortgage or pledge any property to or with the Trustee; 
 (d) to permit the qualification
of this Indenture or any indenture supplemental hereto under the TIA as then in effect, except that nothing herein contained shall permit or authorize the inclusion in any indenture supplemental hereto of the provisions referred to in Section
316(a)(2) of the TIA; 
 (e) to change or eliminate any restrictions on the payment of principal of or premium, if any, on Debt Securities;
provided, that any such action shall not adversely affect the interests of the Holders of Debt Securities of any series in any material respect or permit or facilitate the issuance of Debt Securities of any series in uncertificated form; 

(f) to reflect the release of any Subsidiary Guarantor in accordance with Article XIV; 

(g) in the case of any Debt Securities subordinated pursuant to Article XII, to make any change in Article XII that would limit or terminate
the benefits available to any holder of Senior Indebtedness (or Representatives therefor) under Article XII; 
 (h) to add Subsidiary
Guarantors with respect to any or all of the Debt Securities or to secure any or all of the Debt Securities or the Guarantee; 
 (i) to make
any change that does not adversely affect the rights hereunder of any Holder; 
 (j) to add to, change or eliminate any of the provisions of
this Indenture in respect of one or more series of Debt Securities; provided, however, that any such addition, change or elimination not otherwise permitted under this Section 9.01 shall neither apply to any Debt Security of any series created prior
to the execution of such supplemental indenture and entitled to the benefit of such provision nor modify the rights of the Holder of any such Debt Security with respect to such provision or shall become effective only when there is no such Debt
Security Outstanding; 
 (k) to evidence and provide for the acceptance of appointment hereunder by a successor or separate Trustee with
respect to the Debt Securities of one or more series and to add to or change any of the provisions of this Indenture as shall be necessary to provide for or facilitate the administration of the trusts hereunder by more than one Trustee; and 

(l) to establish the form or terms of Debt Securities of any series as permitted by Sections 2.01 and 2.03. 

  
 45 

 The Trustee is hereby authorized to join with the Issuers and the Subsidiary Guarantors in the
execution of any such supplemental indenture, to make any further appropriate agreements and stipulations which may be therein contained and to accept the conveyance, transfer, assignment, mortgage or pledge of any property thereunder, but the
Trustee shall not be obligated to enter into any such supplemental indenture which affects the Trustee’s own rights, duties or immunities under this Indenture or otherwise. 

Any supplemental indenture authorized by the provisions of this Section 9.01 may be executed by the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors and the
Trustee without the consent of the Holders of any of the Debt Securities at the time Outstanding, notwithstanding any of the provisions of Section 9.02. 

In the case of Debt Securities subordinated pursuant to Article XII, an amendment under this Section 9.01 may not make any change that
adversely affects the rights under Article XII of any holder of Senior Indebtedness then outstanding unless the holders of such Senior Indebtedness (or any group or Representative thereof authorized to give a consent) consent to such change. 

Section 9.02 Modification of Indenture with Consent of Holders of Debt Securities. Without notice to any Holder but with the consent
(evidenced as provided in Section 8.01) of the Holders of not less than a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Outstanding Debt Securities of each series affected by such supplemental indenture (including consents obtained in connection
with a tender offer or exchange offer for any such series of Debt Securities), the Issuers and the Subsidiary Guarantors, when authorized by resolutions of each Issuer’s Board of Directors, and the Trustee may from time to time and at any time
enter into an indenture or indentures supplemental hereto (which shall conform to the provisions of the TIA as in force at the date of execution thereof) for the purpose of adding any provisions to or changing in any manner or eliminating any of the
provisions of this Indenture or of any supplemental indenture or of modifying in any manner the rights of the Holders of the Debt Securities of such series; provided, that no such supplemental indenture, without the consent of the Holders of each
Debt Security so affected, shall: reduce the percentage in principal amount of Debt Securities of any series whose Holders must consent to an amendment or waiver; reduce the rate of or extend the time for payment of interest on any Debt Security;
reduce the principal of or extend the Stated Maturity of any Debt Security; reduce any premium payable upon the redemption of any Debt Security or change the time at which any Debt Security may or shall be redeemed in accordance with Article III;
make any Debt Security payable in currency other than that stated in such Debt Security; impair the right of any Holder to receive payment of premium, if any, principal of and interest on such Holder’s Debt Securities on or after the due dates
therefor or to institute suit for the enforcement of any payment on or with respect to such Holder’s Debt Securities; in the case of any Debt Security subordinated pursuant to Article XII, make any change in Article XII that adversely affects
the rights of any Holder under Article XII; release any security that may have been granted in respect of the Debt Securities, other than in accordance with this Indenture; make any change in Section 6.06 or this Section 9.02; or release the
Subsidiary Guarantors other than as provided in this Indenture or modify the Guarantee in any manner adverse to the Holders. 
 A
supplemental indenture which changes or eliminates any covenant or other provision of this Indenture which has been expressly included solely for the benefit of one or more particular 

  
 46 

 
series of Debt Securities or which modifies the rights of the Holders of Debt Securities of such series with respect to such covenant or other provision, shall be deemed not to affect the rights
under this Indenture of the Holders of Debt Securities of any other series. 
 Upon the request of the Issuers, accompanied by a copy of
resolutions of the Board of Directors of each Issuer authorizing the execution of any such supplemental indenture, and upon the filing with the Trustee of evidence of the consent of Holders as aforesaid, the Trustee shall join with the Issuers and
the Subsidiary Guarantors in the execution of such supplemental indenture unless such supplemental indenture affects the Trustee’s own rights, duties or immunities under this Indenture or otherwise, in which case the Trustee may in its
discretion but shall not be obligated to enter into such supplemental indenture. 
 It shall not be necessary for the consent of the Holders
under this Section 9.02 to approve the particular form of any proposed supplemental indenture, but it shall be sufficient if such consent shall approve the substance thereof. 

In the case of any Debt Securities subordinated pursuant to Article XII, an amendment under this Section 9.02 may not make any change that
adversely affects the rights under Article XII of any holder of Senior Indebtedness then outstanding unless the holders of such Senior Indebtedness (or any group or Representative thereof authorized to give a consent) consent to such change. 

After an amendment under this Section 9.02 requiring the consent of the Holders of any series of Debt Securities becomes effective, the
Issuers shall mail to Holders of that series of Debt Securities a notice briefly describing such amendment. The failure to give such notice to any such Holders, or any defect therein, shall not impair or affect the validity of an amendment
under this Section 9.02 with respect to other Holders. 
 Section 9.03 Effect of Supplemental Indentures. Upon the execution of any
supplemental indenture pursuant to the provisions of this Article IX, this Indenture shall be and be deemed to be modified and amended in accordance therewith and the respective rights, limitations of rights, obligations, duties and immunities under
this Indenture of the Trustee, the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors and the Holders shall thereafter be determined, exercised and enforced hereunder subject in all respects to such modifications and amendments, and all the terms and conditions of
any such supplemental indenture shall be and be deemed to be part of the terms and conditions of this Indenture for any and all purposes. 

The Trustee, subject to the provisions of Sections 7.01 and 7.02, shall be entitled to receive an Officers’ Certificate and an Opinion of
Counsel as conclusive evidence that any such supplemental indenture complies with the provisions of this Article IX. 
 Section 9.04 Debt
Securities May Bear Notation of Changes by Supplemental Indentures. Debt Securities of any series authenticated and delivered after the execution of any supplemental indenture pursuant to the provisions of this Article IX may, and shall if
required by the Trustee, bear a notation in form approved by the Trustee as to any matter provided for in 

  
 47 

 
such supplemental indenture. New Debt Securities of any series so modified as to conform, in the opinion of the Trustee and the Issuers, to any modification of this Indenture contained in
any such supplemental indenture may be prepared and executed by the Issuers, authenticated by the Trustee and delivered in exchange for the Debt Securities of such series then Outstanding. Failure to make the appropriate notation or to issue a
new Debt Security of such series shall not affect the validity of such amendment. 
 ARTICLE X 

CONSOLIDATION, MERGER, SALE OR CONVEYANCE 

Section 10.01 Consolidations and Mergers of the Issuers. Neither of the Issuers may consolidate or amalgamate with or merge with or
into any Person, or sell, convey, transfer, lease or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all its assets to any Person, whether in a single transaction or a series of related transactions, unless: (a) either (i) such Issuer shall
be the surviving Person in the case of a merger or (ii) the resulting, surviving or transferee Person if other than such Issuer (the “Successor Company”), shall be a partnership, limited liability company or corporation organized in
the case of the Partnership (and a corporation in the case of Finance Corp. so long as the Partnership is not a corporation), and existing under the laws of the United States, any State thereof or the District of Columbia and the Successor Company
shall expressly assume, by an indenture supplemental hereto, executed and delivered to the Trustee, in form satisfactory to the Trustee, all the obligations of such Issuer under this Indenture and the Debt Securities according to their tenor;
(b) immediately after giving effect to such transaction or series of transactions (and treating any Debt which becomes an obligation of the Successor Company or any Subsidiary of such Issuer as a result of such transaction as having been
incurred by the Successor Company or such Subsidiary at the time of such transaction or series of transactions), no Default or Event of Default would occur or be continuing; (c) if such Issuer is not the continuing Person, then each Subsidiary
Guarantor, unless it has become the Successor Company, shall confirm that its Guarantee shall continue to apply to the obligations under the Debt Securities and this Indenture; and (d) the Issuers shall have delivered to the Trustee an
Officers’ Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel, each stating that such consolidation, amalgamation, merger or disposition and such supplemental indenture (if any) comply with this Indenture. 

Section 10.02 Rights and Duties of Successor Company. In case of any consolidation, amalgamation or merger where such Issuer is not the
continuing Person, or disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of such Issuer in accordance with Section 10.01, the Successor Company shall succeed to and be substituted for such Issuer with the same effect as if it had been named
herein as the respective party to this Indenture, and the predecessor entity shall be released from all liabilities and obligations under this Indenture and the Debt Securities, except that no such release will occur in the case of a lease of all or
substantially all of such Issuer’s assets. The Successor Company thereupon may cause to be signed, and may issue either in its own name or in the name of such Issuer, any or all the Debt Securities issuable hereunder which theretofore shall not
have been signed by or on behalf of such Issuer and delivered to the Trustee; and, upon the order of the Successor Company, instead of such Issuer, and subject to all the terms, conditions and limitations in this Indenture prescribed, the Trustee
shall authenticate and shall deliver any Debt Securities which previously shall have been signed and delivered by or on behalf of such Issuer to the Trustee for authentication, and any Debt Securities which the Successor Company thereafter shall
cause to be signed and delivered to the Trustee for that purpose. All the Debt Securities so issued shall in all respects have the same legal rank and 

  
 48 

 
benefit under this Indenture as the Debt Securities theretofore or thereafter issued in accordance with the terms of this Indenture as though all such Debt Securities had been issued at the date
of the execution hereof. 
 In case of any such consolidation, amalgamation, merger, sale or disposition such changes in phraseology and
form (but not in substance) may be made in the Debt Securities thereafter to be issued as may be appropriate. 
 ARTICLE XI 

SATISFACTION AND DISCHARGE OF INDENTURE; 

DEFEASANCE; UNCLAIMED MONEYS 

Section 11.01 Applicability of Article. The provisions of this Article XI relating to discharge or defeasance of Debt Securities shall
be applicable to each series of Debt Securities except as otherwise specified pursuant to Section 2.03 for Debt Securities of such series. 

Section 11.02 Satisfaction and Discharge of Indenture; Defeasance. 

(a) If at any time the Issuers shall have delivered to the Trustee for cancellation all Debt Securities of any series theretofore
authenticated and delivered (other than any Debt Securities of such series which shall have been destroyed, lost or stolen and which shall have been replaced or paid as provided in Section 2.09 and Debt Securities for whose payment money has
theretofore been deposited in trust and thereafter repaid to the Issuers as provided in Section 11.05) or all Debt Securities of such series not theretofore delivered to the Trustee for cancellation shall have become due and payable, or are by their
terms to become due and payable within one year or are to be called for redemption within one year under arrangements satisfactory to the Trustee for the giving of notice of redemption, and the Issuers shall have deposited or caused to be deposited
with the Trustee as trust funds the entire amount in cash sufficient to pay at final maturity or upon redemption all Debt Securities of such series not theretofore delivered to the Trustee for cancellation, including principal and premium, if any,
and interest due or to become due on such date of maturity or Redemption Date, as the case may be, and if in either case the Issuers shall also have paid or caused to be paid all other sums payable hereunder by the Issuers with respect to the Debt
Securities of such series, then this Indenture shall cease to be of further effect (except as provided in Section 11.02(c)) with respect to the Debt Securities of such series, and the Trustee, on demand of the Issuers accompanied by an
Officers’ Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel and at the cost and expense of the Issuers, shall execute proper instruments acknowledging satisfaction of and discharging this Indenture with respect to the Debt Securities of such series. 

(b) Subject to Sections 11.02(c), 11.03 and 11.07, the Issuers at any time may terminate, with respect to Debt Securities of a particular
series, all of their respective obligations under the Debt Securities of such series and this Indenture with respect to the Debt Securities of such series (“legal defeasance option”) or the operation of (w) Sections 4.09 and 4.10,
(x) any covenant made applicable to such Debt Securities pursuant to Section 2.03, (y) Sections 6.01(d), (g) and (h) and (z) as they relate to the Subsidiary Guarantors only, Sections 6.01(e) and (f) (“covenant
defeasance option”). If the Issuers exercise either their legal defeasance option or their covenant defeasance option with respect to Debt Securities of a particular series that are 

  
 49 

 
entitled to the benefit of the Guarantee, the Guarantee will terminate with respect to that series of Debt Securities. The Issuers may exercise their legal defeasance option notwithstanding their
prior exercise of its covenant defeasance option. 
 If the Issuers exercise their legal defeasance option, payment of the Debt Securities
of the defeased series may not be accelerated because of an Event of Default. If the Issuers exercise their covenant defeasance option, payment of the Debt Securities of the defeased series may not be accelerated because of an Event of Default
specified in Sections 6.01(d), (g) and (h) and, with respect to the Subsidiary Guarantors only, Sections 6.01(e) and (f). 
 Upon
satisfaction of the conditions set forth herein and upon request of the Issuers, the Trustee shall acknowledge in writing the discharge of those obligations that the Issuers terminate. 

(c) Notwithstanding clauses (a) and (b) above, the Issuers’ obligations in Sections 2.07, 2.09, 4.02, 4.03, 4.04, the last
sentence of 4.05(a), 4.06, 5.01, 7.06, 11.05, 11.06 and 11.07 shall survive until the Debt Securities of the defeased series have been paid in full. Thereafter, the Issuers’ obligations in Sections 7.06, 11.05 and 11.06 shall survive. 

Section 11.03 Conditions of Defeasance. The Issuers may exercise their legal defeasance option or their covenant defeasance option
with respect to Debt Securities of a particular series only if: 
 (a) the Issuers irrevocably deposit in trust with the Trustee money or
U.S. Government Obligations for the payment of principal of, and premium, if any, and interest on, the Debt Securities of such series to final maturity or redemption, as the case may be; 

(b) the Issuers deliver to the Trustee a certificate from a nationally recognized firm of independent accountants expressing their opinion
that the payments of principal and interest when due and without reinvestment on the deposited U.S. Government Obligations plus any deposited money without investment will provide cash at such times and in such amounts as will be sufficient to pay
the principal, premium, if any, and interest when due on all the Debt Securities of such series to final maturity or redemption, as the case may be; 

(c) 91 days pass after the deposit is made and during the 91-day period no Default specified in Section 6.01(e) or (f) with respect to
the Issuers occurs which is continuing at the end of the period; 
 (d) no Default has occurred and is continuing on the date of such
deposit and after giving effect thereto; 
 (e) the deposit does not constitute a default under any other material agreement binding on the
Issuers and, if the Debt Securities of such series are subordinated pursuant to Article XII, is not prohibited by Article XII; 
 (f) the
Issuers deliver to the Trustee an Opinion of Counsel to the effect that the trust resulting from the deposit does not constitute, or is qualified as, a regulated investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940; 

  
 50 

 (g) in the event of the legal defeasance option, the Issuers shall have delivered to the Trustee
an Opinion of Counsel stating that the Issuers have received from the Internal Revenue Service a ruling, or since the date of this Indenture there has been a change in the applicable Federal income tax law, in either case to the effect that, and
based thereon such Opinion of Counsel shall confirm that, the Holders of Debt Securities of such series will not recognize income, gain or loss for Federal income tax purposes as a result of such defeasance and will be subject to Federal income tax
on the same amounts, in the same manner and at the same times as would have been the case if such defeasance had not occurred; 
 (h) in the
event of the covenant defeasance option, the Issuers shall have delivered to the Trustee an Opinion of Counsel to the effect that the Holders of Debt Securities of such series will not recognize income, gain or loss for Federal income tax purposes
as a result of such covenant defeasance and will be subject to Federal income tax on the same amounts, in the same manner and at the same times as would have been the case if such covenant defeasance had not occurred; and 

(i) the Issuers deliver to the Trustee an Officers’ Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel, each stating that all conditions precedent to
the defeasance of the Debt Securities of such series as contemplated by this Article XI have been complied with. 
 Before or after a
deposit, the Issuers may make arrangements satisfactory to the Trustee for the redemption of Debt Securities of such series at a future date in accordance with Article III. 

Section 11.04 Application of Trust Money. The Trustee shall hold in trust money or U.S. Government Obligations deposited with it
pursuant to this Article XI. It shall apply the deposited money and the money from U.S. Government Obligations through any paying agent and in accordance with this Indenture to the payment of principal of, and premium, if any, and interest on,
the Debt Securities of the defeased series. In the event the Debt Securities of the defeased series are subordinated pursuant to Article XII, money and securities so held in trust are not subject to Article XII. 

Section 11.05 Repayment to Issuers. The Trustee and any paying agent shall promptly turn over to the Issuers upon request any excess
money or securities held by them at any time. 
 Subject to any applicable abandoned property law, the Trustee and any paying agent shall
pay to the Issuers upon request any money held by them for the payment of principal, premium or interest that remains unclaimed for two years, and, thereafter, Holders entitled to such money must look to the Issuers for payment as general creditors.

 Section 11.06 Indemnity for U.S. Government Obligations. The Issuers shall pay and shall indemnify the Trustee and the
Holders against any tax, fee or other charge imposed on or assessed against deposited U.S. Government Obligations or the principal and interest received on such U.S. Government Obligations. 

Section 11.07 Reinstatement. If the Trustee or any paying agent is unable to apply any money or U.S. Government Obligations in
accordance with this Article XI by reason of any legal 

  
 51 

 
proceeding or by reason of any order or judgment of any court or government authority enjoining, restraining or otherwise prohibiting such application, the Issuers’ obligations under this
Indenture and the Debt Securities of the defeased series shall be revived and reinstated as though no deposit had occurred pursuant to this Article XI until such time as the Trustee or any paying agent is permitted to apply all such money or U.S.
Government Obligations in accordance with this Article XI. 
 ARTICLE XII 

SUBORDINATION OF DEBT SECURITIES AND GUARANTEE 

Section 12.01 Applicability of Article; Agreement to Subordinate. The provisions of this Article XII shall only be applicable to the
Debt Securities of any series (Debt Securities of such series referred to in this Article XII as “Subordinated Debt Securities”) designated, pursuant to Section 2.03, as subordinated to Senior Indebtedness and any related Guarantee of such
Subordinated Debt Securities. Each Holder by accepting a Subordinated Debt Security agrees that the Debt evidenced by such Subordinated Debt Security and any related Guarantee of such Subordinated Debt Security is subordinated in right of payment,
to the extent and in the manner provided in this Article XII, to the prior payment of all Senior Indebtedness and that the subordination is for the benefit of and enforceable by the holders of Senior Indebtedness. All provisions of this Article
XII shall be subject to Section 12.12. 
 Section 12.02 Liquidation, Dissolution, Bankruptcy. Upon any payment or distribution
of the assets of any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors to creditors (i) upon a liquidation or a dissolution of any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors or (ii) in a bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency, receivership or
similar proceeding relating to any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors or its property: 
 (a) holders of Senior Indebtedness of the
Issuers or any Subsidiary Guarantor, as the case may be, shall be entitled to receive payment in full in cash of such Senior Indebtedness of such Person (including interest (if any), accruing on or after the commencement of a proceeding in
bankruptcy, whether or not allowed as a claim against any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors, as the case may be, in such bankruptcy proceeding) before Holders of Subordinated Debt Securities and any related Guarantee shall be entitled to
receive any payment of principal of, or premium, if any, or interest on, the Subordinated Debt Securities from the Issuers, or any payment in respect of the Guarantee from the Subsidiary Guarantors; and 

(b) until the Senior Indebtedness of the Issuers or any Subsidiary Guarantor, as the case may be, is paid in full, any distribution to which
Holders of Subordinated Debt Securities and any related Guarantee would be entitled but for this Article XII shall be made to holders of Senior Indebtedness of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors, as the case may be, as their interests may
appear, except that such Holders may receive capital stock and any debt securities that are subordinated to Senior Indebtedness of any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors, as the case may be, to at least the same extent as the Subordinated
Debt Securities of the Issuers or the related Guarantee of any Subsidiary Guarantor, respectively. 
 Section 12.03 Default on Senior
Indebtedness. The Issuers and the Subsidiary Guarantors may not pay the principal of, or premium, if any, or interest on, the Subordinated 

  
 52 

 
Debt Securities or any related Guarantee or make any deposit pursuant to Article XI and may not repurchase, redeem or otherwise retire (except, in the case of Subordinated Debt Securities that
provide for a mandatory sinking fund pursuant to Section 3.05, by the delivery of Subordinated Debt Securities by the Issuers to the Trustee pursuant to the first paragraph of Section 3.05) any Subordinated Debt Securities (collectively, “pay
the Subordinated Debt Securities”) if any principal, premium or interest in respect of Senior Indebtedness of such Person is not paid within any applicable grace period (including at maturity) or any other default on Senior Indebtedness of such
Person occurs and the maturity of such Senior Indebtedness is accelerated in accordance with its terms unless and until the default has been cured or waived and any such acceleration has been rescinded or such Senior Indebtedness has been paid in
full in cash; provided, however, that the Issuers and the Subsidiary Guarantors may make payments on the Subordinated Debt Securities or any related Guarantee without regard to the foregoing if the Issuers and the Trustee receive written notice
approving such payment from the Representative of each issue of Designated Senior Indebtedness. During the continuance of any other default with respect to any Designated Senior Indebtedness pursuant to which the maturity thereof may be accelerated
immediately without further notice (except such notice as may be required to effect such acceleration) or the expiration of any applicable grace periods, the Issuers and the Subsidiary Guarantors may not make payments on the Subordinated Debt
Securities or any related Guarantee for a period (a “Payment Blockage Period”) commencing upon the receipt by the Issuers and the Trustee (and if such Designated Senior Indebtedness is Debt of a Subsidiary Guarantor, the Subsidiary
Guarantor) of written notice of such default from the Representative of any Designated Senior Indebtedness specifying an election to effect a Payment Blockage Period (a “Blockage Notice”) and ending 179 days thereafter (or earlier if such
Payment Blockage Period is terminated by written notice to the Trustee and the Issuers (and if such Designated Senior Indebtedness is Debt of a Subsidiary Guarantor, the Subsidiary Guarantor) from the Person or Persons who gave such Blockage Notice,
by repayment in full in cash of such Designated Senior Indebtedness or because the default giving rise to such Blockage Notice is no longer continuing). Notwithstanding the provisions described in the immediately preceding sentence (but subject to
the provisions contained in Section 12.02 and the first sentence of this Section 12.03), unless the holders of such Designated Senior Indebtedness or the Representative of such holders shall have accelerated the maturity of such Designated Senior
Indebtedness, the Issuers and the Subsidiary Guarantors may resume payments on the Subordinated Debt Securities and related Guarantee after such Payment Blockage Period. Not more than one Blockage Notice may be given in any consecutive 360-day
period, irrespective of the number of defaults with respect to any number of issues of Designated Senior Indebtedness during such period, unless otherwise specified pursuant to Section 2.03 for the Subordinated Debt Securities of a series; provided,
however, that in no event may the total number of days during which any Payment Blockage Period or Periods is in effect exceed 179 days in the aggregate during any 360 consecutive day period. For purposes of this Section 12.03, no default or event
of default which existed or was continuing on the date of the commencement of any Payment Blockage Period with respect to the Designated Senior Indebtedness initiating such Payment Blockage Period shall be, or be made, the basis of the commencement
of a subsequent Payment Blockage Period by the Representative of such Designated Senior Indebtedness, whether or not within a period of 360 consecutive days, unless such default or event of default shall have been cured or waived for a period of not
less than 90 consecutive days. 

  
 53 

 Section 12.04 Acceleration of Payment of Debt Securities. If payment of the
Subordinated Debt Securities is accelerated because of an Event of Default, the Issuers shall promptly notify the holders of the Designated Senior Indebtedness (or their Representatives) of the acceleration. 

Section 12.05 When Distribution Must Be Paid Over. If a distribution is made to Holders of Subordinated Debt Securities or a
related Guarantee that because of this Article XII should not have been made to them, the Holders who receive such distribution shall hold it in trust for holders of Senior Indebtedness and pay it over to them as their interests may appear. 

Section 12.06 Subrogation. After all Senior Indebtedness is paid in full and until the Subordinated Debt Securities are paid in
full, Holders thereof shall be subrogated to the rights of holders of Senior Indebtedness to receive distributions applicable to Senior Indebtedness. A distribution made under this Article XII to holders of Senior Indebtedness which otherwise
would have been made to Holders of Subordinated Debt Securities is not, as between the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors, as the case may be, and such Holders, a payment by the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors, as the case may be, on Senior
Indebtedness. 
 Section 12.07 Relative Rights. This Article XII defines the relative rights of Holders of Subordinated Debt
Securities and holders of Senior Indebtedness. Nothing in this Indenture shall: 
 (a) impair, as between the Issuers or the Subsidiary
Guarantors, as the case may be, and Holders of Subordinated Debt Securities, the obligation of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors, as the case may be, which is absolute and unconditional, to pay principal of, and premium, if any, and interest
on, the Subordinated Debt Securities in accordance with their terms; or 
 (b) prevent the Trustee or any Holder of Subordinated Debt
Securities from exercising its available remedies upon an Event of Default, subject to the rights of holders of Senior Indebtedness to receive distributions otherwise payable to Holders of Subordinated Debt Securities. 

Section 12.08 Subordination May Not Be Impaired by Issuers. No right of any holder of Senior Indebtedness to enforce the
subordination of the Debt evidenced by the Subordinated Debt Securities and the Guarantee in respect thereof shall be impaired by any act or failure to act by any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors or by its failure to comply with this
Indenture. 
 Section 12.09 Rights of Trustee and Paying Agent. Notwithstanding Sections 12.02 and 12.03, the Trustee or any
paying agent may continue to make payments on Subordinated Debt Securities and shall not be charged with knowledge of the existence of facts that would prohibit the making of any such payments unless, not less than two Business Days prior to the
date of such payment, a responsible officer of the Trustee receives notice satisfactory to it that payments may not be made under this Article XII. The Issuers, the Registrar, any paying agent, a Representative or a holder of Senior
Indebtedness may give the notice; provided, however, that, if an issue of Senior Indebtedness has a Representative, only the Representative may give the notice on behalf of the Holders of the Senior Indebtedness of that issue. 

  
 54 

 The Trustee in its individual or any other capacity may hold Senior Indebtedness with the same
rights it would have if it were not Trustee. The Registrar and any paying agent may do the same with like rights. The Trustee shall be entitled to all the rights set forth in this Article XII with respect to any Senior Indebtedness which
may at any time be held by it, to the same extent as any other holder of Senior Indebtedness; and nothing in Article VII shall deprive the Trustee of any of its rights as such holder. Nothing in this Article XII shall apply to claims of, or
payments to, the Trustee under or pursuant to Section 7.06. 
 Section 12.10 Distribution or Notice to Representative. Whenever a
distribution is to be made or a notice given to holders of Senior Indebtedness, the distribution may be made and the notice given to their Representative (if any). 

Section 12.11 Article XII Not to Prevent Defaults or Limit Right to Accelerate. The failure to make a payment pursuant to the
Subordinated Debt Securities, whether directly or pursuant to the Guarantee, by reason of any provision in this Article XII shall not be construed as preventing the occurrence of a Default. Nothing in this Article XII shall have any effect on
the right of the Holders or the Trustee to accelerate the maturity of either the Subordinated Debt Securities or the Debt Securities, as the case may be. 

Section 12.12 Trust Moneys Not Subordinated. Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, payments from money or the
proceeds of U.S. Government Obligations held in trust under Article XI by the Trustee for the payment of principal of, and premium, if any, and interest on, the Subordinated Debt Securities or the Debt Securities shall not be subordinated to the
prior payment of any Senior Indebtedness or subject to the restrictions set forth in this Article XII, and none of the Holders thereof shall be obligated to pay over any such amount to the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors or any holder of Senior
Indebtedness of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors or any other creditor of the Issuers or the Guarantor. 
 Section 12.13 Trustee
Entitled to Rely. Upon any payment or distribution pursuant to this Article XII, the Trustee and the Holders shall be entitled to rely upon any order or decree of a court of competent jurisdiction in which any proceedings of the nature
referred to in Section 12.02 are pending, upon a certificate of the liquidating trustee or agent or other Person making such payment or distribution to the Trustee or to such Holders or upon the Representatives for the holders of Senior Indebtedness
for the purpose of ascertaining the Persons entitled to participate in such payment or distribution, the holders of the Senior Indebtedness and other Debt of any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors, the amount thereof or payable thereon, the
amount or amounts paid or distributed thereon and all other facts pertinent thereto or to this Article XII. In the event that the Trustee determines, in good faith, that evidence is required with respect to the right of any Person as a holder
of Senior Indebtedness to participate in any payment or distribution pursuant to this Article XII, the Trustee may request such Person to furnish evidence to the reasonable satisfaction of the Trustee as to the amount of Senior Indebtedness held by
such Person, the extent to which such Person is entitled to participate in such payment or distribution and other facts pertinent to the rights of such Person under this Article XII, and, if such evidence is not furnished, the Trustee may defer any
payment to such Person pending judicial determination as to the right of such Person to receive such payment. The provisions of Sections 7.01 and 7.02 shall be applicable to all actions or omissions of actions by the Trustee pursuant to this
Article XII. 

  
 55 

 Section 12.14 Trustee to Effectuate Subordination. Each Holder by accepting a
Subordinated Debt Security authorizes and directs the Trustee on his behalf to take such action as may be necessary or appropriate to acknowledge or effectuate the subordination between the Holders of Subordinated Debt Securities and the holders of
Senior Indebtedness as provided in this Article XII and appoints the Trustee as attorney-in-fact for any and all such purposes. 
 Section
12.15 Trustee Not Fiduciary for Holders of Senior Indebtedness. The Trustee shall not be deemed to owe any fiduciary duty to the holders of Senior Indebtedness and shall not be liable to any such holders if it shall mistakenly pay over
or distribute to Holders of Subordinated Debt Securities or any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors or any other Person, money or assets to which any holders of Senior Indebtedness shall be entitled by virtue of this Article XII or
otherwise. 
 Section 12.16 Reliance by Holders of Senior Indebtedness on Subordination Provisions. Each Holder by accepting a
Subordinated Debt Security acknowledges and agrees that the foregoing subordination provisions are, and are intended to be, an inducement and a consideration to each holder of any Senior Indebtedness, whether such Senior Indebtedness was created or
acquired before or after the issuance of the Subordinated Debt Securities, to acquire and continue to hold, or to continue to hold, such Senior Indebtedness and such holder of Senior Indebtedness shall be deemed conclusively to have relied on such
subordination provisions in acquiring and continuing to hold, or in continuing to hold, such Senior Indebtedness. 
 ARTICLE XIII 

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 

Section 13.01 Successors and Assigns of Issuers Bound by Indenture. All the covenants, stipulations, promises and agreements in
this Indenture contained by or in behalf of the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Trustee shall bind their respective successors and assigns, whether so expressed or not. 

Section 13.02 Acts of Board, Committee or Officer of Successor Issuer Valid. Any act or proceeding by any provision of this
Indenture authorized or required to be done or performed by any board, committee or officer of either of the Issuers shall and may be done and performed with like force and effect by the like board, committee or officer of any Successor Company.

 Section 13.03 Required Notices or Demands. Any notice or communication by the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors or the
Trustee to the others is duly given if in writing in the English language and delivered in Person or mailed by registered or certified mail (return receipt requested), telecopier or overnight air courier guaranteeing next day delivery, to the
other’s address: 

  
 56 

 If to the Issuers or any Subsidiary Guarantor: 

StoneMor Partners L.P. 
 3600
Horizon Boulevard 
 Trevose, Pennsylvania 19053 

Attention:                

Telecopy No.                 

If to the Trustee: 
  

                       
                                         
     

                       
                                         
     

                       
                                         
     
 The Issuers, any Subsidiary Guarantor or the Trustee by notice to the others may designate additional or
different addresses for subsequent notices or communications. 
 All notices and communications shall be deemed to have been duly
given: at the time delivered by hand, if personally delivered; five Business Days after being deposited in the mail, postage prepaid, if mailed; on the first Business Day on or after being sent, if telecopied and the sender receives
confirmation of successful transmission; and the next Business Day after timely delivery to the courier, if sent by overnight air courier guaranteeing next day delivery. 

Any notice required or permitted to a Holder by the Issuers, any Subsidiary Guarantor or the Trustee pursuant to the provisions of this
Indenture shall be deemed to be properly mailed by being deposited postage prepaid in a post office letter box in the United States addressed to such Holder at the address of such Holder as shown on the Debt Security Register. Any report
pursuant to Section 313 of the TIA shall be transmitted in compliance with subsection (c) therein. 
 Notwithstanding the foregoing,
any notice to Holders of Floating Rate Securities regarding the determination of a periodic rate of interest, if such notice is required pursuant to Section 2.03, shall be sufficiently given if given in the manner specified pursuant to Section 2.03.

 In the event of suspension of regular mail service or by reason of any other cause it shall be impracticable to give notice by mail, then
such notification as shall be given with the approval of the Trustee shall constitute sufficient notice for every purpose hereunder. 
 In
the event it shall be impracticable to give notice by publication, then such notification as shall be given with the approval of the Trustee shall constitute sufficient notice for every purpose hereunder. 

Failure to mail a notice or communication to a Holder or any defect in it or any defect in any notice by publication as to a Holder shall not
affect the sufficiency of such notice with respect to other Holders. If a notice or communication is mailed or published in the manner provided above, it is conclusively presumed duly given. 

Section 13.04 Indenture and Debt Securities to Be Construed in Accordance with the Laws of the State of New York. THIS INDENTURE,
EACH DEBT SECURITY AND THE 

  
 57 

 
GUARANTEE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE NEW YORK CONTRACTS, AND FOR ALL PURPOSES SHALL BE GOVERNED BY AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF SAID STATE. 

Section 13.05 Officers’ Certificate and Opinion of Counsel to Be Furnished upon Application or Demand by the Issuers. Upon any
application or demand by the Issuers to the Trustee to take any action under any of the provisions of this Indenture, each of the Issuers shall furnish to the Trustee an Officers’ Certificate stating that all conditions precedent provided for
in this Indenture relating to the proposed action have been complied with and an Opinion of Counsel stating that, in the opinion of such counsel, all such conditions precedent have been complied with, except that in the case of any such application
or demand as to which the furnishing of such document is specifically required by any provision of this Indenture relating to such particular application or demand, no additional certificate or opinion need be furnished. 

Each certificate or opinion provided for in this Indenture and delivered to the Trustee with respect to compliance with a condition or
covenant provided for in this Indenture shall include (a) a statement that the person making such certificate or opinion has read such covenant or condition, (b) a brief statement as to the nature and scope of the examination or
investigation upon which the statements or opinions contained in such certificate or opinion are based, (c) a statement that, in the opinion of such person, he has made such examination or investigation as is necessary to enable him to express
an informed opinion as to whether or not such covenant or condition has been complied with and (d) a statement as to whether or not, in the opinion of such person, such condition or covenant has been complied with. 

Section 13.06 Payments Due on Legal Holidays. In any case where the date of maturity of interest on or principal of and premium,
if any, on the Debt Securities of a series or the date fixed for redemption or repayment of any Debt Security or the making of any sinking fund payment shall not be a Business Day at any Place of Payment for the Debt Securities of such series, then
payment of interest or principal and premium, if any, or the making of such sinking fund payment need not be made on such date at such Place of Payment, but may be made on the next succeeding Business Day at such Place of Payment with the same force
and effect as if made on the date of maturity or the date fixed for redemption, and no interest shall accrue for the period after such date. If a record date is not a Business Day, the record date shall not be affected. 

Section 13.07 Provisions Required by TIA to Control. If and to the extent that any provision of this Indenture limits, qualifies
or conflicts with another provision included in this Indenture which is required to be included in this Indenture by any of Sections 310 to 318, inclusive, of the TIA, such required provision shall control. 

Section 13.08 Computation of Interest on Debt Securities. Interest, if any, on the Debt Securities shall be computed on the basis
of a 360-day year of twelve 30-day months, except as may otherwise be provided pursuant to Section 2.03. 
 Section 13.09 Rules by
Trustee, Paying Agent and Registrar. The Trustee may make reasonable rules for action by or a meeting of Holders. The Registrar and any paying agent may make reasonable rules for their functions. 

  
 58 

 Section 13.10 No Recourse Against Others. None of the past, present or future
partners, incorporators, managers, members, directors, officers, employees, unitholders or stockholders of either Issuer or any Subsidiary Guarantor, as such, shall have any liability for any obligations of the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Issuers
under the Debt Securities, this Indenture or the Guarantee or for any claim based on, in respect of, or by reason of, such obligations or their creation. By accepting a Debt Security, each Holder shall be deemed to have waived and released all
such liability. The waiver and release shall be part of the consideration for the issue of the Debt Securities. 
 Section 13.11
Severability. In case any provision in this Indenture or the Debt Securities shall be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected or impaired
thereby. 
 Section 13.12 Effect of Headings. The article and section headings herein and in the Table of Contents are for
convenience only and shall not affect the construction hereof. 
 Section 13.13 Indenture May Be Executed in Counterparts. This
Indenture may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be an original; but such counterparts shall together constitute but one and the same instrument. 

ARTICLE XIV 
 GUARANTEE

 Section 14.01 Unconditional Guarantee. 

(a) Notwithstanding any provision of this Article XIV to the contrary, the provisions of this Article XIV shall be applicable only to, and
inure solely to the benefit of, the Debt Securities of any series designated, pursuant to Section 2.03, as entitled to the benefits of the Guarantee of each of the Subsidiary Guarantors. 

(b) For value received, each of the Subsidiary Guarantors hereby fully, unconditionally and absolutely guarantees (the “Guarantee”)
to the Holders and to the Trustee the due and punctual payment of the principal of, and premium, if any, and interest on the Debt Securities and all other amounts due and payable under this Indenture and the Debt Securities by the Issuers, when and
as such principal, premium, if any, and interest shall become due and payable, whether at the Stated Maturity or by declaration of acceleration, call for redemption or otherwise, according to the terms of the Debt Securities and this Indenture,
subject to (i) the limitations set forth in Section 14.03 and (ii) in the case of the Guarantee of the Subordinated Debt Securities, to the subordination provisions contained in Article XII. 

(c) Failing payment when due of any amount guaranteed pursuant to the Guarantee, for whatever reason, each of the Subsidiary Guarantors will
be jointly and severally obligated to pay the same immediately, subject, in the case of the Guarantee of the Subordinated Debt Securities, to the subordination provisions contained in Article XII. The Guarantee hereunder (other than the
Guarantee of Subordinated Debt Securities) is intended to be a general, unsecured, senior obligation of each of the Subsidiary Guarantors and will rank pari passu in right of payment with all Debt of each Subsidiary Guarantor that is not, by its
terms, expressly 

  
 59 

 
subordinated in right of payment to the Guarantee. Each of the Subsidiary Guarantors hereby agrees that its obligations hereunder shall be full, unconditional and absolute, irrespective of
the validity, regularity or enforceability of the Debt Securities, the Guarantee (including the Guarantee of any other Subsidiary Guarantor) or this Indenture, the absence of any action to enforce the same, any waiver or consent by any Holder of the
Debt Securities with respect to any provisions hereof or thereof, the recovery of any judgment against either of the Issuers or any other Subsidiary Guarantor, or any action to enforce the same or any other circumstances which might otherwise
constitute a legal or equitable discharge or defense of any of the Subsidiary Guarantors. Each of the Subsidiary Guarantors hereby agrees that in the event of a default in payment of the principal of, or premium, if any, or interest on the Debt
Securities, whether at the Stated Maturity or by declaration of acceleration, call for redemption or otherwise, legal proceedings may be instituted by the Trustee on behalf of the Holders or, subject to Section 6.04, by the Holders, on the terms and
conditions set forth in this Indenture, directly against such Subsidiary Guarantor to enforce the Guarantee without first proceeding against either of the Issuers or any other Subsidiary Guarantor. 

(d) The obligations of each of the Subsidiary Guarantors under this Article XIV shall be as aforesaid full, unconditional and absolute and
shall not be impaired, modified, released or limited by any occurrence or condition whatsoever, including, without limitation, (A) any compromise, settlement, release, waiver, renewal, extension, indulgence or modification of, or any change in,
any of the obligations and liabilities of any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors contained in the Debt Securities or this Indenture, (B) any impairment, modification, release or limitation of the liability of any of the Issuers or the
Subsidiary Guarantors or any of their estates in bankruptcy, or any remedy for the enforcement thereof, resulting from the operation of any present or future provision of any applicable Bankruptcy Law, as amended, or other statute or from the
decision of any court, (C) the assertion or exercise by any of the Issuers, the Subsidiary Guarantors or the Trustee of any rights or remedies under the Debt Securities or this Indenture or their delay in or failure to assert or exercise any
such rights or remedies, (D) the assignment or the purported assignment of any property as security for the Debt Securities, including all or any part of the rights of any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors under this Indenture,
(E) the extension of the time for payment by any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors of any payments or other sums or any part thereof owing or payable under any of the terms and provisions of the Debt Securities or this Indenture or of
the time for performance by any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors of any other obligations under or arising out of any such terms and provisions or the extension or the renewal of any thereof, (F) the modification or amendment
(whether material or otherwise) of any duty, agreement or obligation of any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors set forth in this Indenture, (G) the voluntary or involuntary liquidation, dissolution, sale or other disposition of all or
substantially all of the assets, marshaling of assets and liabilities, receivership, insolvency, bankruptcy, assignment for the benefit of creditors, reorganization, arrangement, composition or readjustment of, or other similar proceeding affecting,
any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors or any of their respective assets, or the disaffirmance of the Debt Securities, the Guarantee or this Indenture in any such proceeding, (H) the release or discharge of any of the Issuers or the
Subsidiary Guarantors from the performance or observance of any agreement, covenant, term or condition contained in any of such instruments by operation of law, (I) the unenforceability of the Debt Securities, the Guarantee or this Indenture or
(J) any other circumstances (other than payment in full or discharge of all amounts guaranteed pursuant to the Guarantee) which might otherwise constitute a legal or equitable discharge of a surety or guarantor. 

  
 60 

 (e) Each of the Subsidiary Guarantors hereby (A) waives diligence, presentment, demand of
payment, filing of claims with a court in the event of the merger, insolvency or bankruptcy of any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors, and all demands whatsoever, (B) acknowledges that any agreement, instrument or document evidencing
the Guarantee may be transferred and that the benefit of its obligations hereunder shall extend to each holder of any agreement, instrument or document evidencing the Guarantee without notice to it and (C) covenants that the Guarantee will not
be discharged except by complete performance of the Guarantee. Each of the Subsidiary Guarantors further agrees that if at any time all or any part of any payment theretofore applied by any Person to the Guarantee is, or must be, rescinded or
returned for any reason whatsoever, including without limitation, the insolvency, bankruptcy or reorganization of any of the Issuers or the Subsidiary Guarantors, the Guarantee shall, to the extent that such payment is or must be rescinded or
returned, be deemed to have continued in existence notwithstanding such application, and the Guarantee shall continue to be effective or be reinstated, as the case may be, as though such application had not been made. 

(f) Each of the Subsidiary Guarantors shall be subrogated to all rights of the Holders and the Trustee against the Issuers in respect of any
amounts paid by such Subsidiary Guarantor pursuant to the provisions of this Indenture, provided, however, that such Subsidiary Guarantor, shall not be entitled to enforce or to receive any payments arising out of, or based upon, such right of
subrogation until all of the Debt Securities and the Guarantee shall have been paid in full or discharged. 
 Section 14.02 Execution and
Delivery of Guarantee. To further evidence the Guarantee set forth in Section 14.01, each of the Subsidiary Guarantors hereby agrees that a notation relating to such Guarantee, substantially in the form attached hereto as Annex A, shall be
endorsed on each Debt Security entitled to the benefits of the Guarantee authenticated and delivered by the Trustee and executed by either manual or facsimile signature of an Officer of such Subsidiary Guarantor. Each of the Subsidiary
Guarantors hereby agrees that the Guarantee set forth in Section 14.01 shall remain in full force and effect notwithstanding any failure to endorse on each Debt Security a notation relating to the Guarantee. If any Officer of any Subsidiary
Guarantor whose signature is on this Indenture or a Debt Security no longer holds that office at the time the Trustee authenticates such Debt Security or at any time thereafter, the Guarantee of such Debt Security shall be valid
nevertheless. The delivery of any Debt Security by the Trustee, after the authentication thereof hereunder, shall constitute due delivery of the Guarantee set forth in this Indenture on behalf of the Subsidiary Guarantors. 

Section 14.03 Limitation on Subsidiary Guarantors’ Liability. Each Subsidiary Guarantor and by its acceptance hereof each
Holder of a Debt Security entitled to the benefits of the Guarantee hereby confirm that it is the intention of all such parties that the guarantee by such Subsidiary Guarantor pursuant to the Guarantee not constitute a fraudulent transfer or
conveyance for purposes of any Federal or state law. To effectuate the foregoing intention, the Holders of a Debt Security entitled to the benefits of the Guarantee and the Subsidiary Guarantors hereby irrevocably agree that the obligations of
each Subsidiary Guarantor under the Guarantee shall be limited to the maximum amount as will, after giving effect to all other 

  
 61 

 
contingent and fixed liabilities of such Subsidiary Guarantor and to any collections from or payments made by or on behalf of any other Subsidiary Guarantor in respect of the obligations of such
other Subsidiary Guarantor under the Guarantee, not result in the obligations of such Subsidiary Guarantor under the Guarantee constituting a fraudulent conveyance or fraudulent transfer under Federal or state law. 

Section 14.04 Release of Subsidiary Guarantors from Guarantee. 

(a) Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Indenture, the Guarantee of any Subsidiary Guarantor may be released upon the terms and
subject to the conditions set forth in Section 11.02(b) and in this Section 14.04. Provided that no Default shall have occurred and shall be continuing under this Indenture, the Guarantee incurred by a Subsidiary Guarantor pursuant to this Article
XIV shall be unconditionally released and discharged (i) automatically upon (A) any sale, exchange or transfer, whether by way of merger or otherwise, to any Person that is not an Affiliate of the Partnership, of all of the
Partnership’s direct or indirect limited partnership or other equity interests in such Subsidiary Guarantor (provided such sale, exchange or transfer is not prohibited by this Indenture) or (B) the merger of such Subsidiary Guarantor into
either of the Issuers or any other Subsidiary Guarantor or the liquidation and dissolution of such Subsidiary Guarantor (in each case to the extent not prohibited by this Indenture) or (ii) upon the Issuers’ delivery of a written notice to
the Trustee of the release or discharge of all guarantees by such Subsidiary Guarantor of any Debt of the Issuers other than obligations arising under this Indenture and any Debt Securities issued hereunder, except a discharge or release by or as a
result of payment under such guarantees. 
 (b) The Trustee shall deliver an appropriate instrument evidencing any release of a Subsidiary
Guarantor from the Guarantee upon receipt of a written request of the Issuers accompanied by an Officers’ Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel to the effect that the Subsidiary Guarantor is entitled to such release in accordance with the
provisions of this Indenture. Any Subsidiary Guarantor not so released shall remain liable for the full amount of principal of (and premium, if any) and interest on the Debt Securities entitled to the benefits of the Guarantee as provided in this
Indenture, subject to the limitations of Section 14.03. 
 Section 14.05 Subsidiary Guarantor Contribution. In order to provide for
just and equitable contribution among the Subsidiary Guarantors, the Subsidiary Guarantors hereby agree, inter se, that in the event any payment or distribution is made by any Subsidiary Guarantor (a “Funding Guarantor”) under the
Guarantee, such Funding Guarantor shall be entitled to a contribution from each other Subsidiary Guarantor (if any) in a pro rata amount based on the net assets of each Subsidiary Guarantor (including the Funding Guarantor) for all payments, damages
and expenses incurred by that Funding Guarantor in discharging the Issuers’ obligations with respect to the Debt Securities or any other Subsidiary Guarantor’s obligations with respect to the Guarantee. 

The Trustee hereby accepts the trusts in this Indenture upon the terms and conditions herein set forth. 

[Remainder of This Page Intentionally Left Blank.] 

  
 62 

 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Indenture to be duly executed, all as of
the day and year first above written. 
  

 

			
		
	By:	 	                                ,
		 	its General Partner
		
	By:	 	  

		 	Name:
		 	Title:
		
	By:	 	  

		 	Name:
		 	Title:
		
	By:	 	  

		 	Name:
		 	Title:

 [Signature Page to Subordinated Indenture] 

 ANNEX A 

NOTATION OF GUARANTEE 

Each of the Subsidiary Guarantors (which term includes any successor Person under the Indenture), has fully, unconditionally and absolutely
guaranteed, to the extent set forth in the Indenture and subject to the provisions in the Indenture, the due and punctual payment of the principal of, and premium, if any, and interest on the Debt Securities and all other amounts due and payable
under the Indenture and the Debt Securities by the Issuers. 
 The obligations of the Subsidiary Guarantors to the Holders of Debt
Securities and to the Trustee pursuant to the Guarantee and the Indenture are expressly set forth in Article XIV of the Indenture and reference is hereby made to the Indenture for the precise terms of the Guarantee. 

 

			
	 [NAME OF SUBSIDIARY GUARANTOR(S)]

		
	By:	 	  

		 	Name:
		 	Title:

  
 A-1Weis Markets, Inc. Exhibit 10-A

		
			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan
		

		
			Originally Effective
July 1, 1994
		

		
			As Amended And Restated Effective
January 1, 2015 
		

		
			
		

		 

		

			 
		

 

		821ec53f-24ed-48b4-a673-1058649831fc.DOCX
		

		
			 
		

		

		

		 

		

			 

		

 

		

			Blanktext

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		TABLE OF CONTENTS
		

		
			PREAMBLE.................................................................................................................................................................................................1
		

		
			ARTICLE I – DEFINITIONS....................................................................................................................................................................2
		

		
			Section 1.1 – References2
		

		
			Section 1.2 – Compensation2
		

		
			Section 1.3 – Dates3
		

		
			Section 1.4 – Employee4
		

		
			Section 1.5 – Employer5
		

		
			Section 1.6 – Fiduciaries5
		

		
			Section 1.7 – Participant/Beneficiary/Spouse/Dependent5
		

		
			Section 1.8 – Participant Accounts6
		

		
			Section 1.9 – Plan6
		

		
			Section 1.10 – Service6
		

		
			Section 1.11 – Trust8
		

		
			ARTICLE II – PARTICIPATION............................................................................................................................................................8
		

		
			Section 2.1 – Eligibility Service8
		

		
			Section 2.2 – Plan Participation9
		

		
			Section 2.3 – Termination of Participation10
		

		
			Section 2.4 – Re-Participation or Re-Employment (Break in Service Rules)10
		

		
			ARTICLE III – ALLOCATIONS TO PARTICIPANT ACCOUNTS................................................................................................11
		

		
			Section 3.1 – General Provisions11
		

		
			Section 3.2 – Profit Sharing Contributions12
		

		
			Section 3.3 – Qualified Nonelective Contributions12
		

		
			Section 3.4 – Employee 401(k) Elective Deferral Contributions13
		

		
			Section 3.4A – Roth Elective Deferral Contributions14
		

		
			Section 3.5 – Employee Nondeductible Contributions15
		

		
			Section 3.6 – Employer Matching Contributions15
		

		
			Section 3.7 – Rollover/Transfer Contributions16
		

		
			Section 3.8 – Allocation of Investment Results17
		

		
			ARTICLE IV – PAYMENT OF PARTICIPANT ACCOUNTS..........................................................................................................18
		

		
			Section 4.1 – Vesting Service Rules18
		

		
			Section 4.2 – Vesting of Participant Accounts19
		

		
			Section 4.3 – Payment of Participant Accounts22
		

		
			Section 4.4 – In-Service Payments25
		

		
			Section 4.5 – Distributions Under Domestic Relations Orders26
		

		
			ARTICLE V – ADDITIONAL QUALIFICATION RULES................................................................................................................27
		

		
			Section 5.1 – Limitations on Allocations Under Code Section 41527
		

		
			Section 5.2 – Joint and Survivor Annuity Requirements30
		

		
			Section 5.3 – Distribution Requirements31
		

		
			Section 5.4 – Top-Heavy Provisions35
		

		
			Section 5.5 – Limitations and Conditions Regarding Contributions Under Code Sections 402(g), 401(k), and 401(m)38
		

		
			ARTICLE VI – ADMINISTRATION OF THE PLAN........................................................................................................................50
		

		
			Section 6.1 – Fiduciary Responsibility50
		

		
			Section 6.2 – Plan Administrator50
		

		
			Section 6.3 – Claims Procedure52
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:

		

 

		

			Blanktext

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		Section 6.4 – Trust Fund53
		

		
			ARTICLE VII – AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION OF PLAN.................................................................................................54
		

		
			Section 7.1 – Right to Discontinue and Amend54
		

		
			Section 7.2 – Amendments54
		

		
			Section 7.3 – Protection of Benefits in Case of Plan Merger55
		

		
			Section 7.4 – Termination of Plan55
		

		
			ARTICLE VIII – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS........................................................................................................................55
		

		
			Section 8.1 – Exclusive Benefit – Non-Reversion55
		

		
			Section 8.2 – Inalienability of Benefits56
		

		
			Section 8.3 – Employer-Employee Relationship56
		

		
			Section 8.4 – Binding Agreement56
		

		
			Section 8.5 – Separability56
		

		
			Section 8.6 – Construction56
		

		
			Section 8.7 – Copies of Plan56
		

		
			Section 8.8 – Interpretation56
		

		
			
		

		
			This plan document has been created from the volume submitter plan document developed and sponsored by Conrad Siegel Actuaries and is the subject of an approval letter issued by the Internal Revenue Service.  For further information regarding the drafter's intended meaning of plan provisions or the effect of the approval letter contact Conrad Siegel Actuaries by letter (P.O. Box 5900, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania 17110-0900) or telephone (717-652-5633).  You may also contact us through our website at conradsiegel.com.
		

		
			 
		

		
		

		 

		

			316_W969:

		

 

		

			Blanktext

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		PREAMBLE
		

		
			This amended and restated plan, executed on the date indicated at the end hereof, is made effective as of January 1, 2015, except as provided otherwise in Section 1.3(c), by Weis Markets, Inc., a corporation, with its principal office located in Sunbury,  Pennsylvania.
		

		
			W I T N E S S E T H :
		

		
			WHEREAS, effective July 1, 1994, the employer established the plan for its employees and desires to continue to maintain a permanent qualified plan in order to provide its employees and their beneficiaries with financial security in the event of retirement, disability, or death; and
		

		
			WHEREAS, it is desired to amend said plan;
		

		
			NOW THEREFORE, the premises considered, the original plan is hereby replaced by this amended and restated plan, and the following are the provisions of the qualified plan of the employer as restated herein; provided, however, that each employee who was previously a participant shall remain a participant, and no employee who was a participant in the plan before the date of amendment shall receive a benefit under this amended plan that is less than the benefit he was then entitled to receive under the plan as of the day prior to the amendment.
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries1

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		ARTICLE I – DEFINITIONS
		

		
			Section 1.1 – References
		

		
			(a)Code means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as it may be amended from time to time. 
		

		
			(b)ERISA means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.
		

		
			Section 1.2 – Compensation
		

		
			(a)Compensation means, except as provided in Section 1.2(b) hereof, any earnings reportable as W‐2 wages for federal income tax withholding purposes and earned income, plus elective contributions, for the determination period.  For this purpose, the determination period is the plan year.  Such earnings shall include any amount contributed to a Roth elective deferral account under this or any other qualified plan.  However, compensation shall not include any earnings reportable as W‐2 wages that are payable following the termination of employment pursuant to a severance agreement.
		

		
			Elective contributions are amounts excludable from the employee’s gross income and contributed by the employer, at the employee’s election to:
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A cafeteria plan (excludable under Code section 125 and as provided in Section 5.1(c)(2));

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A Code section 401(k) arrangement (excludable under Code section 402(e)(3));

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A simplified employee pension (excludable under Code section 402(h));

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A simple retirement account (excludable under Code section 402(k));

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A tax sheltered annuity (excludable under Code section 403(b));

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A deferred compensation plan excludable under Code section 457(b); or

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A Code section 132(f)(4) qualified transportation fringe benefit plan.

		
			"Earned Income" means net earnings from self-employment in the trade or business with respect to which the employer has established the plan, provided that personal services of the individual are a material income producing factor.  Net earnings shall be determined without regard to items excluded from gross income and the deductions allocable to those items.  Net earnings shall be determined after the deduction allowed to the self-employed individual for all contributions made by the employer to a qualified plan and, for plan years beginning after December 31, 1989, the deduction allowed to the self-employed under Code section 164(f) for self-employment taxes.
		

		
			Any reference in this plan to compensation shall be a reference to the definition in this Section 1.2, unless the plan reference specifies a modification to this definition.  The plan administrator shall take into account only compensation actually paid by the employer for the relevant period.  A compensation payment includes compensation by the employer through another person under the common paymaster provisions in Code sections 3121 and 3306.  Compensation from an employer that is not a participating employer under this plan shall be excluded.
		

		
			(b)Exclusions From Compensation – Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 1.2(a), the following types of remuneration shall be excluded from the participant’s compensation:
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Bonuses

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Meal allowances

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Auto Personal Use

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Sick Pay

		
			(c)Limitations on Compensation – The plan administrator shall take into account only $200,000 (as adjusted for cost-of-living increases in accordance with Code section 401(a)(17)(B) for plan years beginning on or after January 1, 2003) of any participant's annual compensation for determining all benefits provided under the plan.  Contributions and allocations made before January 1, 2002 were made subject to the limitations of Code section 401(a)(17) as then in effect and described in prior statements of the plan document.  The compensation dollar limitation for a plan year shall be the limitation amount in effect on January 1 of the calendar year in which the plan year begins.  Annual compensation means 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries2

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		compensation during the plan year or such other 12-consecutive-month period over which compensation is otherwise determined under the plan (the determination period for purposes of Section 1.2).  If the plan should determine compensation on a period of time that contains less than 12 calendar months (such as for a short plan year), the annual compensation dollar limitation shall be an amount equal to the compensation dollar limitation for the plan year multiplied by the ratio obtained by dividing the number of full months in the period by 12.
		

		
			(d)Compensation for Nondiscrimination Testing – For purposes of determining whether the plan discriminates in favor of highly compensated employees, compensation means compensation as defined in this Section 1.2, except that the employer will not give effect to any exclusion from compensation specified in Section 1.2(b).
		

		
			For this purpose, compensation shall include compensation paid by the employer as defined under Section 1.5(b).  
		

		
			Notwithstanding the above, the employer may amend this plan to exclude from this nondiscrimination definition of compensation any items of compensation excludable under Code section 414(s) and the applicable Treasury regulations, provided such adjusted definition conforms to the nondiscrimination requirements of those regulations.
		

		
			(e)Compensation for Compliance with Section 5.5 – For purposes of conducting the actual deferral percentage test or the actual contribution percentage test, compensation means compensation as defined in Section 1.2(a) for the entire determination period.
		

		
			Section 1.3 – Dates
		

		
			(a)Accounting Date means the date(s) on which investment results are allocated to participants’ accounts as set forth below:
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			With respect to investment funds for which there is a daily market value, the investment results shall be allocated on a daily basis.  For this purpose, daily means as of each business day on which the New York Stock Exchange is open.  The accounting date for dividends that accrue on a daily basis but are paid monthly shall be the dividend distribution date.  The last day of each quarter shall be an investment allocation date for all other investments.

		
			(b)Allocation Date means the date(s) as of which any contribution is allocated to participants' accounts.
		

		
			The profit sharing contribution and forfeitures shall be allocated as of December 31.  The allocation period for the profit sharing contribution shall be the plan year.
		

		
			Employer matching contributions shall be allocated as of the last day of each payroll period.  The allocation period applicable to a particular employer matching contribution allocation date shall be the period commencing as of the day following the immediately previous allocation date and ending on the particular allocation date.
		

		
			Qualified nonelective contributions shall be allocated as of December 31.  The allocation period for the qualified nonelective contribution shall be the plan year.
		

		
			Employee contributions (whether elective deferrals or nondeductible) shall be allocated as of the last day of each payroll period.
		

		
			(c)The Effective Date of the plan is July 1, 1994.
		

		
			The effective date of this amendment and restatement is January 1, 2015; provided, however, that the plan provisions required to comply with the Pension Protection Act of 2006 shall generally be effective as of the first day of the first plan year beginning after December 31, 2006, except as otherwise specified in said Act or in this plan (with respect to provisions not required for qualification compliance); the plan provisions required to comply with the Heroes Earnings Assistance and Relief Tax Act of 2008 (HEART) shall generally be effective as of the first day of the first plan year beginning on or after January 1, 2007; the plan provisions required to comply with the final regulations issued under Code section 415 shall generally be effective as of the first day of the first limitation years beginning on or after July 1, 2007; the plan provisions required to comply with the Workers Retirees and Employers Relief Act of 2008 shall be effective as of January 1, 2009; and the plan provisions required to comply with the Cumulative Lists as published by the Internal Revenue Service with respect to the years 2004 through 2010 shall generally be 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries3

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		effective as of the first day of the plan year with respect to which the List was published, except as specified otherwise in this plan or in said Acts.
		

		
			Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the provisions noted below shall become effective on the date indicated.  The prior provisions of the plan shall continue in effect until such indicated effective date.
		

		
			ProvisionEffective Date
		

		
			Section 3.4(A) - Roth Elective Deferral ContributionsApril 1, 2016
		

		
			Section 4.4 - In-Service PaymentsJanuary 1, 2016
		

		
			(d)Plan Entry Date means the participation date(s) specified in Article II.
		

		
			(e)Plan Year means the 12-consecutive-month period beginning on January 1 and ending on December 31.
		

		
			(f)Limitation Year means the 12-consecutive-month period beginning on January 1 and ending on December 31.
		

		
			Section 1.4 – Employee
		

		
			(a) (1)Employee means any person employed by the employer, including an owner-employee or other self-employed individual (as defined in Section 1.4(a)(3)).  The term employee shall include any employee of the employer as defined in Section 1.5(b).  The term employee shall also include any leased employee deemed to be an employee of any such employer as provided in Code section 414(n) or (o) and as defined in Section 1.4(a)(2).
		

		
			(2)Leased Employee means an individual (who otherwise is not an employee of the employer) who, pursuant to a leasing agreement between the employer and any other person, has performed services for the employer (or for the employer and any persons related to the employer within the meaning of Code section 414(n)(6)) on a substantially full time basis for at least one year and such services are performed under the primary direction or control of the employer.  If a leased employee is treated as an employee by reason of this Section 1.4(a)(2), compensation from the leasing organization that is attributable to services performed for the employer shall be considered as compensation under the plan.  Contributions or benefits provided a leased employee by the leasing organization that are attributable to services performed for the employer shall be treated as provided by the employer. 
		

		
			Safe harbor plan exception – The plan shall not treat a leased employee as an employee if the leasing organization covers the employee in a safe harbor plan and, prior to application of this safe harbor plan exception, 20% or less of the employer's nonhighly compensated employees are leased employees.  A safe harbor plan is a money purchase pension plan providing immediate participation, full and immediate vesting, and a nonintegrated contribution formula equal to at least 10% of the employee's compensation without regard to employment by the leasing organization on a specified date.  The safe harbor plan must determine the 10% contribution on the basis of compensation as defined in Section 5.1(c)(2).
		

		
			(3)Owner-Employee/Self-Employed Individual – Owner-employee means a self-employed individual who is a sole proprietor (if the employer is a sole proprietorship) or who is a partner (if the employer is a partnership) owning more than 10% of either the capital or profits interest of the partnership.  Self-employed individual means an individual who has earned income for the taxable year from the trade or business for which the plan is established, or who would have had earned income but for the fact that the trade or business had no net profits for the taxable year.
		

		
			(b)Highly Compensated Employee means any employee who:
		

		
			(1)was a more than 5% owner of the employer (applying the constructive ownership rules of Code section 318, and applying the principles of Code section 318, for an unincorporated entity) at any time during the current plan year or the look-back year; or
		

		
			(2)for the look-back year – 
		

		
			(A)had compensation from the employer (as defined under Section 1.5(b)) in excess of $80,000 (as adjusted at the same time and in the same manner as under Code section 415(d), except that the base period shall be the calendar quarter ending September 30, 1996), and 
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries4

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(B)if the employer elects the application of this Subparagraph for such look-back year, was in the top-paid group of employees for such look-back year.  For this purpose, an employee is in the top-paid group of employees for any look-back year if such employee is in the group consisting of the top 20% of the employees when ranked on the basis of compensation paid during such look-back year.
		

		
			The look-back year is the twelve-month period immediately preceding the current plan year.  The term highly compensated employee also includes any former employee who separated from service (or has a deemed separation from service, as determined under Treasury regulations) prior to the plan year, performs no service for the employer during the plan year, and was a highly compensated employee either for the separation plan year or any plan year ending on or after his 55th birthday, based on the applicable rules in effect for such plan year.
		

		
			For purposes of determining who is a highly compensated employee under this Section 1.4(b), compensation means compensation as defined in Section 1.2(a) without regard to Section 1.2(b).  The plan administrator shall make the determination of who is a highly compensated employee.
		

		
			This Section 1.4(b) is effective for plan years beginning after December 31, 1996, except that, in determining whether an employee is a highly compensated employee in 1997, this provision shall be treated as having been in effect for the last plan year beginning before January 1, 1997.
		

		
			(c)Nonhighly Compensated Employee means any employee who is not a highly compensated employee.
		

		
			Section 1.5 – Employer
		

		
			(a)Employer means Weis Markets, Inc. or any successor entity by merger, purchase, consolidation, or otherwise; or an organization affiliated with the employer that may assume the obligations of this plan with respect to its employees by becoming a party to this plan.  Another employer, whether or not it is affiliated with the sponsor employer, may adopt this plan to cover its employees by filing with the sponsor employer a written resolution adopting the plan, upon which the sponsor employer shall indicate its acceptance of such employer as an employer under the plan, if such participation is acceptable.  Each such employer shall be deemed to be the employer only as to persons who are on its payroll.
		

		
			(b)Employer for Compliance Testing – For purposes of determining whether the plan satisfies the participation coverage requirements of Code section 410(b) and the limitations on benefits and allocations under Code section 415, employer shall mean the employer that adopts this plan as set forth in Section 1.5(a), and all members of a controlled group of corporations (as defined in Code section 414(b)), all commonly controlled trades or businesses (as defined in Code section 414(c)) or affiliated service groups (as defined in Code section 414(m)) of which the adopting employer is a part, and any other entity required to be aggregated with the employer pursuant to regulations under Code section 414(o).
		

		
			(c)Exclusive Benefit – In compliance with the exclusive benefit requirements of Code section 401(a), the sponsorship of this plan may not be transferred to an unrelated entity if the transfer is not in connection with a transfer of business assets or operations from the employer to such entity.
		

		
			Section 1.6 – Fiduciaries
		

		
			(a)Named Fiduciary means the person or persons having fiduciary responsibility for the management and control of plan assets.
		

		
			(b)Plan administrator means the person or persons appointed by the named fiduciary to administer the plan.
		

		
			(c)Trustee means the trustee named in the trust agreement executed pursuant to this plan, or any duly appointed successor trustee.
		

		
			(d)Investment Manager means a person or corporation other than the trustee appointed for the investment of plan assets.
		

		
			Section 1.7 – Participant/Beneficiary/Spouse/Dependent
		

		
			(a)Participant means an eligible employee of the employer who becomes a member of the plan pursuant to the provisions of Article II, or a former employee who has an accrued benefit under the plan.  A participant shall be treated as benefiting under the plan for any plan year during which the participant received or is deemed to receive an allocation in accordance with Regulation section 1.410(b)-3(a).
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries5

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(b)Beneficiary means a person designated by a participant who is or may become entitled to a benefit under the plan.  A beneficiary who becomes entitled to a benefit under the plan remains a beneficiary under the plan until the trustee has fully distributed his benefit to him.  A beneficiary's right to (and the plan administrator's, or a trustee's duty to provide to the beneficiary) information or data concerning the plan shall not arise until he first becomes entitled to receive a benefit under the plan.
		

		
			(c)Spouse means the person of the opposite sex married to the participant at the time of the determination and as further defined by section 3 of the Defense of Marriage Act, 1 U.S.C. § 7 (1996).
		

		
			(d)Dependent means a dependent as defined by Code section 152 without regard to section 152(d)(1)(B).
		

		
			Section 1.8 – Participant Accounts
		

		
			(a)Profit Sharing Account means the balance of the separate account derived from the employer’s profit sharing contributions, including forfeitures (if any) (if so provided under Section 3.2).
		

		
			(b)Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account means the balance of the separate account derived from the employer's qualified nonelective contributions (if so provided under Section 3.3).
		

		
			(c)Employee 401(k) Elective Deferral Account means the balance of the separate account derived from the participant's 401(k) elective deferrals (if so provided under Section 3.4).
		

		
			(d)Roth Elective Deferral Account means the balance of the separate account derived from the participant's Roth elective deferrals (if so provided under Section 3.4A).
		

		
			(e)Employee Nondeductible Contribution Account means the balance of the separate account derived from the participant’s nondeductible employee contributions (if so provided under Section 3.5).
		

		
			(f)Employer Matching Contribution Account means the balance of the separate account derived from the employer's matching contributions (if so provided under Section 3.6).
		

		
			(g)Qualified Employer Matching Contribution Account means the balance of the separate account derived from the employer's qualified matching contributions (if so provided under Section 3.6).
		

		
			(h)Rollover/Transfer Account means the balance of the separate account derived from rollover contributions and/or transfer contributions (if so provided under Section 3.7).
		

		
			(i)Accrued Benefit means the total of the participant’s account balances as of the accounting date falling on or before the day on which the accrued benefit is being determined.
		

		
			Section 1.9 – Plan
		

		
			Plan means Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan as set forth herein and as it may be amended from time to time.
		

		
			Section 1.10 – Service
		

		
			(a)Service means any period of time the employee is in the employ of the employer, including any period the employee is on an unpaid leave of absence authorized by the employer under a uniform, nondiscriminatory policy applicable to all employees.  Separation from service means that the employee no longer has an employment relationship with the employer.
		

		
			(b)(1)Hour of Service means:
		

		
			(A)Each hour for which an employee is paid, or entitled to payment, for the performance of duties for the employer.  These hours shall be credited to the employee for the computation period in which the duties are performed; and 
		

		
			(B)Each hour for which an employee is paid, or entitled to payment, by the employer on account of a period of time during which no duties are performed (irrespective of whether the employment relationship has terminated) due to vacation, holiday, illness, incapacity (including disability), layoff, jury duty, military duty, or leave of absence.  No more than 501 hours of service shall be credited under this Subparagraph (B) for any single continuous period (whether or not such period occurs in a single computation period).  An hour of service shall not be credited to an employee under this Subparagraph (B) if the employee is paid, or entitled to payment, under a plan maintained solely for the purpose of complying with applicable worker's compensation or unemployment compensation or disability insurance laws.  Hours under this Subparagraph (B) 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries6

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		shall be calculated and credited pursuant to section 2530.200b-2 of the Department of Labor Regulations that is incorporated herein by this reference; and 
		

		
			(C)Each hour for which back pay, irrespective of mitigation of damages, is either awarded or agreed to by the employer.  The same hours of service shall not be credited both under Subparagraph (A) or Subparagraph (B), as the case may be, and under this Subparagraph (C).  These hours shall be credited to the employee for the computation period or periods to which the award or agreement pertains rather than the computation period in which the award, agreement, or payment is made.
		

		
			Hours of service shall be determined on the basis of actual hours for which an employee is paid or entitled to payment.  The above provisions shall be construed so as to resolve any ambiguities in favor of crediting employees with hours of service.
		

		
			If, for the purposes of the plan, an employee's records are maintained on other than an hourly basis, the plan administrator, according to uniform rules applicable to a class of employees, may apply the following equivalencies for the purpose of crediting hours of service:
		

			
					
						Basis Upon Which Records 
Are Maintained

					
					
						 

					
					
						Credit Granted to Individual if Individual Earns One or More Hours of Service During Period

				
	
					
						Shift

					
					
						 

					
					
						Actual hours of full shift

				
	
					
						Day

					
					
						 

					
					
						10 hours of service

				
	
					
						Week

					
					
						 

					
					
						45 hours of service

				
	
					
						Semi-Monthly Payroll Period

					
					
						 

					
					
						95 hours of service

				
	
					
						Months of Employment

					
					
						 

					
					
						190 hours of service

				

		
			(2)Solely for purposes of determining whether a break in service for participation and vesting purposes has occurred in a computation period, an individual who is absent from work for maternity or paternity reasons shall receive credit for the hours of service that would otherwise have been credited to such individual but for such absence, or in any case in which such hours cannot be determined, 8 hours of service per day of such absence.  For purposes of this paragraph, an absence from work for maternity or paternity reasons means an absence (A) by reason of the pregnancy of the individual, (B) by reason of a birth of a child of the individual, (C) by reason of the placement of a child with the individual in connection with the adoption of such child by such individual, or (D) for purposes of caring for such child for a period beginning immediately following such birth or placement.  The hours of service credited under this paragraph shall be credited:  (A) in the computation period in which the absence begins if the crediting is necessary to prevent a break in service in that period, or (B) in all other cases, in the following computation period.  No more than 501 hours of service shall be credited under this paragraph for any single continuous period (whether or not such period occurs in a single computation period).
		

		
			(3)Solely for purposes of determining whether a break in service for participation and vesting purposes has occurred in a computation period, an individual who is absent from work on unpaid leave under the Family and Medical Leave Act shall receive credit for the hours of service that would otherwise have been credited to such individual but for such absence, or in any case in which such hours cannot be determined, 8 hours of service per day of such absence.  Such an individual shall be treated as actively employed for the purposes of participation and eligibility for an allocation of any employer contribution that may be provided under this plan.  Notwithstanding the preceding, this paragraph shall not apply if the employer or the particular employee is not subject to the requirements of the Family and Medical Leave Act at the time of the absence.
		

		
			(4)Hours of service shall be credited for employment with the employer as defined in Section 1.5(b).  Hours of service shall also be credited for any leased employee who is considered an employee for purposes of this plan under Code section 414(n) or Code section 414(o).
		

		
			(c)(1)Year of Service means a 12-consecutive-month computation period during which the employee completes the required number of hours of service with the employer as specified in Sections 2.1 or 4.1.  No more than one year of service will be credited for any 12-consecutive-month period unless otherwise required by Sections 2.1(c) and 4.1(c).
		

		
			(2)Service With Related Employers – For purposes of crediting years of service, hours of service credited in accordance with Section 1.10(b)(4) shall be taken into account.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries7

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(3)Predecessor Service – If the employer maintains the plan of a predecessor employer, service with such predecessor employer shall be treated as service for the employer.  If the employer does not maintain the plan of a predecessor employer, then service as an employee of a predecessor employer shall not be considered as service under the plan, except as noted below:
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Effective November 18, 1994, with respect to an employee employed by the predecessor employer as of the day immediately prior, service as an employee of Kings Markets, Strasburg store (Store No. 159) shall be considered as service under the plan solely for the purpose of determining eligibility years of service (under Section 2.1).

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Effective August 24, 2009, with respect to an employee employed by the predecessor employer as of the day immediately prior, service as an employee of Binghamton Giant Markets, Inc. shall be considered as service under the plan for the purposes of determining eligibility years of service (under Section 2.1) and vesting years of service (under Section 4.1).

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Effective January 11, 2010, with respect to an employee employed by the predecessor employer as of the day immediately prior, service as an employee of Vestal, New York Medicine Shoppe shall be considered as service under the plan for the purposes of determining eligibility years of service (under Section 2.1) and vesting years of service (under Section 4.1).

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Effective June 11, 2012, with respect to an employee employed by the predecessor employer as of the day immediately prior, service as an employee of Genuardi's Safeway shall be considered as service under the plan for the purposes of determining eligibility years of service (under Section 2.1) and vesting years of service (under Section 4.1).

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Effective August 31, 2015, with respect to an employee employed by the predecessor employer as of the day immediately prior, service as an employee of Hanover, PA Nell's Shur-Fine Market shall be considered as service under the plan solely for the purpose of determining eligibility years of service (under Section 2.1).

		
			(d)Break in Service (or One Year Break in Service) means a 12-consecutive-month computation period during which a participant or former participant does not complete the specified number of hours of service with the employer as set forth in Sections 2.1(b) and 4.1(b).
		

		
			(e)Qualified Military Service – Notwithstanding any provision of this plan to the contrary, effective December 12, 1994, contributions, benefits, and service credit with respect to qualified military service will be provided in accordance with Code section 414(u).  An employee reemployed after qualified military service shall not be treated as having incurred a break in service, for purposes of vesting and benefit accruals, solely because of an absence due to qualified military service.
		

		
			Effective with respect to deaths occurring on or after January 1, 2007, in the case of a participant who dies while performing qualified military service, the beneficiary(ies) of the participant shall be entitled to any additional benefits payable under Section 4.2(a)(5) (other than contributions relating to the period of qualified military service) that would have been payable had the participant resumed and then immediately terminated employment on account of death.
		

		
			Section 1.11 – Trust
		

		
			(a)Trust means the qualified trust created under the employer’s plan.
		

		
			(b)Trust Fund means all property held or acquired by the plan.
		

		
			 
		

		
			ARTICLE II – PARTICIPATION
		

		
			Section 2.1 – Eligibility Service
		

		
			(a)Eligibility Year of Service means an eligibility computation period during which the employee completes at least 1,000 hours of service with the employer.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries8

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(b)One Year Break in Service means for the purposes of this Article II an eligibility computation period during which the participant or former participant does not complete more than 500 hours of service with the employer.
		

		
			(c)Eligibility Computation Period – The initial eligibility computation period shall be the 12-consecutive-month period beginning with the day on which the employee first performs an hour of service for the employer (employment commencement date).
		

		
			Succeeding eligibility computation periods shall coincide with the plan year, beginning with the first plan year that commences prior to the first anniversary of the employee's employment commencement date regardless of whether the employee is credited with the required number of hours of service during the initial eligibility computation period.  An employee who is credited with the required number of hours of service in both the initial eligibility computation period and the first plan year that commences prior to the first anniversary of the employee's employment commencement date shall be credited with two years of service for purposes of eligibility to participate.
		

		
			Section 2.2 – Plan Participation
		

		
			(a)Eligibility
		

		
			(1)Eligibility for Employer Profit Sharing Contributions 
		

		
			(A)Age/Service Requirements – An employee who is a member of the eligible class of employees shall be eligible for participation for the purpose of the employer profit sharing provision after he has satisfied the following participation requirement(s):
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Completion of 1 year of service.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Attainment of age 21.

		
			(B)Eligible Class of Employees – All employees of the employer except those described below shall be eligible for purposes of receiving a profit sharing allocation if employed in the following categories:  Salaried Employee, Level I Department Manager, Foreman, Corporate Lead Person, Corporate Department Assistant, Corporate Administrative Assistant, Corporate Reorder Buyer, or Corporate Architectural Draftsperson.
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Individuals not directly employed by the employer as defined in Section 1.5(a) shall not be eligible to receive a profit sharing contribution.  An employee of the employer as that term is defined in Section 1.5(b) with respect to the sponsoring employer shall not be eligible to receive a profit sharing allocation unless such employee's direct employer affirmatively elects to become a participating employer hereunder.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Employees who became employees as the result of a “Code section 410(b)(6)(C) transaction.”  These employees shall be excluded during the period beginning on the date of the transaction and ending on the last day of the first plan year beginning after the date of the transaction.  A “Code section 410(b)(6)(C) transaction” is an asset or stock acquisition, merger, or similar transaction involving a change in the employer of the employees of a trade or business.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Employees included in a unit of employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement between the employer and employee representatives shall not be eligible to receive a profit sharing allocation if retirement benefits were the subject of good faith bargaining and if less than 2% of the employees of the employer who are covered pursuant to that agreement are professionals as defined in Regulation section 1.410(b)-9(g).  For this purpose, the term "employee representatives" does not include any organization more than half of whose members are employees who are owners, officers, or executives of the employer.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Leased employees who are considered employees under the plan shall not be eligible to receive a profit sharing allocation.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Employees who are non-resident aliens (as defined in Code section 7701(b)(1)(B)) and who receive no earned income (as defined in Code section 911(d)(2)) from the employer that constitutes income from sources within the United States (as defined in Code section 861(a)(3)) shall not be eligible to receive a profit sharing allocation.

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries9

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Highly compensated employees as defined in Section 1.4(b) shall not be eligible to receive a profit sharing allocation.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Former employees of Hanover, PA Nell's Shur-Fine Market shall not be eligible to receive a profit sharing allocation prior to January 1, 2016.

		
			Notwithstanding the above eligible class of employees, the eligible class provisions of the plan 
before January 1, 2009 shall continue to apply to participants who received profit sharing
allocations before January 1, 2009, and to employees who otherwise would have become participants in the Plan by December 31, 2009.
		

		
			(2)Eligibility for All Other Purposes
		

		
			(A)Age/Service Requirements – An employee who is a member of the eligible class of employees shall be eligible for participation for all purposes under the plan after he has satisfied the following participation requirement(s):
		

		
			(i)Completion of 1 year of service.
		

		
			(ii)Attainment of age 21.
		

		
			(B)Eligible class of employees – All employees of the employer shall be eligible for the purposes of this Section 2.2(a)(2) except for employees in the following categories:
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Individuals not directly employed by the employer as defined in Section 1.5(a).  An employee of the employer as that term is defined in Section 1.5(b) with respect to the sponsoring employer shall not participate in this plan unless such employee's direct employer affirmatively elects to become a participating employer hereunder.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Employees who became employees as the result of a "Code section 410(b)(6)(C) transaction."  These employees shall be excluded during the period beginning on the date of the transaction and ending on the last day of the first plan year beginning after the date of the transaction.  A "Code section 410(b)(6)(C) transaction" is an asset or stock acquisition, merger, or similar transaction involving a change in the employer of the employees of a trade or business.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Employees included in a unit of employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement between the employer and employee representatives if retirement benefits were the subject of good faith bargaining and if 2% or less of the employees of the employer who are covered pursuant to that agreement are professionals as defined in Regulation section 1.410(b)‐9.  For this purpose, the term "employee representatives" does not include any organization more than half of whose members are employees who are owners, officers, or executives of the employer.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Leased employees who are considered employees under the plan.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Employees who are non-resident aliens (as defined in Code section 7701(b)(1)(B)) and who receive no earned income (as defined in Code section 911(d)(2)) from the employer that constitutes income from sources within the United States (as defined in Code section 861(a)(3)).

		
			(b)Entry Date
		

		
			(1)Entry Date for Purposes of Employer Profit Sharing Contributions – An eligible employee shall participate in the plan for the purpose of the employer profit sharing contribution provisions on the earlier of the March 31, June 30, September 30, or December 31 coinciding with or immediately following the date on which he has met the age and service requirements, provided he is employed on that date.
		

		
			(2)Entry Date for All Other Purposes – An eligible employee shall participate in the plan for all purposes on the earlier of the March 31,  June 30,  September 30, or December 31 coinciding with or immediately following the date on which he has met the age and service requirements, provided he is employed on that date.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries10

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(3)If an employee who is not a member of the eligible class of employees becomes a member of the eligible class, such employee shall participate immediately, if he has satisfied the age and service requirements and would have otherwise previously become a participant.
		

		
			Section 2.3 – Termination of Participation
		

		
			A participant shall continue to be an active participant of the plan so long as he is a member of the eligible class of employees and he does not terminate employment.  He shall become an inactive participant when he terminates employment or ceases to be a member of the eligible class of employees.  He shall cease participation completely upon the later of his receipt of a total distribution of his nonforfeitable account balance(s) under the plan or the forfeiture of the nonvested portion of the account balance(s).
		

		
			Section 2.4 – Re-Participation or Re-Employment (Break in Service Rules)
		

		
			(a)Vested Participant – A former participant who had a nonforfeitable right to all or a portion of his account balance derived from employer contributions at the time of his termination from service shall become a participant immediately upon returning to the employ of the employer, if he is a member of the eligible class of employees.
		

		
			(b)Nonvested Participant or Employee – In the case of an employee who does not have any nonforfeitable right to his account balance derived from employer contributions at the time of his termination from service, years of service before a period of consecutive one-year breaks in service shall not be taken into account in computing eligibility service if the number of consecutive one-year breaks in service in such period equals or exceeds the greater of 5 or the aggregate number of years of service before such breaks in service.  Such aggregate number of years of service shall not include any years of service disregarded under the preceding sentence by reason of prior breaks in service.
		

		
			If an employee's years of service before termination from service are disregarded pursuant to the preceding paragraph, he shall be considered a new employee for eligibility purposes.  If such employee's years of service before termination from service may not be disregarded pursuant to the preceding paragraph, he shall participate immediately upon returning to the employ of the employer, if he is a member of the eligible class of employees and has otherwise satisfied the age and service requirements of Section 2.2.
		

		
			(c)Return to Eligible Class – If a participant becomes an inactive participant, because he is no longer a member of the eligible class of employees, but does not incur a break in service, such inactive participant shall become an active participant immediately upon returning to the eligible class of employees.  If such participant incurs a break in service, eligibility shall be determined under the re-participation rules in Section 2.4(a) and (b) above.
		

		
			 
		

		
			ARTICLE III – ALLOCATIONS TO PARTICIPANT ACCOUNTS
		

		
			Section 3.1 – General Provisions
		

		
			(a)Maintenance of Participant Accounts – The plan administrator shall maintain separate accounts covering each participant under the plan as herein described.  Such accounts shall be increased by contributions, reallocation of forfeitures (if any), investment income, and market value appreciation of the fund.  They shall be decreased by market value depreciation of the fund, forfeiture of nonvested amounts, benefit payments, withdrawals, and expenses.
		

		
			(b)Amount and Payment of Employer Contribution
		

		
			(1)Amount of Contribution – For each plan year, the employer contribution to the plan shall be the amount that is determined under the provisions of this Article; provided, however, that the employer may not make a contribution to the plan for any plan year to the extent the contribution would exceed the participants' maximum permissible amounts under Code section 415.  Further, the employer contribution shall not exceed the maximum amount deductible under Code section 404, subject to the provisions for a nondeductible contribution without penalty as permitted under Code section 4972(c)(6).  For this purpose, participant elective deferrals shall not be taken into account as provided under Code section 404(n).
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries11

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		The employer contributes to this plan on the conditions that its contribution is not due to a mistake of fact and that the Internal Revenue Service will not disallow the deduction for its contribution.  The trustee, upon written request from the employer, shall return to the employer the amount of the employer's contribution made due to a mistake of fact or the amount of the employer's contribution disallowed as a deduction under Code section 404.  The trustee shall not return any portion of the employer's contribution under the provisions of this paragraph more than one year after the earlier of:  (A) The date on which the employer made the contribution due to a mistake of fact; or (B) The time of disallowance of the contribution as a deduction, and then, only to the extent of the disallowance.  The trustee will not increase the amount of the employer contribution returnable under this Section for any earnings attributable to the contribution, but the trustee will decrease the employer contribution returnable for any losses attributable to it. The trustee may require the employer to furnish whatever evidence it deems necessary to confirm that the amount the employer has requested be returned is properly returnable under ERISA.
		

		
			(2)Payment of Contribution – The employer shall make its contribution to the plan in cash within the time prescribed by the Code or applicable Treasury regulations.  Subject to the consent of the trustee, the employer may make its contribution in property rather than in cash, provided the contribution is discretionary and the property contributed is unencumbered.
		

		
			(3)Allocation if More Than One Employer – If the employer consists of a sponsoring employer and one or more participating employers, the contribution made by each such entity shall be allocated to the accounts of the participants directly employed by the contributing employer.  If a participant is employed by more than one entity during the applicable period, each entity shall contribute with respect to the compensation earned by the participant while employed by that entity.
		

		
			(c)Limitations and Conditions – Notwithstanding the allocation procedures set forth in this Article, the allocations otherwise contributable to participants' accounts under this plan shall be limited or reduced as provided in Section 5.1.
		

		
			Section 3.2 – Profit Sharing Contributions
		

		
			(a)Amount of Contribution – The employer shall determine, in its sole discretion, the amount of employer profit sharing contribution to be made under this Section 3.2(a) each year; provided, however, that the employer shall contribute such amount as may be required for restoration of a forfeited amount under Section 4.2.  
		

		
			(b)Conditions for Allocations – A participant shall be eligible for an allocation of the employer profit sharing contribution and forfeitures as of an allocation date, provided that he satisfies the following conditions:
		

		
			(1)He completed at least 1,000 hours of service during the current plan year, except that the hours of service requirement shall not apply with respect to any minimum top-heavy allocation as provided in Section 5.4.
		

		
			AND
		

		
			(2)He is employed by the employer on the last day of the plan year.
		

		
			AND
		

		
			(3)He is not a Highly Compensated Employee.
		

		
			AND
		

		
			(4)He is employed in one of the eligible job categories listed in Section 2.2(a)(1)(B) on the last day of the plan year.
		

		
			In the event a minimum top-heavy allocation is required to be made as a profit sharing contribution under the provisions of Section 3.2(c)(2), solely for this limited purpose active participant shall include any person participating under the provision of Section 2.2(b)(1) and not yet eligible to participate in the plan for all purposes under Section 2.2(b)(2).
		

		
			(c)(1)Allocation Formula
		

		
			The employer shall make a separate profit sharing contribution for the plan year with respect to each allocation formula as described below.  The trustee shall be notified by the employer in writing as to 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries12

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		the amount being contributed with respect to each formula.  Forfeitures for the plan year shall be allocated under allocation formula (B) below.  For this purpose, the following allocation formulas shall be used:    
		

			
	
			
				 (A)
			

			
	
			
			The employer profit sharing contribution shall be allocated to the profit sharing account of each eligible participant in equal amounts, but not in excess of the maximum permissible amount as defined in Section 5.1(c).

			
	
			
				 (B)
			

			
	
			
			The employer profit sharing contribution and forfeitures for the plan year shall be allocated to the profit sharing account of each eligible participant in the ratio that such participant's compensation bears to the compensation of all participants.  

		
			(2)Top-Heavy Plan Years
		

		
			In any plan year in which this plan is top-heavy (as defined in Section 5.4(d)(2)), the top-heavy minimum benefit requirement with respect to a participant shall first be met by any allocation to the qualified nonelective contribution account for the plan year.  Then, the contributions and forfeitures allocable to the profit sharing account shall be adjusted as necessary for compliance.  The total of the contributions and forfeitures allocated to such account(s) of each participant shall not be less than an amount equal to 3% of his compensation or the largest percentage of elective deferral contribution, employer contribution, and forfeiture allocated on behalf of any key employee for that year, whichever is less.
		

		
			(3)Compensation – For purposes of the allocation of the employer profit sharing contribution, compensation means compensation as defined in Section 1.2(a) and (b) (subject to the limitations of Section 1.2(c)) for the entire plan year.
		

		
			Compensation includable under Section 1.2(a) and (b) but not paid through payroll shall be treated as being paid as of the last day of the plan year or the last day of employment, if earlier.
		

		
			However, for purposes of the top-heavy contribution, compensation means compensation as defined in Section 5.1(c)(2), subject to the limitations of Section 1.2(c).
		

		
			Section 3.3 – Qualified Nonelective Contributions
		

		
			To the extent the current year testing method is being used to satisfy the requirements described in Section 5.5(b) and (c), the employer may make qualified nonelective contributions on behalf of either the nonhighly compensated active participants or all active participants that are sufficient to satisfy either the actual deferral percentage test or the actual contribution percentage test, or both, pursuant to regulations under the Code in lieu of distributing excess contributions as provided in Section 5.5(b)(2) of the plan, or excess aggregate contributions as provided in Section 5.5(c)(2) of the plan.  The employer may elect to comply with the ADP test requirements by making safe harbor nonelective contributions on behalf of all active participants as described in Section 5.5(f).
		

		
			Qualified nonelective contributions are contributions (other than profit sharing contributions or employer matching contributions) that are made by the employer and allocated to participants' qualified nonelective contribution accounts that the participants may not elect to receive in cash until distributed from the plan; that are nonforfeitable when made; and that are distributable only in accordance with the distribution provisions that are applicable to elective deferrals and qualified matching contributions.  Safe harbor nonelective contributions shall be allocated to a safe harbor sub-account of the qualified nonelective contribution account and shall be held subject to the same rights and restrictions.
		

		
			(a)Amount of Contribution
		

		
			The amount of such contributions for each plan year shall be an amount determined by the employer, in its sole discretion, after the plan administrator has determined the amount needed to satisfy the actual deferral percentage test or the actual contribution percentage test, or both.
		

		
			(b)Allocation of Contribution
		

		
			(1)Allocation of the qualified nonelective contribution shall be made to the group of eligible nonhighly compensated employees that consists of half of all eligible nonhighly compensated employees for the plan year determined by identifying the nonhighly compensated employee with the smallest amount of compensation and continuing in ascending order until half of all eligible nonhighly compensated 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries13

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		employees have been identified, subject to the further requirements of Section 5.5(b)(1)(A)(viii) and Section 5.5(c)(1)(A)(viii).
		

		
			(2)Top-Heavy Plan Years
		

		
			The top-heavy minimum benefit requirements shall be met as provided under Section 3.2(c)(2) concerning profit sharing and qualified nonelective contribution allocations.
		

		
			(3)Compensation – For purposes of the allocation of the qualified nonelective contribution, compensation means compensation as defined in Section 1.2(d) (subject to the limitations of Section 1.2(c)) for the entire plan year, but limited to the employee's compensation for the portion of the plan year in which the employee actually is a member of the eligible class of employees as defined in Section 2.2.  However, for purposes of the top-heavy contribution, compensation means compensation as defined in Section 5.1(c)(2), subject to the limitations of Section 1.2(c).
		

		
			Section 3.4 – Employee 401(k) Elective Deferral Contributions
		

		
			(a)Amount of Contribution – The employer shall contribute each plan year on behalf of each active participant who elects salary deferral a sum equal to the amount that the participant has elected to defer under a salary reduction arrangement or under a cash or deferred arrangement.  The contribution shall be credited to the participant's employee 401(k) elective deferral account.
		

		
			A highly compensated employee may not elect a salary reduction in excess of any limitation established by board resolution.  Such limitation shall be communicated to the highly compensated employees a reasonable time in advance of the date as of which it is effective.  The plan administrator may limit the amount of salary reduction or deferred compensation at any time, if he determines that such limitation is necessary to meet the requirements for a "qualified cash or deferred arrangement" under Code section 401(k) and regulations issued pursuant thereto as set forth in Section 5.5.
		

		
			Effective for plan years beginning prior to 2015, the plan administrator shall calculate the actual deferral percentage for the highly compensated employees using the testing method as provided under the prior statement of the plan document.
		

		
			Effective for plan years beginning on or after January 1, 2015, the plan administrator shall calculate the actual deferral percentage for the highly compensated employees using the prior year testing method.
		

		
			(b)Salary Reduction Election
		

		
			(1)Availability of Election – An active participant may effect a salary reduction agreement with the employer under which an employer contribution will be made to the plan on behalf of such participant only if he elects to reduce his compensation or to forgo an increase in his compensation.  The amount of salary deferral may range from 0% to 50% of compensation.
		

		
			(2)Election Procedures – A notice of a participant’s salary reduction election shall be given to the employer and to the plan administrator in the manner established by the plan administrator.  The plan administrator shall provide a written notice to all participants of the required procedures for making an election and the date as of which an election will be effective.  An election shall be permitted at least once each plan year and the participants shall be permitted a reasonable time in which to make the election.  However, in no event shall such election be made or be effective before the adoption of the employee 401(k) elective deferral contribution provision under the plan.  A participant electing salary reduction will be deemed to desire to continue at the same rate, unless he notifies the plan administrator of his desire to change the amount of salary reduction.  The revised election shall be effective in accordance with the plan administrator’s published procedures.  A salary reduction may be discontinued at any time upon proper notice in the manner established by the plan administrator.  The plan administrator and employer shall treat a salary reduction election as having been revoked by the participant upon his termination of employment or his ceasing to be a member of the eligible class of participants.
		

		
			A participant who receives a distribution of elective deferrals on account of hardship shall be prohibited from making elective deferrals and employee nondeductible contributions under this and all other plans of the employer for 6 months after receipt of the distribution.
		

		
			(3)Compensation – For this purpose, compensation means compensation as defined in Section 1.2(a) and (b) (subject to the limitations of Section 1.2(c)), but excluding short term disability benefits not paid through the employer's payroll system, expense reimbursements, and any form of non-cash 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries14

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		compensation.  The participant’s salary reduction election shall apply only to compensation that becomes currently available to the employee after the effective date of the election.  The employer shall apply the salary reduction election to all of the participant’s compensation (and to increases in compensation), unless the participant’s salary reduction election specifies that the election is to be limited to certain compensation.
		

		
			(4)Catch-Up Contributions – All employees who are eligible to make elective deferrals under this plan before the close of the plan year and who have attained age 50 or over by the end of their applicable taxable years shall be eligible to make catch-up contributions in accordance with, and subject to the limitations of, Section 5.5(a)(2).  The employer-imposed limitations on the maximum amount of permissible salary deferral shall not apply. 
		

		
			(c)Cash or Deferred Election
		

		
			No contribution shall be made under this plan pursuant to a cash or deferred election.  All elective deferrals shall be made under a salary deferral election.
		

		
			Section 3.4A – Roth Elective Deferral Contributions
		

		
			(a)Amount of Contribution – Effective April 1, 2016, the employer shall contribute each plan year on behalf of each active participant who elects a Roth elective deferral under Code section 402A a sum equal to the amount that the participant has elected to contribute as a Roth elective deferral pursuant to a salary reduction agreement.  The contribution shall be credited to the participant's Roth elective deferral account.
		

		
			Any limitations imposed under Section 3.4(a) on the amount of salary reduction that a participant may elect shall be applied to the sum of the elections made under Section 3.4 and this Section 3.4A.
		

		
			The plan administrator shall calculate the actual deferral percentage for the highly compensated employees as described in Section 3.4(a), taking into account any participant contributions made to the Roth elective deferral account.  Further, the Roth elective deferral account shall be included with the 401(k) elective deferral account for purposes of the actual deferral percentage and actual contribution percentage tests.  Unless specifically stated otherwise, Roth elective deferrals shall be treated as elective deferrals for all purposes under the plan.
		

		
			(b)Salary Reduction Election
		

		
			(1)Availability of Election – An active participant who is eligible to make 401(k) elective deferral contributions shall be eligible to designate all or a portion of his elective deferral contributions to be credited to his Roth elective deferral account.  Such designation shall be irrevocable.  The amount of Roth elective deferral together with any salary deferral made under Section 3.4 may range as provided under Section 3.4(b)(1).
		

		
			(2)Election Procedures – A notice of a participant's Roth deferral election shall be given to the employer and to the plan administrator in the manner as provided for 401(k) salary reduction elections under Section 3.4(b)(2).  The election may be made on the same form as the 401(k) salary reduction election but shall be a separate election.  The plan administrator shall provide a written notice to all participants of the required procedures for making an election and the date as of which an election will be effective.  An election shall be permitted at least once each plan year and the participants shall be permitted a reasonable time in which to make the election.  However, in no event shall such election be made or be effective before the adoption of the Roth elective deferral contribution provision under the plan, except as provided in relief granted by the Commissioner of Internal Revenue.  A participant electing Roth elective deferral account crediting for his salary reduction will be deemed to desire to continue at the same rate, unless he notifies the plan administrator of his desire to change such election.  The revised election shall be effective in accordance with the plan administrator's published procedures.  Roth elective deferral account crediting may be discontinued at any time upon proper notice in the manner established by the plan administrator.  The plan administrator and employer shall treat a salary reduction election as having been revoked by the participant upon his termination of employment or his ceasing to be a member of the eligible class of participants.
		

		
			As provided in Section 4.4, a participant who receives a hardship distribution shall be prohibited from making Roth elective deferrals under this and all other plans of the employer for 6 months after receipt of the distribution.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries15

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(3)Conditions – The participant's election to have contributions credited to his Roth elective deferral account shall apply only to compensation that becomes currently available to the employee after the effective date of the election.  The employer shall apply such election to the designated portion of the participant's compensation (and to increases in compensation), unless the participant's Roth deferral election specifies that the election is to be limited to certain compensation.
		

		
			(4)Accounting – Roth elective deferrals shall be credited only to the Roth elective deferral account.  Such contributions shall not be transferred to the 401(k) elective deferral account.  The plan administrator shall maintain an accounting of all participant contributions made thereto and withdrawals therefrom.  Investment results and other credits or charges shall be separately allocated on a reasonable and consistent basis to the Roth elective deferral account and the other accounts under the plan.  However, forfeitures may not be allocated to the Roth elective deferral account.
		

		
			Section 3.5 – Employee Nondeductible Contributions
		

		
			Employee nondeductible contributions are not permitted under this plan and no amount shall be credited to the employee nondeductible contribution account.
		

		
			Section 3.6 – Employer Matching Contributions
		

		
			Employer matching contributions shall be made under the provisions of this Section.  Such contributions shall be credited to the employer matching contribution account or the qualified employer matching contribution account, as applicable.  With respect to each interim allocation date, the employer shall contribute the amount necessary to fund the employer matching contribution allocation for the interim allocation period based on the eligible deferrals and participant compensation for such period.  
		

		
			Effective for plan years beginning prior to 2015, the plan administrator shall calculate the actual contribution percentage for the highly compensated employees using the testing method as provided under the prior statement of the plan document.
		

		
			Effective for plan years beginning on or after January 1, 2015, the plan administrator shall calculate the actual contribution percentage for the highly compensated employees using the prior year testing method.
		

		
			(a)Qualified Matching Contributions – The employer matching contribution shall not be treated as a qualified matching contribution.  A qualified matching contribution means matching contributions that are subject to the distribution and nonforfeitability requirements under Code section 401(k) when made.  A matching contribution must be a qualified matching contribution under Regulation section 1.401(k)-2(a)(6) in order to be taken into account under the ADP test.
		

		
			(b)Contributions Subject to Matching – Employer matching contributions shall be made for an eligible participant with respect to the following contributions:
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Any contributions made under a salary reduction agreement pursuant to Section 3.4

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Any Roth elective deferral contributions made pursuant to Section 3.4A

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Any catch-up contributions

		
			(c)Conditions for Allocation – A participant shall be eligible for an allocation of an employer matching contribution as of an allocation date, provided that he satisfies the following conditions:
		

		
			(1)He made a contribution that is subject to matching during the current plan year.
		

		
			AND
		

		
			(2)He completed at least one hour of service during the current allocation period.
		

		
			AND
		

		
			(3)Effective for allocations made after March 31, 2004, he is not a highly compensated employee who has held the title of chairman, vice chairman, president, or vice president with respect to the employer as of any day in the plan year on or before the allocation date.
		

		
			Notwithstanding the preceding requirements, any hours of service or employment requirement shall not apply in any plan year for which the employer elects to comply with the ACP safe harbor in years beginning after December 31, 1998.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries16

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(d)(1)Allocation Formula – The employer matching contribution and any applicable forfeitures shall be equal to the employer matching percentage applied to the participant’s contributions for each allocation period within the current plan year that are subject to matching.
		

		
			The employer matching percentage shall be determined each year by the employer in its own discretion.
		

		
			(2)Limitation on Total Matching Allocation – Notwithstanding the preceding allocation formula(s), an allocation shall not be made to an individual participant's account to the extent that when combined with any other employer matching contribution made to the participant's account for the plan year, it would exceed the greatest of:  (i) 5% of his compensation; (ii) his elective deferrals for the plan year; or (iii) the product of 2 times the sum of the plan’s representative matching rate (as defined in Section 5.5(c)(1)(A)(viii)) plus the participant’s elective deferrals for the plan year.  Such an excess allocation shall be reallocated among the remaining eligible participants.
		

		
			(3)Compensation – For purposes of the allocation of the employer matching contribution, compensation means compensation as defined in Section 1.2(a) and (b) (subject to the limitations of Section 1.2(c)) for the allocation period.  Compensation includable under Section 1.2(a) and (b) but not paid through payroll shall be treated as being paid as of the last day of the plan year or the last day of employment, if earlier.
		

		
			Compensation shall exclude any bonus payable to the participant.  Short term disability benefits not paid through the employer's payroll system, expense reimbursements, and any form of non-cash compensation shall not be taken into account for this purpose.
		

		
			(e)Forfeitures of Excess Aggregate Contributions
		

		
			Excess aggregate contributions that are determined under the actual contribution percentage test and that are attributed to employer matching contributions shall be distributed to the extent vested with a proportional amount of the nonvested employer matching contribution being forfeited as of the last day of the plan year in which the excess arose.  Also, any forfeitures required for compliance with Code section 401(a)(4) and Regulation section 1.401(m)-2(b)(3)(v)(B) (because the contribution to which it relates is treated as an excess deferral, excess contribution, or excess aggregate contribution) shall occur as of such date.  The forfeitures shall be treated in the manner described in Section 4.2(c)(2) for the following plan year.
		

		
			Section 3.7 – Rollover/Transfer Contributions
		

		
			(a)Rollover Contributions – An active participant may contribute to his rollover/transfer account any amounts that he previously received either as a lump sum distribution (as defined in Code section 402(e)(4)(D)) or within one taxable year as a distribution from another qualified plan on account of termination of that plan provided that:
		

		
			(1)He transferred such distribution to an individual retirement account or annuity within sixty (60) days after receipt, or
		

		
			(2)He transferred such distribution to this plan within sixty (60) days after receipt.
		

		
			Before accepting a rollover contribution, the trustee may require an employee to furnish satisfactory evidence that the proposed transfer is in fact a "rollover contribution" that the Code permits an employee to make to a qualified plan.  Effective for requests received on or after January 1, 2002, the acceptable sources for a rollover contribution shall be as set forth in Section 3.7(b).  Notwithstanding the preceding or the provisions of Section 3.7(b), this plan will not accept a rollover from a Roth elective deferral account.
		

		
			(b)Transfer Contributions – With the consent of the plan administrator, an active participant may have funds transferred directly to this plan from another qualified plan.  Consent shall not be given if the optional forms of payment to which the funds are subject under the prior plan are not properly disclosed by the prior plan or cannot be accommodated by this plan and trust.
		

		
			Further, this plan shall not accept any direct or indirect transfers from a defined benefit plan, money purchase plan (including a target benefit plan), stock bonus or profit sharing plan that would otherwise have provided for a life annuity form of payment to the participant.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries17

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		Effective for requests received on or after January 1, 2002, with the consent of the plan administrator, the participant may have the following transfers made on his behalf directly to this plan (or may make the following rollover contributions as permitted below):
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A direct rollover of an eligible rollover distribution from a qualified plan described in Code section 401(a) or 403(a), excluding after-tax employee contributions.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Effective for plan years beginning on or after April 1, 2016, a direct transfer from a Roth elective deferral account under a qualified Code section 401(a) plan shall be permitted, provided the plan administrator is provided with appropriate accounting information to maintain the accounting records required under Section 3.4A(b)(4).

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A direct rollover of an eligible rollover distribution from an annuity contract described in Code section 403(b), excluding after-tax employee contributions.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Effective on or after April 1, 2016, a direct transfer from a Roth elective deferral account under a qualified Code section 403(b) account shall be permitted, provided the plan administrator is provided with appropriate accounting information to maintain the accounting records required under Section 3.4A(b)(4).

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A direct rollover or a participant contribution of an eligible rollover distribution from an eligible plan under Code section 457(b) that is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision of a state.

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A participant rollover contribution of the portion of a distribution from an individual retirement account or annuity described in Code section 408(a) or 408(b) (including an account more specifically described under Code section 408(k) or (p)) that is eligible to be rolled over and would otherwise be includable in gross income.

		
			(c)Contributions Before Plan Entry Date – An employee, (who is in the eligible class of employees) prior to satisfying the plan’s eligibility conditions, may make a rollover or transfer contribution to the plan to the same extent and in the same manner as a participant.  If an employee makes a rollover or transfer contribution to the plan before satisfying the plan's eligibility conditions, the plan administrator and trustee will treat the employee as a participant for all purposes of the plan, except the employee is not a participant for purposes of making or sharing in contributions or forfeitures under the plan until he actually becomes a participant in the plan.  If the employee has a separation from service prior to becoming a participant, the trustee will distribute his rollover/transfer account to him.
		

		
			(d)Distribution – Withdrawals may be made from a rollover/transfer account under the terms and conditions set forth in Section 4.4.
		

		
			Section 3.8 – Allocation of Investment Results
		

		
			 (a)General Allocation Procedures
		

		
			Investment income and market value appreciation or depreciation shall be allocated to each account of each participant who has accrued benefits in proportion to the respective account balances on each accounting date.  For this purpose, each account balance shall be equal to the average balance for the period commencing on the day following the prior accounting date and ending on the current accounting date.
		

		
			 (b)Investment Elections
		

		
			A participant may elect to have all of his accounts invested in such investment fund or combination of investment funds as may be established by the trustee and made available for the benefit of participants; provided, however, that in no event may the participant direct that any portion of his account(s) be invested in collectibles (as defined in Code section 408(m)).  A participant's investment election shall not apply to any portion of any account that may be invested in a participant loan sub-account established under Section 4.4.  The investment results shall be allocated to the participant's account(s) based upon earnings and losses on the participant's share in such investment fund or funds.
		

		
			The terms and conditions for investment direction shall be established by the plan administrator.  An election may be revoked only by another election and will remain in effect until such revocation.  If a participant fails to make any investment election prior to an allocation to his account(s), the trustee shall invest his account(s) in a qualified default investment alternative selected for the purpose that complies 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries18

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		with the regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Labor under ERISA section 404(c)(5) until such time as the participant makes an affirmative investment election.
		

		
			 
		

		
			ARTICLE IV – PAYMENT OF PARTICIPANT ACCOUNTS
		

		
			Section 4.1 – Vesting Service Rules
		

		
			(a)Vesting Year of Service means a vesting computation period during which the employee completes at least 1,000 hours of service with the employer.  All of an employee's years of service with the employer shall be counted to determine the nonforfeitable percentage in the employee's account balance(s) derived from employer contributions, except:
		

		
			(1)Years of service disregarded under the break in service rules in Section 4.1(d) below.  (Post-ERISA break in service rules)
		

		
			(2)Years of service before the effective date of ERISA if such service would have been disregarded under the break in service rules of the prior plan in effect from time to time before such date.  For this purpose, break in service rules are rules that result in the loss of prior vesting or benefit accruals, or that deny an employee eligibility to participate, by reason of separation or failure to complete a required period of service within a specified period of time.  (Pre-ERISA break in service rules)
		

		
			(b)One Year Break in Service means for the purposes of this Article IV a vesting computation period during which the employee or former employee does not complete more than 500 hours of service with the employer.
		

		
			(c)Vesting Computation Period means the 12-consecutive-month period coinciding with the plan year.
		

		
			(d)Break in Service Rules
		

		
			(1)Vested Participant – A former participant who had a nonforfeitable right to all or a portion of his account balance(s) derived from employer contributions or who (effective for plan years beginning on or after January 1, 2006) had made an employee elective deferral contribution at the time of his termination from service shall retain credit for all vesting years of service prior to a break in service as that term is defined in Section 4.1(b).
		

		
			(2)Nonvested Participant or Employee – In the case of a former participant or employee who did not have any nonforfeitable right to his account balance(s) derived from employer contributions and who (effective for plan years beginning on or after January 1, 2006) had made no employee elective deferral contribution at the time of his termination from service, years of service before a period of consecutive one-year breaks in service shall not be taken into account in computing service if the number of consecutive one-year breaks in service in such period equals or exceeds the greater of 5 or the aggregate number of years of service before such breaks in service.  Such aggregate number of years of service shall not include any years of service disregarded under the preceding sentence by reason of prior breaks in service. 
		

		
			(3)Vesting for Pre-Break and Post-Break Accounts – In the case of a participant or employee who has five or more consecutive one-year breaks in service, all years of service after such breaks in service shall be disregarded for the purpose of vesting the employer-derived account balance(s) that accrued before such breaks in service.  Whether or not such pre-break service counts in vesting the post-break employer-derived account balance(s) shall be determined according to the rules set forth in Section 4.1(d)(1) and (2) above.  Separate accounts shall be maintained for each of the participant’s pre-break and post-break employer-derived account balance(s).  All accounts shall share in the investment earnings and losses of the fund.
		

		
			Section 4.2 – Vesting of Participant Accounts
		

		
			(a)Determination of Vesting
		

		
			(1)Normal Retirement – An employee's right to his account balance(s) shall be 100% vested and nonforfeitable upon the attainment of age 65, the normal retirement age.  The vesting of an inactive participant who terminates employment prior to normal retirement age shall remain subject to the 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries19

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		provisions of the vesting schedule following attainment of such specified age.  Distributions shall be administered in accordance with termination from employment provisions of Section 4.3(a)(3).
		

		
			(2)Late Retirement – If a participant remains employed after his normal retirement age, his account balance(s) shall remain 100% vested and nonforfeitable.  Such participant shall continue to receive allocations to his account as he did before his normal retirement age.
		

		
			(3)Early Retirement – In the case of a participant who has attained age 60 and completed 7 years of service before his normal retirement age, the participant's right to his account balance(s) shall be 100% vested and nonforfeitable.  Such participant may retire before his normal retirement age without the consent of the employer and receive payment of benefits from the plan.  If a participant separates from service before satisfying the age requirement for early retirement, but has satisfied the service requirement, the participant shall be entitled to elect an early retirement benefit upon satisfaction of such age requirement.
		

		
			(4)Disability – If a participant separates from service due to disability, such participant’s right to his account balance(s) as of his date of disability shall be 100% vested and nonforfeitable.  Disability means the participant has been determined by the Social Security Administration to be eligible for either full or partial Social Security disability benefits.
		

		
			(5)(A)Death – In the event of the death of a participant who has an accrued benefit under the plan (whether or not he is an active participant), 100% of the participant’s account balance(s) as of the date of death shall be paid to his surviving spouse; except that, if there is no surviving spouse, or if the surviving spouse has already consented in a manner that is (or conforms to) a qualified election under the joint and survivor annuity provisions of Code section 417(a) and regulations issued pursuant thereto and as set forth in Section 5.2, then such balance(s) shall be paid to the participant's designated beneficiary.  The payment options available to the beneficiary shall be those payment options available to the participant under Section 4.3(b).
		

		
			(B)Beneficiary Designation – Subject to the spousal consent requirements of Section 5.2, the participant shall have the right to designate his beneficiaries, including a contingent death beneficiary, and shall have the right at any time prior to his death to change such beneficiaries. The designation shall be effective only if made in writing on a form signed by the participant and supplied by and filed with the plan administrator prior to his death.  If the participant fails to designate a beneficiary, or if the designated person or persons predecease the participant, "beneficiary" shall mean: (a) the spouse, (b) if no surviving spouse, then to the surviving children in equal shares, (c) if no surviving children, then to the surviving parents in equal shares, (d) if no surviving parents, then to the surviving brothers and sisters in equal shares, (e) if no surviving brothers and sisters, then (f) to the participant’s estate if an estate is opened within 2 years of the participant’s death; and otherwise to a charity selected in the sole discretion of the plan administrator.
		

		
			If a designated beneficiary dies after the participant has died but before the plan has commenced or made distribution to the designated beneficiary, the plan shall be administered as set forth in this paragraph.  The death benefit will be paid to the beneficiary’s designated beneficiary, if any designated prior to such beneficiary’s death in connection with the beneficiary’s election of a form of payment of the participant’s death benefit to which he is entitled; and if no such designation is on file with the plan administrator, then to the beneficiary's estate in a single lump sum payment if an estate is opened within 2 years of the participant’s death; and otherwise to a charity selected in the sole discretion of the plan administrator.  If the deceased designated beneficiary was not the participant's surviving spouse, distribution under this paragraph will be completed by December 31 of the fifth year following the participant's date of death.  If the deceased designated beneficiary was the participant's surviving spouse, distribution under this paragraph will be completed by December 31 of the fifth year following the beneficiary's date of death.
		

		
			For purposes of this Section 4.2(a)(5), if a spouse or beneficiary of the participant dies simultaneously with the participant, the participant shall be deemed to be the survivor and to have died subsequent to such spouse or beneficiary.  Likewise, if a beneficiary named by a designated beneficiary dies simultaneously with a designated beneficiary, the designated beneficiary shall be deemed to be the survivor and to have died subsequent to the beneficiary named by the designated beneficiary. 
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries20

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		If a participant completes or has completed a beneficiary designation form in which the participant designates his spouse as the beneficiary and the participant and such spouse are legally divorced subsequent to the date of such designation; then, the designation shall be administered as if such spouse had predeceased the participant unless the participant, subsequent to the legal divorce, reaffirms the designation by completing a new beneficiary designation form.
		

		
			(6)Termination From Service – If a participant separates from the service of the employer other than by retirement, disability, or death, his vested interest in his accounts shall be equal to the account balance multiplied by the vesting percentage determined below:
		

		
			(A)Profit Sharing Account – The vesting percentage applicable to the participant’s profit sharing account shall be determined based on his vesting years of service as follows:
		

		
			 
		

			
					
						Years of Service

					
					
						 

					
					
						Vesting Percentage

				
	
					
						0–1 Year

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					0% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						2

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					20% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						3

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					40% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						4

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					60% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						5

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					80% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						6 or More Years

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					100% 
					
					
						 

				

		
			 
		

		
			Transition Rule – Notwithstanding the above vesting schedule, the vesting provisions of the plan before January 1, 2007, shall continue to apply to participants who do not have an hour of service on or after such date.
		

		
			(B)Employer Matching Contribution Account – The vesting percentage applicable to the participant's employer matching contribution account shall be determined as follows:
		

		
			 
		

			
					
						Years of Service

					
					
						 

					
					
						Vesting Percentage

				
	
					
						0–1 Year

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					0% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						2

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					20% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						3

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					40% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						4

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					60% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						5

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					80% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						6 or More Years

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					100% 
					
					
						 

				

		
			 
		

		
			Transition Rule – Notwithstanding the above vesting schedule, the vesting provisions of the plan before January 1, 2002, shall continue to apply to participants who do not have an hour of service on or after such date.
		

		
			(C)Other Accounts – The participant shall always be 100% vested in his following accounts:  employee 401(k) elective deferral account; employee nondeductible contribution account; qualified employer matching contribution account; qualified nonelective contribution account; Roth elective deferral account; rollover/transfer account.  The accrued benefit in such accounts shall be nonforfeitable.
		

		
			(b)Forfeitures
		

		
			(1)Time of Forfeiture – If a participant terminates employment before his account balances derived from employer contributions are fully vested, the nonvested portion of his accounts shall be forfeited on the earlier of:
		

		
			(A)The last day of the vesting computation period in which the participant first incurs five consecutive one-year breaks in service, or
		

		
			(B)The date the participant receives his entire vested accrued benefit.
		

		
			(2)Cashout Distributions and Restoration
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries21

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(A)Cashout Distribution – If an employee terminates service and the value of his vested account balances derived from employer and employee contributions are not greater than $5,000, the employee shall receive a distribution of the value of the entire vested portion of such account balances and the nonvested portion will be treated as a forfeiture.  If an employee would have received a distribution under the preceding sentence but for the fact that the employee's vested account balances exceeded $5,000 when the employee terminated service and if at a later time such account balances are reduced such that they are not greater than $5,000, the employee will receive a distribution of such account balance and the nonvested portion will be treated as a forfeiture.  For purposes of this section, if the value of an employee's vested account balances is zero, he shall be deemed to have received a distribution of such vested account balances.  For the purpose of determining the value of a participant's vested account balance, prior distributions shall be disregarded if distributions have not commenced under an optional form of payment described in Section 4.3.
		

		
			If an employee terminates service and elects, in accordance with the requirements of Section 4.3, to receive the value of his vested account balances, the nonvested portion shall be treated as a forfeiture as of the date of distribution.  If the employee elects to have distributed less than the entire vested portion of the account balances derived from employer contributions, the part of the nonvested portion that will be treated as a forfeiture is the total nonvested portion multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the amount of the distribution attributable to employer contributions and the denominator of which is the total value of the vested employer derived account balances.
		

		
			(B)Restoration of Accounts – If an employee receives a cashout distribution pursuant to this section and resumes employment covered under this plan before he incurs five consecutive one-year breaks in service, his employer-derived account balances shall each be restored to the amount on the date of distribution, if he repays to the plan the full amount of the distribution attributable to employer contributions before the earlier of five years after the first date on which he is subsequently re-employed by the employer, or the date he incurs five consecutive one-year breaks in service following the date of the distribution.  If an employee is deemed to receive a distribution pursuant to this Section 4.2(b)(2), and he resumes employment covered under this plan before he incurs five consecutive one-year breaks in service, upon the re-employment of such employee his employer-derived account balances will be restored to the amount on the date of such deemed distribution.
		

		
			Any amount required to restore such forfeitures shall be deducted from forfeitures (including forfeitures of excess aggregate contributions) occurring in the plan year of restoration.  If forfeitures are insufficient for the restoration, the employer may make a contribution to the plan for such plan year to satisfy the restoration.  However, by the end of the plan year following the plan year of restoration, sufficient forfeitures or employer contributions shall be credited to the account to satisfy the restoration.
		

		
			(c)Disposition of Forfeitures
		

		
			(1)Profit Sharing Account – Forfeitures from profit sharing accounts shall be reallocated among the eligible active participants at the end of the plan year in which such forfeitures occur in accordance with the allocation procedures set forth in Section 3.2.
		

		
			(2)Employer Matching Contribution Account – Forfeitures of employer matching contribution accounts first shall be used to reduce administrative expenses; any remaining forfeitures shall be used to reduce the next employer matching contribution to which the employer has commited itself whether for the current plan year or the immediately following plan year.  
		

		
			(d)Withdrawal of Employee Nondeductible Contributions – No forfeitures shall occur solely as a result of an employee's withdrawal of employee nondeductible contributions.
		

		
			(e)Unclaimed Benefits
		

		
			(1)Forfeiture – The plan does not require the trustee or the plan administrator to search for, or to ascertain the whereabouts of, any participant or beneficiary.  At the time the participant's or beneficiary's benefit becomes distributable under the plan, the plan administrator, by certified or registered mail addressed to his last known address of record, shall notify any participant or beneficiary that he is entitled to a distribution under this plan.  If the participant or beneficiary fails to 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries22

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		claim his distributive share or make his whereabouts known in writing to the plan administrator within twelve months from the date of mailing of the notice, the plan administrator shall treat the participant's or beneficiary's unclaimed payable accrued benefit as forfeited and shall reallocate such forfeiture in accordance with Section 4.2(c).  A forfeiture under this paragraph shall occur at the end of the notice period or, if later, the earliest date applicable Treasury regulations would permit the forfeiture.  These forfeiture provisions apply solely to the participant’s or beneficiary’s accrued benefit derived from employer contributions.
		

		
			(2)Restoration – If a participant or beneficiary who has incurred a forfeiture of his accrued benefit under the provisions of this Section 4.2(e) makes a claim, at any time, for his forfeited accrued benefit, the plan administrator shall restore the participant's or beneficiary's forfeited accrued benefit to the same dollar amount as the dollar amount of the accrued benefit forfeited, unadjusted for any gains or losses occurring after the date of the forfeiture.  During the plan year in which the participant or beneficiary makes the claim, the plan administrator shall make the restoration from forfeitures occurring in that plan year.  If forfeitures are insufficient for the restoration, the employer shall make a contribution to the plan to satisfy the restoration.  The plan administrator shall direct the trustee to distribute the participant's or beneficiary's restored accrued benefit to him not later than 60 days after the close of the plan year in which the plan administrator restores the forfeited accrued benefit.
		

		
			Section 4.3 – Payment of Participant Accounts
		

		
			(a)Time of Payment
		

		
			(1)Commencement of Benefits – Unless the participant elects otherwise, distribution of benefits shall begin no later than the 60th day after the latest of the close of the plan year in which:
		

		
			(A)The participant attains age 65 (or normal retirement age, if earlier);
		

		
			(B)Occurs the 10th anniversary of the year in which the participant commenced participation in the plan; or
		

		
			(C)The participant terminates service with the employer (i.e. late retirement).
		

		
			(2)Payment Upon Retirement, Disability, or Death – Subject to the provisions set forth in Section 4.3(a)(1), in the Joint and Survivor Requirements of Section 5.2, and in the Distribution Requirements of Section 5.3, if the participant terminates employment due to retirement, disability, or death, his account(s) shall be paid as soon as administratively possible after the occurrence of the event creating the right to a distribution.
		

		
			(3)Payment Upon Other Termination of Employment – Subject to the provisions set forth in Section 4.3(a)(1) and in the Distribution Requirements of Section 5.3, if the participant terminates employment other than by retirement, disability, or death, his account(s) shall be paid as soon as administratively possible after the date of severance of employment.
		

		
			Notwithstanding the preceding, an alternate payee may elect to have paid the amount determined under the qualified domestic relations order as soon as administratively possible following the date permitted under Section 4.5.
		

		
			(4)Notwithstanding the foregoing, the failure of a participant (and spouse where the spouse's consent is required) to consent to a distribution while a benefit is immediately distributable, within the meaning of Section 5.2(a), shall be deemed to be an election to defer commencement of payment of any benefit sufficient to satisfy this section.
		

		
			(b)Form of Payment – A participant or beneficiary may elect to receive distribution of his account(s) as a lump sum benefit payment.  The participant or beneficiary shall file a written request for benefits with the plan administrator before payment will be made.  The lump sum benefit payment shall be made in cash from the fund.  If the vested accrued benefit is no more than $5,000, benefits shall automatically be paid in a lump sum in accordance with Section 4.3(d)(5).
		

		
			Effective solely for distributions made before October 1, 2009, a participant was permitted to elect installment payments over a period of years that meets the Distribution Requirements of Section 5.3.  Installment payments may be made in cash from the fund or by distribution of an annuity term certain contract.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries23

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		If a distribution is required under the Distribution Requirements of Section 5.3, the participant fails to elect payment, and the vested balance of the account(s) exceeds $5,000, the trustee shall pay the benefit in installment payments that meet the requirements of Section 5.3 over the joint life and last survivor expectancy of the participant and his designated beneficiary.  If the vested balance of the account(s) does not exceed $5,000, the trustee shall distribute the entire account balance in a lump sum.
		

		
			(c)General Payment Provisions
		

		
			(1)All distributions due to be made under this plan shall be made on the basis of the amount to the credit of the participant as of the accounting date coincident with or immediately preceding the occurrence of the event calling for a distribution.
		

		
			If a distributable event occurs after an allocation date and before allocations have been made to the account of the participant, the distribution shall also include the amounts allocable to the account as of such allocation date.
		

		
			(2)If any person entitled to receive benefits hereunder is physically or mentally incapable of receiving or acknowledging receipt thereof, and if a legal guardian or power of attorney has been appointed for him, the plan administrator may direct the benefit payment to be made to such legal representative.  The plan administrator may cause benefits to be paid to any other individual recognized by the state law under which the plan trust has been established.
		

		
			In the event a distribution is to be made to a minor beneficiary, then the plan administrator may direct that such distribution be paid to the legal guardian, or if none, to a parent of such beneficiary or a responsible adult with whom the beneficiary maintains his residence, or to the custodian for such beneficiary under the Uniform Gift to Minors Act or the Gift to Minors Act, if such is permitted by the laws of the state in which said beneficiary resides.  Such a payment to the legal guardian, custodian or parent of a minor beneficiary shall fully discharge the trustee, employer, plan administrator, and plan from further liability on account thereof.
		

		
			(3)Each optional form of benefit provided under the plan shall be made available to all participants on a nondiscriminatory basis.  The plan may not retroactively reduce or eliminate optional forms of benefits and any other Code section 411(d)(6) protected benefits, except as provided in Regulation section 1.411(d)‐4, Q&A‐2(b) and in other relief granted statutorily or by the Commissioner of Internal Revenue.
		

		
			(4)The participant's election of a form of benefit payment shall be irrevocable as of the annuity starting date, subject to the notice requirements contained in Section 4.3(e).  For purposes of accounting, an installment distribution shall be debited from each of a participant's accounts on a pro rata basis.
		

		
			(d)Eligible Rollover Distributions
		

		
			A distributee may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the plan administrator, to have any portion of an eligible rollover distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the distributee in a direct rollover.
		

		
			(1)Eligible Rollover Distribution – An eligible rollover distribution is any distribution of all or any portion of the balance to the credit of the distributee, except that an eligible rollover distribution does not include:  any distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the distributee or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of the distributee and the distributee's designated beneficiary, or for a specified period of ten years or more; any distribution to the extent such distribution is required under Code section 401(a)(9) including any portion of such distribution that is not includable in gross income (determined without regard to the exclusion for net unrealized appreciation with respect to employer securities); any hardship withdrawal; any timely withdrawal of an automatic salary reduction contribution made on or after January 1, 2008 from a participant's elective deferral account(s); and any other distribution(s) that is reasonably expected to total less than $200 during a year.  For purposes of the $200 rule, a distribution from a designated Roth account and a distribution from other accounts under the plan are treated as made under separate plans.
		

		
			A portion of a distribution shall not fail to be an eligible rollover distribution merely because the portion consists of after-tax employee contributions that are not includable in gross income.  However, such portion may be transferred only to:  (A) a traditional individual retirement account or annuity described in Code section 408(a) or (b) (traditional IRA) or, effective for distributions on or after 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries24

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		January 1, 2008, a Roth individual retirement account or annuity described in Code section 408A (Roth IRA); or (B) a qualified plan or an annuity contract described in Code section 401(a) and 403(b), respectively, that agrees to separately account for amounts so transferred (and earnings thereon), including separately accounting for the portion of such distribution that is includible in gross income and the portion of such distribution that is not so includible.
		

		
			(2)Eligible Retirement Plan – An eligible retirement plan is a traditional IRA, a Roth IRA (effective January 1, 2008), an annuity plan described in Code section 403(a), an annuity contract described in Code section 403(b), a qualified plan described in Code section 401(a), that accepts the distributee's eligible rollover distribution, or an eligible plan under Code section 457(b) that is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision of a state and that agrees to separately account for amounts transferred into such plan from this plan.  The definition of eligible retirement plan shall also apply in the case of a distribution to a surviving spouse, or to a spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, as defined in Code section 414(p).
		

		
			If any portion of an eligible rollover distribution is attributable to payments or distributions from a designated Roth account, an eligible retirement plan with respect to such portion shall include only a designated Roth account or a Roth IRA.
		

		
			(3)Distributee – A distributee includes an employee or former employee.  The employee's or former employee's surviving spouse and the employee's or former employee's spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, as defined in Code section 414(p), are distributees with regard to the interest of the spouse or former spouse.  For distributions after December 31, 2006, a distributee shall include a nonspouse beneficiary but only with respect to a direct transfer to an inherited traditional or Roth IRA established on his behalf for the purpose of receiving the distribution.
		

		
			(4)Direct Rollover – A direct rollover is a payment by the plan to the eligible retirement plan specified by the distributee.
		

		
			(5)Automatic Rollovers – In the event of a mandatory distribution greater than $1,000 in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.2(b)(2)(A), if the participant does not elect to have such distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the participant in a direct rollover or to receive the distribution directly in accordance with Section 4.3(e), then the plan administrator shall pay the distribution in a direct rollover to an individual retirement plan designated by the plan administrator.  For purposes of determining whether a mandatory distribution is greater than $1,000, the portion of the participant’s distribution attributable to any rollover contribution shall be included.
		

		
			(e)Payment Election Procedures
		

		
			As described in Section 5.2(a), an account balance in excess of $5,000 shall not be immediately distributed without the consent of the participant.  The participant shall receive the notice required under Regulation section 1.411(a)-11(c) no less than 30 days and no more than 180 days before the annuity starting date with respect to the distribution.  The written explanation shall include a description of the consequences of failing to defer receipt of the distribution.  For any distribution in excess of $200, the plan administrator shall give the participant notice of his eligible rollover distribution rights.  The participant shall receive such notice in the same time period as the 411 notice is required to be provided.  If a distribution is one to which Code sections 401(a)(11) and 417 do not apply, such distribution may commence less than 30 days after the 411 notice is given, provided that:
		

		
			(1)The plan administrator clearly informs the participant that the participant has a right to a period of at least 30 days after receiving the notice to consider the decision of whether or not to elect a distribution (and, if applicable, a particular distribution option), and
		

		
			(2)The participant, after receiving the notice, affirmatively elects a distribution.
		

		
			In the event of a mandatory distribution greater than $1,000 in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.2(b)(2)(A), if the participant does not elect to have such distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the participant in a direct rollover or to receive the distribution directly in accordance with Section 4.3(d), then the plan administrator will pay the distribution in a direct rollover to an individual retirement plan designated by the plan administrator.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries25

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		For purposes of determining whether there will be a mandatory distribution from the plan, if either the Roth elective deferral account or the total of the participant's other accounts exceeds $1,000, no mandatory distribution will be made.  If the Roth elective deferral account alone is $1,000 or less and the participant's other accounts on their own total $1,000 or less, then a mandatory distribution will be made of all of the participant's accounts.
		

		
			Section 4.4 – In-Service Payments
		

		
			(a)Withdrawals – An employee may withdraw amounts from his account(s) before his separation from service only under the circumstances and only to the extent provided below.
		

		
			The plan administrator shall approve requests on a nondiscriminatory basis.  No forfeitures shall occur solely as a result of a participant's withdrawal of employee contributions.  The in-service receipt of benefits by an employee shall not affect his participation in the plan, and such participant shall continue to receive allocations to his account(s).
		

		
			Distribution After Attainment of Age 591⁄2 – An employee may elect to receive payment of benefits from his account(s) at any time after he attains age 591⁄2 by filing a written request with the plan administrator, but only to the extent that he is fully vested in the particular account.  For purposes of accounting, a partial distribution shall be debited from each of a participant's accounts on a pro rata basis.
		

		
			Withdrawals from Employer Accounts
		

		
			(A)Availability of Withdrawal Privilege – Subject to the limitations and conditions set forth herein, an employee who has completed at least 5 years of participation in the plan and has attained age 55 may request a transfer in one lump sum from his profit sharing account to an individual retirement account, but only to the extent that he is fully vested in his profit sharing account.
		

		
			(B)Amount of Withdrawal – The amount that an eligible participant may withdraw from an account shall not exceed the vested portion of such account.
		

		
			(C)Request for Withdrawal – The participant's request to withdraw shall be made in writing to the plan administrator.  The plan administrator shall approve requests on a nondiscriminatory basis.
		

		
			Hardship Withdrawals from Employee 401(k) Elective Deferral Account
		

		
			(A)Availability of Withdrawal Privilege – An employee who has a financial hardship may request a lump sum withdrawal from his employee 401(k) elective deferral account, subject to the limitations and conditions set forth herein.
		

		
			(B)Amount of Withdrawal – The amount that an eligible participant may withdraw from his account shall not exceed the cumulative amount of his 401(k) salary deferral contributions.  Earnings thereon may not be withdrawn.
		

		
			(C)Request for Withdrawal – The participant's request to withdraw must be made in writing to the plan administrator and shall be subject to his consent.  The basis for the plan administrator's consenting to or refusing to consent to the participant’s request shall be demonstrated financial hardship of the participant as described in Hardship Withdrawals.
		

		
			Hardship Withdrawals from Roth Elective Deferral Account
		

		
			(A)Availability of Withdrawal Privilege – An employee who has a financial hardship may request a lump sum withdrawal from his Roth elective deferral account, subject to the limitations and conditions set forth herein.
		

		
			(B)Amount of Withdrawal – The amount that an eligible participant may withdraw from his account shall not exceed the cumulative amount of his Roth elective deferral contributions.  Earnings thereon may not be withdrawn.
		

		
			(C)Request for Withdrawal – The participant's request to withdraw must be made in writing to the plan administrator and shall be subject to his consent.  The basis for the plan administrator's consenting to or refusing to consent to the participant's request shall be demonstrated financial hardship of the participant as described in Hardship Withdrawals.
		

		
			Hardship Withdrawals
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries26

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		For the purpose of this Section 4.4, a distribution will be made on account of hardship if the distribution is necessary in light of the immediate and heavy financial need of the employee.  A distribution based upon financial hardship cannot exceed the amount required to meet the immediate financial need created by the hardship and not reasonably available from other resources of the participant.  The determination of the existence of financial hardship and the amount required to be distributed to meet the need created by the hardship must be made in accordance with uniform and nondiscriminatory standards established by the plan administrator under these plan provisions.
		

		
			An immediate and heavy financial need shall be deemed to exist if the distribution is requested for one of the following reasons:  (1) expenses incurred or necessary for medical care as described in Code section 213(d) of the employee, the employee's spouse, children, dependents, or beneficiary(ies); (2) the purchase (excluding mortgage payments) of a principal residence for the employee; (3) payment of tuition and related educational fees for up to the next twelve months of post-secondary education for the employee, the employee's spouse, children, dependents, or beneficiary(ies); (4) payments necessary to prevent the eviction of the employee from, or a foreclosure on the mortgage of, the employee's principal residence; (5) payments for funeral or burial expenses for the employee's deceased parent, spouse, child, dependent, or beneficiary; or (6) expenses incurred to repair damage to the employee's principal residence that would qualify for a casualty loss deduction under Code section 165 (determined without regard to whether the loss exceeds 10% of adjusted gross income).  For this purpose beneficiary shall mean the individual(s) designated by the participant as his primary beneficiary on his most recent beneficiary designation.
		

		
			A distribution will be considered as necessary to satisfy an immediate and heavy financial need of the employee only if:
		

		
			1.The employee has obtained all distributions, other than hardship distributions, and all nontaxable loans under all plans maintained by the employer;
		

		
			2.All plans maintained by the employer provide that the employee's elective deferrals (and employee nondeductible contributions) will be suspended for 6 months after the receipt of the hardship distribution; and
		

		
			3.The distribution is not in excess of the amount of the immediate and heavy financial need (including amounts necessary to pay any federal, state or local income taxes or penalties reasonably anticipated to result from the distribution).
		

		
			Determination of Vested Account Balance
		

		
			If a withdrawal is made at a time when a participant has a nonforfeitable right to less than the entire account balance derived from employer contributions and the participant may increase his nonforfeitable percentage in his account:
		

		
			(A)A separate account will be established with respect to each of the participant's accounts that is subject to a vesting schedule that shall be credited with the participant's interest in such account as of the time of the distribution, and
		

		
			(B)At any relevant time the participant's nonforfeitable portion of each such separate account will be equal to an amount ("X") determined by the formula:
		

		
			X = P(AB + (R x D)) – (R x D)
		

		
			For purposes of applying the formula:  P is the nonforfeitable percentage at the relevant time, AB is the account balance at the relevant time, D is the amount of the distribution from the relevant account, and R is the ratio of the account balance at the relevant time to the account balance after distribution.
		

		
			(b)Participant Loans
		

		
			No participant loans shall be permitted under this plan.
		

		
			Section 4.5 – Distributions Under Domestic Relations Orders
		

		
			Nothing contained in this plan prevents the trustee, in accordance with the direction of the plan administrator, from complying with the provisions of a qualified domestic relations order (as defined in Code section 414(p)).
		

		
			A distribution will not be made to an alternate payee until the participant attains (or would have attained) his earliest retirement age.  For this purpose, earliest retirement age means the earlier of:  (1) the date on which 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries27

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		the participant is entitled to a distribution under this plan; or (2) the later of the date the participant attains age 50 or the earliest date on which the participant could begin receiving benefits under this plan if the participant separated from service.
		

		
			Nothing in this Section gives a participant a right to receive distribution at a time otherwise not permitted under the plan nor does it permit the alternate payee to receive a form of payment not otherwise permitted under the plan.
		

		
			The plan administrator shall establish reasonable procedures to determine the qualified status of a domestic relations order.  Upon receiving a domestic relations order, the plan administrator promptly will notify the participant and any alternate payee named in the order, in writing, of the receipt of the order and the plan's procedures for determining the qualified status of the order.  Within a reasonable period of time after receiving the domestic relations order, the plan administrator shall determine the qualified status of the order and shall notify the participant and each alternate payee, in writing, of his determination.  The plan administrator shall provide notice under this paragraph by mailing to the individual's address specified in the domestic relations order, or in a manner consistent with Department of Labor regulations.
		

		
			If any portion of the participant's nonforfeitable accrued benefit is payable during the period the plan administrator is making his determination of the qualified status of the domestic relations order, the plan administrator shall make a separate accounting of the amounts payable.  If the plan administrator determines the order is a qualified domestic relations order within 18 months of the date amounts first are payable following receipt of the order, it shall direct the trustee to distribute the payable amounts in accordance with the order.  If the plan administrator does not make his determination of the qualified status of the order within the 18-month determination period, it shall direct the trustee to distribute the payable amounts in the manner the plan would distribute if the order did not exist and shall apply the order prospectively if it later determines the order is a qualified domestic relations order. 
		

		
			 
		

		
			ARTICLE V – ADDITIONAL QUALIFICATION RULES
		

		
			Section 5.1 – Limitations on Allocations Under Code Section 415
		

		
			(a)Single Plan Limitations
		

		
			(1)If the participant does not participate in, and has never participated in another qualified plan maintained by the employer, or a welfare benefit fund (as defined in Code section 419(e)) maintained by the employer, or an individual medical account (as defined in Code section 415(l)(2)) maintained by the employer, or a simplified employee pension (as defined in Code section 408(k)) maintained by the employer, that provides an annual addition as defined in Section 5.1(c)(1), the amount of annual additions that may be credited to the participant's account for any limitation year will not exceed the lesser of the maximum permissible amount or any other limitation contained in this plan.  If the employer contribution that would otherwise be contributed or allocated to the participant's account would cause the annual additions for the limitation year to exceed the maximum permissible amount, the amount contributed or allocated will be reduced so that the annual additions for the limitation year will equal the maximum permissible amount.
		

		
			(2)Prior to determining the participant's actual compensation for the limitation year, the employer may determine the maximum permissible amount for a participant on the basis of a reasonable estimation of the participant's compensation for the limitation year, uniformly determined for all participants similarly situated.
		

		
			(3)As soon as is administratively feasible after the end of the limitation year, the maximum permissible amount for the limitation year will be determined on the basis of the participant's actual compensation for the limitation year.
		

		
			(4)If a participant elects to make employee nondeductible contributions or elective deferrals that together with any contribution the employer is obligated to make under the terms of this plan (including pursuant to any published discretionary contribution) would otherwise cause the annual additions for the limitation year to exceed the maximum permissible amount, the contribution election of the participant shall be limited before any employer contribution is reduced so that the annual additions for the limitation year will equal the maximum permissible amount.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries28

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(b)Combined Limitations – Other Defined Contribution Plan
		

		
			(1)This Section 5.1(b) applies if, in addition to this plan, the participant is covered under another qualified defined contribution plan maintained by the employer, a welfare benefit fund maintained by the employer, an individual medical account maintained by the employer, or a simplified employee pension maintained by the employer, that provides an annual addition as defined in Section 5.1(c)(1), during any limitation year.  The annual additions that may be credited to a participant's account under this plan for any such limitation year will not exceed the maximum permissible amount reduced by the annual additions credited to a participant's account under the other qualified defined contribution plans, welfare benefit funds, individual medical accounts, and simplified employee pensions for the same limitation year.  If the annual additions with respect to the participant under other qualified defined contribution plans, welfare benefit funds, individual medical accounts, and simplified employee pensions maintained by the employer are less than the maximum permissible amount and the employer contribution that would otherwise be contributed or allocated to the participant's account under this plan would cause the annual additions for the limitation year to exceed this limitation, the amount contributed or allocated will be reduced so that the annual additions under all such plans and funds for the limitation year will equal the maximum permissible amount.  If the annual additions with respect to the participant under such other qualified defined contribution plans, welfare benefit funds, individual medical accounts, and simplified employee pensions in the aggregate are equal to or greater than the maximum permissible amount, no amount will be contributed or allocated to the participant's account under this plan for the limitation year.
		

		
			(2)Prior to determining the participant's actual compensation for the limitation year, the employer may determine the maximum permissible amount for a participant in the manner described in Section 5.1(a)(2).
		

		
			(3)As soon as is administratively feasible after the end of the limitation year, the maximum permissible amount for the limitation year will be determined on the basis of the participant's actual compensation for the limitation year.
		

		
			(4)If, pursuant to Section 5.1(b)(3) or as a result of the allocation of forfeitures, a participant's annual additions under this plan and such other plans would result in an excess amount for a limitation year, the excess amount will be deemed to consist of the annual additions last allocated, except that annual additions attributable to a simplified employee pension will be deemed to have been allocated first, followed by annual additions to a welfare benefit fund or individual medical account, regardless of the actual allocation date.
		

		
			(5)If an allocation date of this plan coincides with an allocation date of another plan and the employee or employer contribution that would otherwise be contributed or allocated to a participant's account under the plans would cause the annual additions for the limitation year to exceed the maximum permissible amount, Section 3.1(c) shall control which contribution or allocation will be reduced so that the annual additions for the limitation year will equal the maximum permissible amount.
		

		
			(c)Definitions (Code Section 415 Limitations)
		

		
			(1)Annual Additions – The sum of the following amounts credited to a participant's account for the limitation year:  (A) employer contributions; (B) employee contributions (excluding catch-up contributions made in accordance with Code section 414(v)); (C) forfeitures; (D) amounts allocated to an individual medical account (as defined in Code section 415(l)(2)), that is part of a pension or annuity plan maintained by the employer are treated as annual additions to a defined contribution plan; and (E) allocations under a simplified employee pension.  Also, amounts derived from contributions paid or accrued that are attributable to postretirement medical benefits allocated to the separate account of a key employee (as defined in Code section 419A(d)(3)) under a welfare benefit fund (as defined in Code section 419(e)) maintained by the employer are treated as annual additions to a defined contribution plan.
		

		
			For this purpose, any excess amount applied under Section 5.1(a)(4) or (b)(6) in the limitation year to increase the accounts of participants who did not have an excess amount or to reduce employer contributions will be considered annual additions for such limitation year.
		

		
			Restorative payments allocated to a participant’s account including restorative payments made pursuant to Section 4.2(b)(2)(B) and payments made to restore losses to the plan resulting from actions (or a failure to act) by a fiduciary for which there is a reasonable risk of liability under ERISA 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries29

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		or under other applicable federal or state law (where similarly situated participants are treated similarly) shall not give rise to an annual addition for any limitation year.
		

		
			(2)Compensation – A participant's earned income and any earnings reportable as W-2 wages for federal income tax withholding purposes that are paid by the employer.  W-2 wages means wages as defined in Code section 3401(a) but determined without regard to any rules that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in Code section 3401(a)(2)).
		

		
			For purposes of applying the limitations of this Section 5.1, compensation for a limitation year is the compensation actually paid or includable in gross income during such limitation year.  Compensation for a limitation year shall include amounts earned but not paid during the limitation year solely because of the timing of pay periods and pay dates, provided the amounts are paid during the first few weeks of the next limitation year, the amounts are included on a uniform and consistent basis with respect to all similarly situated employees, and no compensation is included in more than one limitation year.
		

		
			Back pay, within the meaning of Regulation section 1.415(c)-2(g)(8), shall be treated as compensation for the limitation year to which the back pay relates to the extent the back pay represents wages and compensation that would otherwise be included under this definition.
		

		
			Compensation in excess of the limitations of Section 1.2(c) shall not be taken into account.  In order to be taken into account for a limitation year, compensation must be paid or treated as paid prior to severance from employment with the employer.  Effective for limitation years beginning on or after July 1, 2007, an includable payment shall be treated as paid prior to severance from employment if it is paid by the later of 21⁄2 months after severance or the last day of the limitation year that includes the severance date.  For this purpose, includable payments are those that absent the severance would have been paid and are regular compensation for services during regular working hours or outside working hours (such as overtime or shift differentials), commissions, bonuses, or other similar compensation.  Includable payments shall also include accrued sick, vacation, or other leave if such payments would have been included in compensation as defined in Section 1.2 if they were paid prior to the employee's severance from employment.
		

		
			For limitation years beginning after December 31, 2008, compensation for a limitation year shall include amounts paid as differential wages to a participant on qualified military service leave of more than 30 days and otherwise meeting the requirements of Code section 3401(h)(2).
		

		
			Compensation shall include elective contributions as defined in Section 1.2(a) and elective contributions under a Code section 501(c)(18) plan.  Elective contribution amounts under a cafeteria plan excludable under Code section 125 shall include any amounts not available to a participant in cash in lieu of group health coverage solely because the participant is unable to certify that he has other health coverage (deemed section 125 compensation).  Amounts are deemed section 125 compensation only if the employer does not request or collect information regarding the participant's other health coverage as part of the enrollment process for the health plan.
		

		
			Notwithstanding the preceding, compensation for a participant who is permanently and totally disabled (as defined in Code section 22(e)(3)) is the compensation such participant would have received for the limitation year if the participant had been paid at the rate of compensation paid immediately before becoming permanently and totally disabled; such imputed compensation for the disabled participant may be taken into account only if contributions made on behalf of such participant are nonforfeitable when made.
		

		
			(3)Defined Contribution Dollar Limitation – $40,000, as adjusted under Code section 415(d).
		

		
			(4)Employer – For purposes of this Section 5.1, employer shall mean the employer as defined in Section 1.5(b) but including all members of a controlled group of corporations as defined in Code section 414(b) as modified by Code section 415(h) and all commonly controlled trades or businesses as defined in Code section 414(c) as modified by Code section 415(h).
		

		
			(5)Excess Amount – The excess of the participant's annual additions for the limitation year over the maximum permissible amount.
		

		
			(6)Limitation Year – The 12-consecutive-month period defined in Section 1.3(f).  All qualified defined contribution plans maintained by the employer must use the same limitation year.  If the limitation 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries30

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		year is amended to a different 12-consecutive-month period, the new limitation year must begin on a date within the limitation year in which the amendment is made.
		

		
			(7)Maximum Permissible Amount – Except to the extent permitted under Section 3.4(b) and Code section 414(v), if applicable, the maximum annual addition that may be contributed or allocated to a participant's account under the plan for any limitation year shall not exceed the lesser of:
		

		
			(A)the defined contribution dollar limitation as defined in Section 5.1(c)(3); or
		

		
			(B)100% of the participant's compensation for the limitation year.
		

		
			The compensation limitation referred to in (B) shall not apply to any contribution for medical benefits after separation from service (within the meaning of Code section 401(h) or Code section 419A(f)(2)) that is otherwise treated as an annual addition under Code section 415(l)(1) or 419A(d)(2).
		

		
			If a short limitation year is created because of an amendment changing the limitation year to a different 12-consecutive-month period, the maximum permissible amount will not exceed the defined contribution dollar limitation multiplied by the following fraction:
		

		
			Number of months in the short limitation year
		

		
			12
		

		
			If the plan is terminated as of a date other than the last day of the limitation year, the plan shall be deemed to have been amended to change its limitation year and the maximum permissible amount shall be determined by prorating it for the resulting short limitation year.
		

		
			Section 5.2 – Joint and Survivor Annuity Requirements
		

		
			No annuity form of payment is provided under Section 4.3(b) and no direct or indirect transfer is accepted under Section 3.7 from a defined benefit plan, money purchase pension plan (including a target benefit plan), stock bonus or profit sharing plan that would otherwise have provided for a life annuity form of payment to any participant; therefore, the joint and survivor annuity requirements of Code section 401(a)(11) and 417 shall not apply to this plan, except as provided in this Section 5.2.
		

		
			(a)Restrictions on Immediate Distributions – If the value of a participant's vested account balance derived from employer and employee contributions exceeds $5,000 and the account balance is immediately distributable, the participant (or where the participant has died, the participant's spouse) must consent to any distribution of such account balance.  For the purpose of determining the value of a participant's vested account balance, prior distributions shall be disregarded if distributions have not commenced under an optional form of payment described in Section 4.3.  The consent of the participant (or the participant's surviving spouse) shall be obtained in writing within the 180‐day period ending on the annuity starting date.  The annuity starting date is the first day of the first period for which an amount is paid in any form.  The plan administrator shall notify the participant (or the participant's surviving spouse) of the right to defer any distribution until the participant's account balance is no longer immediately distributable and the consequences of failing to defer any distribution, as required by Regulation section 1.417(a)(3)-1.  Such notification shall include a general description of the material features, and an explanation of the relative values of, the optional forms of benefit available under the plan in a manner that would satisfy the notice requirements of Code section 417(a)(3), and a description of the consequences of failing to defer any distribution, and shall be provided no less than 30 days and no more than 180 days prior to the annuity starting date.  However, distribution may commence less than 30 days after the notice described in the preceding sentence is given, provided the distribution is one to which Code sections 401(a)(11) and 417 do not apply, the plan administrator clearly informs the participant that the participant has a right to a period of at least 30 days after receiving the notice to consider the decision of whether or not to elect a distribution (and, if applicable, a particular distribution option), and the participant, after receiving the notice, affirmatively elects a distribution.
		

		
			Neither the consent of the participant nor the participant's spouse shall be required to the extent that a distribution is required to satisfy Code section 401(a)(9) or section 415.  In addition, upon termination of this plan if the plan does not offer an annuity option (purchased from a commercial provider) and if the employer or any entity within the same controlled group as the employer does not maintain another defined contribution plan (other than an employee stock ownership plan as defined in Code section 4975(e)(7)), the participant's account balance will, without the participant's consent, be distributed to the participant.  However, if any entity within the same controlled group as the employer maintains another defined contribution plan (other than an employee stock ownership plan), the participant's 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries31

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		account balance will be transferred, without the participant's consent, to the other plan if the participant does not consent to an immediate distribution.
		

		
			An account balance is immediately distributable if any part of the account balance could be distributed to the participant (or surviving spouse) before the participant attains (or would have attained if not deceased) the later of normal retirement age or age 62. 
		

		
			(b)Safe Harbor Rules – This Section 5.2(b) shall apply to a participant in this profit sharing plan, and to any distribution, made on or after the first day of the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1988, from or under a separate account attributable solely to accumulated deductible employee contributions, as defined in Code section 72(o)(5)(B), and maintained on behalf of a participant in a money purchase pension plan (including a target benefit plan).  This plan satisfies and shall continue to satisfy the following conditions:  (1) the participant cannot elect payments in the form of a life annuity; and (2) on the death of a participant, the participant's vested account balance will be paid to the participant's surviving spouse, but if there is no surviving spouse, or if the surviving spouse has consented in a manner conforming to a qualified election, then to the participant's designated beneficiary.  The surviving spouse may elect to have distribution of the vested account balance commence within the 90-day period following the date of the participant's death.  The account balance shall be adjusted for gains or losses occurring after the participant's death in accordance with the provisions of the plan governing the adjustment of account balances for other types of distributions.
		

		
			(1)The participant may waive the spousal death benefit described in this Section 5.2(b) at any time provided that no such waiver shall be effective unless it satisfies the conditions of Section 5.2(c)(1) that would apply to the participant's waiver of the qualified preretirement survivor annuity.
		

		
			(2)For purposes of this Section 5.2(b), vested account balance shall have the same meaning as provided in Section 5.2(c)(3).
		

		
			(c)Definitions (Code Section 417 Requirements)
		

		
			(1)Qualified Election – A waiver of a qualified preretirement survivor annuity.  Any waiver of a qualified preretirement survivor annuity shall not be effective unless:  (a) the participant's spouse consents in writing to the election; (b) the election designates a specific beneficiary, including any class of beneficiaries or any contingent beneficiaries, that may not be changed without spousal consent (or the spouse expressly permits designations by the participant without any further spousal consent); (c) the spouse's consent acknowledges the effect of the election; and (d) the spouse's consent is witnessed by a plan representative or notary public.  If it is established to the satisfaction of a plan representative that there is no spouse or that the spouse cannot be located, a waiver will be deemed a qualified election.
		

		
			Any consent by a spouse obtained under this provision (or establishment that the consent of a spouse may not be obtained) shall be effective only with respect to such spouse.  A consent that permits designations by the participant without any requirement of further consent by such spouse must acknowledge that the spouse has the right to limit consent to a specific beneficiary, and a specific form of benefit where applicable, and that the spouse voluntarily elects to relinquish either or both of such rights.  A revocation of a prior waiver may be made by a participant without the consent of the spouse at any time before the commencement of benefits.  The number of revocations shall not be limited.
		

		
			(2)Spouse (Surviving Spouse) – The spouse or surviving spouse of the participant, provided that a former spouse will be treated as the spouse or surviving spouse and a current spouse will not be treated as the spouse or surviving spouse to the extent provided under a qualified domestic relations order as described in Code section 414(p).
		

		
			(3)Vested Account Balance – The aggregate value of the participant's vested account balances derived from employer and employee contributions (including rollovers), whether vested before or upon death, including the proceeds of insurance contracts, if any, on the participant's life.  The provisions of this Section 5.2 shall apply to a participant who is vested in amounts attributable to employer contributions, employee contributions, or both at the time of death or distribution.
		

		
			(4)Annuity Starting Date – The first day of the first period for which an amount is paid as an annuity or any other form.
		

		
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries32

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		Section 5.3 – Distribution Requirements
		

		
			Subject to Section 5.2 Joint and Survivor Annuity Requirements, the requirements of this Section 5.3 shall apply to any distribution of a participant's interest and will take precedence over any inconsistent provisions of this plan.  All distributions required under this Section 5.3 shall be determined and made in accordance with the regulations under Code section 401(a)(9) and the minimum distribution incidental benefit requirement of Code section 401(a)(9)(G).
		

		
			With respect to calendar year 2009, the provisions of Section 5.3 shall be applied subject to Code section 401(a)(9)(H).  Although the plan administrator shall calculate any required minimum distribution under Section 5.3 and pay it separately to any participant or beneficiary commencing distribution during 2009, such recipient shall be eligible to deposit such amount in a qualified employer plan or individual retirement account.  Any participant receiving or due to commence such distributions (including as a 5% owner) shall not receive a required minimum distribution with respect to 2009 in the absence of an affirmative election.  To the extent that a participant's entire interest is otherwise required to be distributed to a beneficiary by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the participant's death, such 5-year period shall be determined without regard to calendar year 2009.
		

		
			(a)Required Beginning Date – The entire interest of a participant must be distributed, or begin to be distributed, no later than the participant's required beginning date.
		

		
			(b)Limits on Distribution Periods – As of the first distribution calendar year, distributions to a participant, if not made in a single sum, may only be made over one of the following periods (or a combination thereof):
		

		
			(1)the life of the participant;
		

		
			(2)the joint lives of the participant and a designated beneficiary;
		

		
			(3)a period certain not extending beyond the life expectancy of the participant; or
		

		
			(4)a period certain not extending beyond the joint life and last survivor expectancy of the participant and a designated beneficiary.
		

		
			(c)Death of Participant Before Distributions Begin – If the participant dies before distributions begin, the participant's entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, no later than as follows:
		

		
			(1)If the participant's surviving spouse is the participant's sole designated beneficiary, then distributions to the surviving spouse will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the participant died, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the participant would have attained age 701⁄2, if later.  If the surviving spouse so elects, the participant's entire interest will be distributed to such surviving spouse by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the participant's death.  If no election is received, distributions to the surviving spouse will begin by December 31 of the calendar year in which the participant would have attained age 701⁄2, or the participant's entire interest will be distributed to such surviving spouse by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the participant's death, if later.
		

		
			(2)If the participant's surviving spouse is not the participant's sole designated beneficiary, then distributions to the designated beneficiary will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the participant died.  If the designated beneficiary so elects or if no election is received, the participant's entire interest will be distributed to such designated beneficiary by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the participant's death.
		

		
			(3)If there is no designated beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the participant's death, the participant's entire interest will be distributed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the participant's death.
		

		
			(4)If the participant's surviving spouse is the participant's sole designated beneficiary and the surviving spouse dies after the participant but before distributions to the surviving spouse are required to begin, this Section 5.3(c), other than Section 5.3(c)(1), will apply as if the surviving spouse were the participant.
		

		
			For purposes of this Section 5.3(c) and Section 5.3(f), unless Section 5.3(c)(4) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the participant's required beginning date.  If Section 5.3(c)(4) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries33

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		Section 5.3(c)(1).  If distributions under an annuity purchased from an insurance company irrevocably commence to the participant before the participant's required beginning date (or to the participant's surviving spouse before the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 5.3(c)(1)), the date distributions are considered to begin is the date distributions actually commence.
		

		
			(d)Forms of Distribution – Unless the participant's interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company or in a single sum on or before the required beginning date, as of the first distribution calendar year distributions will be made in accordance with Section 5.3(e) and (f).  If the participant's interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company, distributions thereunder will be made in accordance with the requirements of Code section 401(a)(9) and the Treasury regulations.
		

		
			To the extent the participant has a Roth elective deferral account, an employee nondeductible contribution account, or after-tax contributions of either type for which there is separate accounting under his rollover/transfer account, such funds shall be distributed in the order listed before any fully taxable distribution is made to satisfy the minimum distribution requirement.  After the exhaustion of such accounts, distributions shall be debited from a participant's accounts to the extent funded in accordance with the following order of preference:  rollover/transfer account, qualified nonelective contribution account, profit sharing account, employer matching contribution account, employee 401(k) elective deferral account.
		

		
			(e)Required Minimum Distributions During Participant's Lifetime – If a participant's benefit is to be distributed over (1) a period not extending beyond the life expectancy of the participant or the joint life and last survivor expectancy of the participant and the participant's designated beneficiary or (2) a period not extending beyond the life expectancy of the designated beneficiary, the amount required to be distributed for each calendar year, beginning with distributions for the first distribution calendar year, must at least equal the quotient obtained by dividing the participant's benefit by the applicable life expectancy.
		

		
			(1)Amount of Required Minimum Distribution For Each Distribution Calendar Year – During the participant's lifetime, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year is the lesser of:
		

		
			(A)The quotient obtained by dividing the participant's account balance by the distribution period in the Uniform Lifetime Table set forth in Regulation section 1.401(a)(9)‐9, using the participant's age as of the participant's birthday in the distribution calendar year; or 
		

		
			(B)If the participant's sole designated beneficiary for the distribution calendar year is the participant's spouse, the quotient obtained by dividing the participant's account balance by the number in the Joint and Last Survivor Table set forth in Regulation section 1.401(a)(9)‐9, using the participant's and spouse's attained ages as of the participant's and spouse's birthdays in the distribution calendar year.
		

		
			(2)Lifetime Required Minimum Distributions Continue Through Year of Participant's Death – Required minimum distributions will be determined under this Section 5.3(e) beginning with the first distribution calendar year and continuing up to and including the distribution calendar year that includes the participant's date of death.
		

		
			(f)Required Minimum Distributions After Participant's Death
		

		
			(1)Death On or After Date Distributions Begin – If the participant dies after distribution of his interest has begun, the remaining portion of such interest will continue to be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution being used prior to the participant's death.
		

		
			(A)Participant Survived by Designated Beneficiary – If the participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is a designated beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the participant's death is the quotient obtained by dividing the participant's account balance by the longer of the remaining life expectancy of the participant or the remaining life expectancy of the participant's designated beneficiary, determined as follows:
		

		
			(i)The participant's remaining life expectancy is calculated using the age of the participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries34

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(ii)If the participant's surviving spouse is the participant's sole designated beneficiary, the remaining life expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated for each distribution calendar year after the year of the participant's death using the surviving spouse's age as of the spouse's birthday in that year.  For distribution calendar years after the year of the surviving spouse's death, the remaining life expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated using the age of the surviving spouse as of the spouse's birthday in the calendar year of the spouse's death, reduced by one for each subsequent calendar year.
		

		
			(iii)If the participant's surviving spouse is not the participant's sole designated beneficiary, the designated beneficiary's remaining life expectancy is calculated using the age of the beneficiary in the year following the year of the participant's death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.
		

		
			(B)No Designated Beneficiary – If the participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is no designated beneficiary as of September 30 of the year after the year of the participant's death, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the participant's death is the quotient obtained by dividing the participant's account balance by the participant's remaining life expectancy calculated using the age of the participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.
		

		
			(2)Death Before Date Distributions Begin
		

		
			(A)Participant Survived by Designated Beneficiary – If the participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is a designated beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the participant's death is the quotient obtained by dividing the participant's account balance by the remaining life expectancy of the participant's designated beneficiary, determined as provided in Section 5.3(f)(1).
		

		
			(B)No Designated Beneficiary – If the participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is no designated beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the participant's death, distribution of the participant's entire interest will be completed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the participant's death.
		

		
			(C)Death of Surviving Spouse Before Distributions to Surviving Spouse Are Required to Begin – If the participant dies before the date distributions begin, the participant's surviving spouse is the participant's sole designated beneficiary, and the surviving spouse dies before distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 5.3(c), this Section 5.3(f)(2) will apply as if the surviving spouse were the participant.
		

		
			(g)Definitions (Code Section 401(a)(9) Requirements)
		

		
			(1)Designated Beneficiary – The individual who is designated as the beneficiary of the participant’s interest under the plan and who is the designated beneficiary under Code section 401(a)(9) and Regulation section 1.401(a)(9)‐4.
		

		
			(2)Distribution Calendar Year – A calendar year for which a minimum distribution is required.  For distributions beginning before the participant's death, the first distribution calendar year is the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year that contains the participant's required beginning date.  For distributions beginning after the participant's death, the first distribution calendar year is the calendar year in which distributions are required to begin pursuant to Section 5.3(c).  The required minimum distribution for the participant's first distribution calendar year will be made on or before the participant's required beginning date.  The required minimum distribution for other distribution calendar years, including the required minimum distribution for the distribution calendar year in which the participant's required beginning date occurs, will be made on or before December 31 of that distribution calendar year.
		

		
			(3)Life Expectancy – Life expectancy as computed by use of the Single Life Table in Regulation section 1.401(a)(9)‐9.
		

		
			(4)Participant's Account Balance – The account balance as of the last valuation date in the calendar year immediately preceding the distribution calendar year (valuation calendar year) increased by the amount of any contributions made and allocated or forfeitures allocated to the account balance as of dates in the valuation calendar year after the valuation date and decreased by distributions made in the valuation calendar year after the valuation date.  The account balance for the valuation calendar 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries35

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		year includes any amounts rolled over or transferred to the plan either in the valuation calendar year or in the distribution calendar year if distributed or transferred in the valuation calendar year.
		

		
			If any portion of the minimum distribution for the first distribution calendar year is made in the second distribution calendar year on or before the required beginning date, the amount of the minimum distribution made in the second distribution calendar year shall be treated as if it had been made in the immediately preceding distribution calendar year.
		

		
			(5)Required Beginning Date
		

		
			(A)Non-5% Owner – The required beginning date is April 1 of the calendar year following the later of:  (i) the calendar year in which the participant attains age 701⁄2, or (ii) the calendar year in which the participant retires.
		

		
			(B)5% Owner – The required beginning date for a participant who is a 5% owner is April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the participant attains age 701⁄2.  A participant is treated as a 5% owner for purposes of this Section 5.3(g)(5) if such participant is a 5% owner as defined in Code section 416(i) (determined in accordance with section 416 but without regard to whether the plan is top-heavy) at any time during the plan year ending with or within the calendar year in which such participant attains age 701⁄2.
		

		
			(C)Once distributions have begun to a 5% owner under this Section 5.3(g)(5), they must continue to be distributed, even if the participant ceases to be a 5% owner in a subsequent year.
		

		
			Section 5.4 – Top-Heavy Provisions
		

		
			(a)Application of Provisions – If the plan is or becomes top-heavy in any plan year, the provisions of Section 5.4 will supersede any conflicting provisions in the plan.
		

		
			(b)Minimum Allocation
		

		
			(1)Except as otherwise provided in Section 5.4(b)(3) and (4) below, the employer contributions and forfeitures allocated on behalf of any participant who is not a key employee shall not be less than the lesser of 3% of such participant's compensation or in the case where the employer has no defined benefit plan that designates this plan to satisfy Code section 401, the largest percentage of employer contributions and forfeitures, as a percentage of key employee's compensation that may be taken into account under Section 1.2(c), allocated on behalf of any key employee for that year.  For this purpose, amounts contributed to the key employee's elective deferral account(s) shall be included as allocations on his behalf for that year.  However, amounts contributed to a non-key employee's elective deferral account(s) shall not be taken into account in determining whether he has received his minimum allocation.  The minimum allocation is determined without regard to any Social Security contribution.  This minimum allocation shall be made even though, under other plan provisions, the participant would not otherwise be entitled to receive an allocation, or would have received a lesser allocation for the year because of (i) the participant's failure to complete 1,000 hours of service (or any equivalent provided in the plan), or (ii) the participant's failure to make mandatory employee contributions to the plan, or (iii) the participant's failure to make elective contributions to the plan, or (iv) compensation less than a stated amount.
		

		
			(2)For purposes of computing the minimum allocation, compensation shall mean compensation as defined in Section 5.1(c)(2), subject to the limitations of Section 1.2(c).
		

		
			(3)The provision in Section 5.4(b)(1) shall not apply to any participant who was not employed by the employer on the last day of the plan year.
		

		
			(4)The provision in Section 5.4(b)(1) shall not apply to any participant to the extent the participant is covered under any other plan or plans of the employer and the employer has provided in Section 3.2 or 3.3 that the minimum allocation or benefit requirement applicable to top-heavy plans will be met in the other plan or plans (including another plan that consists solely of a cash or deferred arrangement that meets the ADP safe harbor requirements and matching contributions with respect to which the ACP safe harbor requirements are met).  If this plan is intended to meet the minimum allocation or benefit requirement applicable to another plan or plans, the employer shall so provide in Section 3.2(c) or 3.3(b), as appropriate.
		

		
			Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein and in Section 3.2(c) or 3.3(b), the top-heavy requirements of Code section 416 and this Section 5.4 shall not apply in any year beginning after 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries36

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		December 31, 2001, in which the plan consists solely of a cash or deferred arrangement that meets the ADP safe harbor requirements as set forth in Sections 3.4(a) and 5.5(f) and matching contributions with respect to which the ACP safe harbor requirements are met as set forth in Sections 3.6 and 5.5(f).
		

		
			(5)The minimum allocation required (to the extent required to be nonforfeitable under Code section 416(b)) may not be forfeited under Code section 411(a)(3)(B) or 411(a)(3)(D).
		

		
			(6)Matching Contributions – Employer matching contributions shall be taken into account for purposes of satisfying the minimum contribution requirements of Code section 416(c)(2) and the plan if so provided in Section 3.2(c) or 3.3(b).  The preceding sentence shall apply with respect to matching contributions under the plan or, if the plan provides that the minimum contribution requirement shall be met in another plan, such other plan.  Employer matching contributions that are used to satisfy the minimum contribution requirements shall be treated as matching contributions for purposes of the actual contribution percentage test and other requirements of Code section 401(m).
		

		
			(c)Minimum Vesting Schedule – For any plan year in which this plan is top-heavy, the following minimum vesting schedule shall automatically apply to the plan:
		

		
			 
		

			
					
						Years of Service

					
					
						 

					
					
						Vesting Percentage

				
	
					
						0–1 Year

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					0% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						2

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					20% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						3

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					40% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						4

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					60% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						5

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					80% 
					
					
						 

				
	
					
						6 or More Years

					
					
						 

					
					
						 

					100% 
					
					
						 

				

		
			 
		

		
			The minimum vesting schedule shall apply to all benefits within the meaning of Code section 411(a)(7) except those attributable to employee contributions, including benefits accrued before the effective date of Code section 416 and benefits accrued before the plan became top-heavy.  Further, no decrease in a participant's nonforfeitable percentage may occur in the event the plan's status as top-heavy changes for any plan year.  However, this Section does not apply to the account balances of any employee who does not have an hour of service after the plan has initially become top-heavy and such employee's account balance attributable to employer contributions and forfeitures will be determined without regard to this Section.
		

		
			If the vesting schedule under the plans shifts in or out of the above schedule for any plan year because of the plan's top-heavy status, such shift shall constitute an amendment to the vesting schedule and the provisions of Section 7.2(d) and (e) shall apply.
		

		
			(d)Definitions (Code Section 416 Requirements)
		

		
			(1)Key Employee – Key employee means any employee or former employee (and the beneficiaries of such employee) who at any time during the determination period is an officer of the employer if such individual's annual compensation exceeds $130,000 (as adjusted under Code section 416(i)(1) for plan years beginning after December 31, 2002), a 5% owner of the employer, or a 1% owner of the employer who has an annual compensation of more than $150,000.  Annual compensation means compensation as defined in Section 5.1(c)(2), but including elective contributions as defined in Section 1.2(a) and elective contributions under a Code section 457 plan or a Code section 501(c)(18) plan for any plan year and subject to the limitations of Section 1.2(c).  The determination period is the plan year containing the determination date.  In determining whether an employee is a key employee in 2002, this paragraph shall be treated as having been in effect for the last plan year beginning before January 1, 2002.
		

		
			In determining whether a plan is top-heavy for plan years beginning before January 1, 2002, key employee means any employee or former employee (and the beneficiaries of such employee) who at any time during the determination period was an officer of the employer if such individual's annual compensation exceeded 50% of the dollar limitation under Code section 415(b)(1)(A), an owner (or considered an owner under Code section 318) of one of the ten largest interests in the employer if such individual's compensation exceeded 100% of the dollar limitation under Code 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries37

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		section 415(c)(1)(A), a 5% owner of the employer, or a 1% owner of the employer who had an annual compensation of more than $150,000.  Annual compensation means compensation as defined in Section 5.1(c)(2), but including elective contributions as defined in Section 1.2(a) and elective contributions under a Code section 457 plan or a Code section 501(c)(18) plan for any plan year and subject to the limitations of Section 1.2(c).  The determination period is the plan year containing the determination date and the four preceding plan years.
		

		
			The determination of who is a key employee will be made in accordance with Code section 416(i)(1) and the applicable regulations and other guidance of general applicability issued thereunder.
		

		
			(2)Top-Heavy Plan – This plan is top-heavy if any of the following conditions exists:
		

		
			(A)If the top-heavy ratio for this plan exceeds 60% and this plan is not part of any required aggregation group or permissive aggregation group of plans.
		

		
			(B)If this plan is a part of a required aggregation group of plans but not part of a permissive aggregation group and the top-heavy ratio for the group of plans exceeds 60%.
		

		
			(C)If this plan is a part of a required aggregation group and part of a permissive aggregation group of plans and the top-heavy ratio for the permissive aggregation group exceeds 60%.
		

		
			(3)Top-Heavy Ratio
		

		
			(A)If the employer maintains one or more defined contribution plans (including any Simplified Employee Pension Plan) and the employer has not maintained any defined benefit plan that during the five-year period ending on the determination date(s) has or has had accrued benefits, the top-heavy ratio for this plan alone or for the required or permissive aggregation group as appropriate is a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of the account balances of all key employees as of the determination date(s) including any part of any account balance distributed in the one-year period ending on the determination date(s) (five-year period ending on the determination date in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or disability and in determining whether the plan is top-heavy for plan years beginning before January 1, 2002), and the denominator of which is the sum of all account balances including any part of any account balance distributed in the one-year period ending on the determination date(s) (five-year period ending on the determination date in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or disability and in determining whether the plan is top-heavy for plan years beginning before January 1, 2002), both computed in accordance with Code section 416 and the regulations thereunder.  Both the numerator and denominator of the top-heavy ratio are increased to reflect any contribution not actually made as of the determination date, but which is required to be taken into account on that date under Code section 416 and the regulations thereunder.
		

		
			(B)If the employer maintains one or more defined contribution plans (including any Simplified Employee Pension Plan) and the employer maintains or has maintained one or more defined benefit plans that during the five-year period ending on the determination date(s) has or has had any accrued benefits, the top-heavy ratio for any required or permissive aggregation group as appropriate is a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of account balances under the aggregated defined contribution plan or plans for all key employees, determined in accordance with (A) above, and the present value of accrued benefits under the aggregated defined benefit plan or plans for all key employees as of the determination date(s), and the denominator of which is the sum of the account balances under the aggregated defined contribution plan or plans for all participants, determined in accordance with (A) above, and the present value of accrued benefits under the defined benefit plan or plans for all participants as of the determination date(s), all determined in accordance with Code section 416 and the regulations thereunder.  The accrued benefits under a defined benefit plan in both the numerator and denominator of the top-heavy ratio are increased for any distribution of an accrued benefit made in the one-year period ending on the determination date (five-year period ending on the determination date in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or disability and in determining whether the plan is top-heavy for plan years beginning before January 1, 2002).
		

		
			The accrued benefit of a participant other than a key employee shall be determined under (1) the method, if any, that uniformly applies for accrual purposes under all defined benefit plans maintained by the employer, or (2) if there is no such method, as if such benefit accrued not more 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries38

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		rapidly than the slowest accrual rate permitted under the fractional rule of Code section 411(b)(1)(C).
		

		
			(C)For purposes of Section 5.4(d)(3)(A) and (B) above the value of account balances and the present value of accrued benefits will be determined as of the most recent valuation date that falls within or ends with the 12-month period ending on the determination date, except as provided in Code section 416 and the regulations thereunder for the first and second plan years of a defined benefit plan.  The account balances and accrued benefits of a participant (1) who is not a key employee but who was a key employee in a prior year, or (2) who has not been credited with at least one hour of service with any employer maintaining the plan at any time during the one-year period (five-year period in determining whether the plan is top-heavy for plan years beginning before January 1, 2002) ending on the determination date will be disregarded.  The calculation of the top-heavy ratio, and the extent to which distributions, rollovers, and transfers are taken into account will be made in accordance with Code section 416 and the regulations thereunder.  Deductible employee contributions will not be taken into account for purposes of computing the top-heavy ratio.  When aggregating plans the value of account balances and accrued benefits will be calculated with reference to the determination dates that fall within the same calendar year.
		

		
			The accrued benefit of a participant other than a key employee shall be determined under (1) the method, if any, that uniformly applies for accrual purposes under all defined benefit plans maintained by the employer, or (2) if there is no such method, as if such benefit accrued not more rapidly than the slowest accrual rate permitted under the fractional rule of Code section 411(b)(1)(C).
		

		
			Catch-up contributions with respect to the current plan year shall not be taken into account; however, catch-up contributions for prior years shall be taken into account.
		

		
			(4)Permissive Aggregation Group – The required aggregation group of plans plus any other plan or plans of the employer that, when considered as a group with the required aggregation group, would continue to satisfy the requirements of Code sections 401(a)(4) and 410.
		

		
			(5)Required Aggregation Group – (A) Each qualified plan of the employer in which at least one key employee participates or participated at any time during the determination period (regardless of whether the plan has terminated), and (B) any other qualified plan of the employer that enables a plan described in (A) to meet the requirements of Code sections 401(a)(4) or 410.
		

		
			(6)Determination Date – For any plan year subsequent to the first plan year, the last day of the preceding plan year.  For the first plan year of the plan, the last day of that year.
		

		
			(7)Valuation Date – The last day of the plan year shall be the date as of which account balances or accrued benefits are valued for purposes of calculating the top-heavy ratio.
		

		
			(8)Present Value – Present value shall be based only on the interest and mortality rates specified in the employer’s defined benefit plan.
		

		
			(9)Non-Key Employee – Any employee who is not a key employee.  Non-key employees include employees who are former key employees.
		

		
			Section 5.5 – Limitations and Conditions Regarding Contributions Under Code Sections 402(g), 401(k), and 401(m)
		

		
			(a)(1)Limit Maximum Amount of Elective Deferrals Under Code Section 402(g)
		

		
			No participant shall be permitted to have elective deferrals made under this plan, or any other qualified plan, contract or arrangement maintained by the employer, during any calendar year, in excess of the dollar limitation contained in Code section 402(g) in effect for the participant's taxable year at the beginning of such calendar year.  If Section 3.4 so provides, in the case of a participant age 50 or over by the end of the taxable year, the dollar limitation described in the preceding sentence shall include the amount of elective deferrals that are permitted to be catch-up contributions.  The dollar limitation contained in Code section 402(g) was $15,000 for taxable years beginning in 2006.  After 2006, the Secretary of the Treasury will adjust the $15,000 dollar limitation for cost-of-living increases under Code section 402(g)(4).  Any such adjustments will be in multiples of $500.
		

		
			(2)Catch-up Contributions
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries39

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		Catch-up contributions means elective deferrals made to the plan that are in excess of an otherwise applicable plan limit and that are made by participants who are age 50 or over by the end of their taxable years.  An otherwise applicable plan limit is a limit in the plan that applies to elective deferrals without regard to catch-up contributions, such as any limitation set forth in Section 3.4, the limits on annual additions described in Section 5.1, the dollar limitation on elective deferrals under Code section 402(g) (not taking into account catch-up contributions) and the limit imposed by the actual deferral percentage (ADP) test under Section 5.5(b).  Catch-up contributions for a participant for a taxable year may not exceed:
		

		
			(A)the dollar limit on catch-up contributions under Code section 414(v)(2)(B)(i) for the taxable year; or 
		

		
			(B)when added to other elective deferrals, 100% of the participant’s compensation for the taxable year (subject to the reservation of sufficient compensation to satisfy federal, state, and local income and other wage-related tax requirements).
		

		
			The dollar limit on catch-up contributions was $5,000 for taxable years beginning in 2006.  After 2006, the $5,000 limitation is adjusted by the Secretary of the Treasury for cost-of-living increases under Code section 414(v)(2)(C).  Any such adjustments will be in multiples of $500.
		

		
			Catch-up contributions shall not be:
		

		
			(A)subject to the limits on annual additions; 
		

		
			(B)taken into account under the ADP test; and 
		

		
			(C)taken into account in determining the minimum allocation under Section 5.4(b); however, catch-up contributions made in prior years shall be taken into account in determining whether the plan is top-heavy. 
		

		
			Provisions in the plan relating to catch-up contributions apply to elective deferrals made after December 31, 2001.
		

		
			(3)Distribution of Excess Elective Deferrals
		

		
			A participant may assign to this plan any excess elective deferrals made during a taxable year of the participant by following the claim procedure set forth in Section 5.5(a)(4).  Also, the employer may notify this plan on behalf of a participant who has excess deferrals for the taxable year calculated by taking into account only elective deferrals under the plans, contracts or arrangements maintained by the employer.
		

		
			Notwithstanding any other provision of the plan, excess elective deferrals, plus any income and minus any loss allocable thereto, shall be distributed no later than April 15 to any participant to whose account excess elective deferrals were assigned for the preceding year and for whom excess elective deferrals have been claimed for such taxable year or calendar year.  For participant taxable years beginning after December 31, 2005, distribution of excess elective deferrals for a year shall be made first from the participant's Roth elective deferral account, to the extent Roth elective deferrals were made for the year.  Excess elective deferrals shall only be distributed from the 401(k) elective deferral account after the Roth elective deferrals made for the year have been fully distributed.
		

		
			(4)Claims
		

		
			The participant's claim shall be submitted in writing to the plan administrator no later than March 1.  The participant shall specify the excess deferral amount for the preceding calendar year and shall provide a written statement that if such amounts are not distributed, such excess deferral amount, when added to amounts deferred under other plans or arrangements described in Code sections 401(k), 408(k), 457, or 403(b), exceeds the limit imposed on the participant by Code section 402(g) for the year in which the deferral occurred.
		

		
			(5)Definitions (Code Section 402(g) Limitations)
		

		
			(A)Elective Deferrals shall mean any employer contributions made to the plan at the election of the participant, in lieu of cash compensation, and shall include contributions made pursuant to a salary reduction agreement or other deferral mechanism.  With respect to any taxable year, a participant's elective deferral is the sum of all employer contributions made on behalf of such participant pursuant to an election to defer under any qualified cash or deferred arrangement as 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries40

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		described in Code section 401(k), any salary reduction simplified employee pension described in section 408(k)(6), any SIMPLE IRA plan described in section 408(p), any plan described under section 501(c)(18), and any employer contributions made on the behalf of a participant for the purchase of an annuity contract under section 403(b) pursuant to a salary reduction agreement.  For years beginning after December 31, 2005, the term "elective deferrals" shall include pre-tax elective deferrals and Roth elective deferrals.  Pre-tax elective deferrals means a participant's elective deferrals that are not includable in the participant's gross income at the time deferred.  Elective deferrals shall not include any deferrals properly distributed as excess annual additions.
		

		
			(B)Roth Elective Deferrals shall mean a participant's elective deferrals that are includable in the participant's gross income at the time deferred and have been irrevocably designated as Roth elective deferrals by the participant in the deferral election in lieu of all or a portion of the pre-tax elective deferrals the participant is otherwise eligible to make under the plan.  A participant's Roth elective deferrals shall be maintained in a separate account containing only the participant's Roth elective deferrals and gains and losses attributable to those Roth elective deferrals.
		

		
			(C)Excess Elective Deferrals shall mean those elective deferrals that either:  (i) are made during the participant's taxable year and exceed the dollar limitation under Section 5.5(a) (including, if applicable, the dollar limitation on catch-up contributions described in Section 5.5(a)(2)) for such year; or (ii) are made during a calendar year and exceed such dollar limitations for the participant's taxable year beginning in such calendar year, counting only elective deferrals made under this plan and any other plan, contract or arrangement maintained by the employer.  Excess elective deferrals shall be treated as annual additions under the plan, unless such amounts are distributed no later than the first April 15 following the close of the participant's taxable year.
		

		
			(6)Determination of Income or Loss
		

		
			Excess elective deferrals shall be adjusted for any income or loss.  For taxable years beginning on or after January 1, 2008, the income or loss allocable to excess elective deferrals allocated to each participant is the income or loss allocable to the participant's elective deferral account for the taxable year multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is such participant's excess elective deferrals for the year and the denominator is the participant's account balance attributable to elective deferrals without regard to any income or loss occurring during such taxable year.  Effective solely for the taxable year beginning on or after January 1, 2007, and to the extent the excess elective deferrals were credited with gain or loss as of an accounting date within the gap period (i.e., the period after the close of the taxable year and prior to the distribution), allocable income or loss also includes 10% of the amount determined under the preceding sentence multiplied by the number of whole calendar months between the end of the participant’s taxable year and the date of distribution, counting the month of distribution if distribution occurred after the 15th of such month.
		

		
			(b)(1)Actual Deferral Percentage Test
		

		
			The actual deferral percentage (hereinafter "ADP") for a plan year for participants who are highly compensated employees for the plan year and the prior year's ADP for participants who were nonhighly compensated employees for the prior plan year must satisfy one of the following tests:  (i) The ADP for a plan year for participants who are highly compensated employees for the plan year shall not exceed the prior year's ADP for participants who were nonhighly compensated employees for the prior plan year multiplied by 1.25; or (ii) The ADP for a plan year for participants who are highly compensated employees for the plan year shall not exceed the prior year's ADP for participants who were nonhighly compensated employees for the prior plan year multiplied by 2.0, provided that the ADP for participants who are highly compensated employees does not exceed the ADP for participants who were nonhighly compensated employees in the prior plan year by more than two percentage points.
		

		
			In place of the prior year testing method described above, if so elected by the employer and adopted in Section 3.4(a), the ADP tests in (i) and (ii) will be applied by comparing the current plan year's ADP for participants who are highly compensated employees with the current plan year's ADP for participants who are nonhighly compensated employees.  In the alternative, the plan may satisfy the ADP test requirements by meeting the ADP test safe harbor requirements as described in Section 5.5(f).  Election of this method shall be treated as an election to use the current year testing method.  Once the current year testing method election has been made, the employer can elect prior year testing for a plan year only if the plan has used current year testing for each of the preceding 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries41

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		5 plan years (or if lesser, the number of plan years the plan has been in existence) or if, as a result of a merger or acquisition described in Code section 410(b)(6)(c)(i), the employer maintains both a plan using prior year testing and a plan using current year testing and the change is made within the transition period described in section 410(b)(6)(c)(ii).  Such elections shall be reflected in Section 3.4(a).
		

		
			(A)Special Rules Applying to ADP Test
		

		
			(i)A participant is a highly compensated employee for a particular plan year if he meets the definition of a highly compensated employee in effect for that plan year.  A participant is a nonhighly compensated employee for a particular plan year if he does not meet the definition of a highly compensated employee in effect for that plan year.
		

		
			(ii)The ADP for any participant who is a highly compensated employee for the plan year and who is eligible to have elective deferrals (and qualified nonelective contributions or qualified matching contributions, or both, to the extent treated as elective deferrals for purposes of the ADP test) allocated to his accounts under two or more arrangements described in Code section 401(k), that are maintained by the employer, shall be determined as if such elective deferrals (and, to the extent taken into account, such qualified nonelective contributions or qualified matching contributions, or both) were made under a single arrangement.  If a highly compensated employee participates in two or more cash or deferred arrangements of the employer that have different plan years, all elective deferrals made during this plan's plan year under all such arrangements shall be aggregated.  For plan years beginning before January 1, 2006, all elective deferrals made under all such cash or deferred arrangements ending with or within the same calendar year shall be treated as a single arrangement.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, certain plans shall be treated as separate if mandatorily disaggregated under regulations under Code section 401(k).
		

		
			(iii)In the event that this plan satisfies the requirements of Code sections 401(k), 401(a)(4), or 410(b) only if aggregated with one or more other plans, or if one or more other plans satisfy the requirements of such Code sections only if aggregated with this plan, then this Section 5.5(b)(1) shall be applied by determining the ADP of employees as if all such plans were a single plan.  If more than 10% of the employer's nonhighly compensated employees are involved in a plan coverage change as defined in Regulation section 1.401(k)-2(c)(4), then any adjustments to the nonhighly compensated employees' ADP for the prior year shall be made in accordance with such regulation, unless the employer has elected in Section 3.4(a) to use the current year testing method.  Plans may be aggregated in order to satisfy Code section 401(k) only if they have the same plan year and use the same ADP testing method.
		

		
			(iv)If:  (A) this plan is not a successor plan (as defined in Regulation section 1.401(k)-2(c)(2)(iii)), and (B) this plan is not aggregated under Regulation section 1.401(k)-1(b)(4) for such plan year with any other plan that was or that included a Code section 401(k) plan in the prior year; then, in the case of the first plan year the plan permits any participant to make elective deferrals the amount treated as the ADP for participants who are nonhighly compensated employees for the prior plan year shall be 3% or, if the employer so elects, the ADP for participants who are nonhighly compensated employees as calculated for such first plan year.  Such election shall be set forth in Section 3.4(a).
		

		
			(v)For purposes of determining the ADP test, elective deferrals, qualified nonelective contributions and qualified matching contributions must be made before the last day of the twelve-month period immediately following the plan year to which the contributions relate.  An elective deferral shall be taken into account only if it relates to compensation that either (a) would have been received by the participant in the plan year but for the deferral election, or (b) is attributable to services performed by the participant in the plan year and would have been received by the participant within 21⁄2 months after the last day of the plan year but for the deferral election.
		

		
			When the prior year testing method is used, qualified nonelective contributions and qualified matching contributions shall not be taken into account.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries42

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(vi)The plan administrator shall maintain records sufficient to demonstrate satisfaction of the ADP test and the amount of qualified nonelective contributions or qualified matching contributions, or both, used in such test.
		

		
			(vii)When the current year testing method is used, qualified nonelective contributions may be taken into account as elective deferrals only to the extent needed to meet the ADP test.  Further, qualified matching contributions may be taken into account only to the extent such contributions are not needed to meet the average deferral percentage test unless it is the intention of the plan administrator to test all qualified nonelective and matching contributions under the ADP test.
		

		
			(viii)Effective for plan years beginning on or after January 1, 2006, qualified nonelective contributions cannot be taken into account for a plan year for a nonhighly compensated employee to the extent such contributions exceed the product of that nonhighly compensated employee's compensation and the greater of 5% or two times the plan's representative contribution rate.  For this purpose, the plan's representative contribution rate is the lowest applicable contribution rate of any eligible nonhighly compensated employee among a group of eligible nonhighly compensated employees that consists of half of all eligible nonhighly compensated employees for the plan year (or, if greater, the lowest applicable contribution rate of any eligible nonhighly compensated employee in the group of all eligible nonhighly compensated employees for the plan year and who is employed by the employer on the last day of the plan year).
		

		
			The applicable contribution rate for an eligible nonhighly compensated employee is the sum of his qualified matching contributions taken into account under the ADP test and his qualified nonelective contributions for the plan year, divided by his compensation for the same period.  Notwithstanding the preceding, qualified nonelective contributions that are made in connection with an employer's obligation to pay prevailing wages under the Davis-Bacon Act can be taken into account for a plan year for a nonhighly compensated employee to the extent such contributions do not exceed 10% of his compensation.
		

		
			(ix)Applicable limitations when testing changes from current year testing to prior year testing:  The ADP for the prior plan year shall be determined taking into account only:  (A) elective contributions for nonhighly compensated employees that were taken into account for purposes of the ADP test in the prior plan year under the current plan year testing method and (B) qualified nonelective contributions not previously taken into account under either the ADP or ACP test.
		

		
			(x)The determination and treatment of the ADP amounts of any participant shall satisfy such other requirements as may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.
		

		
			(B)Actual Deferral Percentage (ADP) shall mean, for a specified group of participants (either highly compensated employees or nonhighly compensated employees) for a plan year, the average of the ratios (calculated separately for each participant in such group) of (1) the amount of employer contributions actually paid over to the trust on behalf of such participant for the plan year to (2) the participant's compensation as defined in Section 1.2(e).  The actual deferral ratio of each participant and the actual deferral percentage of each group shall be calculated to the nearest hundredth of a percentage point.  Employer contributions on behalf of any participant shall include: (1) any elective deferrals (other than catch-up contributions) made pursuant to the participant's deferral election, including excess elective deferrals of highly compensated employees, but excluding (a) excess elective deferrals of nonhighly compensated employees that arise solely from elective deferrals to the extent the excess deferrals are prohibited under Code section 401(a)(30) due to the contributions made under this plan and without taking into account deferrals made under an unrelated employer's plan and (b) elective deferrals that are taken into account in the actual contribution percentage test (provided the ADP test is satisfied both with and without exclusion of these elective deferrals); and (2) at the election of the employer, qualified nonelective contributions and qualified matching contributions.  For purposes of computing actual deferral percentages, an employee who would be a participant but for the failure to make elective deferrals shall be treated as a participant on whose behalf no elective deferrals are made.
		

		
			(2)Distribution of Excess Contributions
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries43

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		Notwithstanding any other provision of this plan, excess contributions, plus any income and minus any loss allocable thereto, shall be distributed no later than the last day of each plan year to participants to whose accounts such excess contributions were allocated for the preceding plan year, except to the extent such excess contributions are classified as catch-up contributions.  If such excess amounts (other than catch-up contributions) are distributed more than 21⁄2 months after the last day of the plan year in which such excess amounts arose, a 10% excise tax will be imposed on the employer maintaining the plan with respect to such amounts.  Notwithstanding the preceding, the excise tax will not be imposed if the distribution is made within 6 months after the last day of such plan year if the plan is an eligible automatic contribution arrangement within the meaning of Code section 414(w) that covers all eligible nonhighly compensated employees and highly compensated employees for the entire portion of the plan year for which they are eligible and provides the notice described in Section 5.5(f)(4) even after an affirmative deferral election has been made.  Excess contributions shall be allocated to the highly compensated employees with the largest amounts of contributions taken into account in calculating the ADP test for the plan year in which the excess arose, beginning with the highly compensated employee with the largest amount of such contributions and continuing in descending order until all of the excess contributions have been allocated.  To the extent a highly compensated employee has not reached his catch-up contribution limit under the plan, excess contributions allocated to such highly compensated employee shall be recognized as catch-up contributions and will not be treated as excess contributions.
		

		
			Excess contributions shall be treated as annual additions under the plan even if distributed.
		

		
			(A)Determination of Income or Loss – Excess contributions shall be adjusted for any income or loss.  For plan years beginning on or after January 1, 2008, the income or loss allocable to excess contributions allocated to each participant is the income or loss allocable to the participant's elective deferral account(s) (and, if applicable, the qualified nonelective contribution account or the qualified employer matching contribution account or both) for the plan year multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is such participant's excess contributions for the year and the denominator is the participant's account balance(s) attributable to elective deferrals (and qualified nonelective contributions or qualified matching contributions, or both, if any of such contributions are included in the ADP test) without regard to any income or loss occurring during such plan year.  Effective solely for the plan year beginning on or after January 1, 2006 and the plan year beginning on or after January 1, 2007 and to the extent the excess contributions were credited with gain or loss as of an accounting date within the gap period (i.e., the period after the close of the plan year and prior to the distribution), allocable income or loss also includes 10% of the amount determined under the preceding sentence multiplied by the number of whole calendar months between the end of the plan year and the date of distribution, counting the month of distribution if distribution occured after the 15th of such month.
		

		
			(B)Accounting for Excess Contributions – Excess contributions allocated to a participant shall be distributed from the participant's elective deferral account(s) and qualified employer matching contribution account (if applicable) in proportion to the participant's elective deferrals and qualified matching contributions (to the extent used in the ADP test) for the plan year.  Excess contributions shall be distributed from the participant's qualified nonelective contribution account only to the extent that such excess contributions exceed the amount of excess contributions in the participant's elective deferral account(s) and qualified matching contribution account.
		

		
			For plan years beginning after December 31, 2005, distribution of excess contributions for a year shall be made first from the participant's Roth elective deferral account, to the extent Roth elective deferrals were made for the year.  Excess elective deferrals shall only be distributed from the 401(k) elective deferral account after the Roth elective deferrals made for the year have been fully distributed.
		

		
			(C)Excess Contributions shall mean, with respect to any plan year, the excess of:  (i) The aggregate amount of employer contributions actually taken into account in computing the ADP of highly compensated employees for such plan year, over (ii) The maximum amount of such contributions permitted by the ADP test (determined by hypothetically reducing contributions made on behalf of highly compensated employees in order of the ADPs, beginning with the highest of such percentages).
		

		
			Such determination shall be made after first determining excess elective deferrals pursuant to Section 5.5(a).
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries44

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(c)(1)Limitations on Employee and Matching Contributions Under Code Section 401(m)
		

		
			The actual contribution percentage (hereinafter "ACP") for a plan year for participants who are highly compensated employees for the plan year and the prior year's ACP for participants who were nonhighly compensated employees for the prior plan year must satisfy one of the following tests:  (i) The ACP for a plan year for participants who are highly compensated employees for the plan year shall not exceed the prior year's ACP for participants who were nonhighly compensated employees for the prior plan year multiplied by 1.25; or (ii) The ACP for a plan year for participants who are highly compensated employees for the plan year shall not exceed the prior year's ACP for participants who were nonhighly compensated employees for the prior plan year multiplied by 2.0, provided that the ACP for participants who are highly compensated employees does not exceed the ACP for participants who were nonhighly compensated employees in the prior plan year by more than two  percentage points.
		

		
			In place of the prior year testing method described above, if so elected by the employer and adopted in Section 3.6, the ACP tests in (i) and (ii) will be applied by comparing the current plan year's ACP for participants who are highly compensated employees with the current plan year's ACP for participants who are nonhighly compensated employees.  In the alternative, the plan may satisfy the ACP test requirements by meeting the safe harbor requirements of Section 5.5(f)(3) and (4).  Election of this method shall be treated as an election to use the current year testing method.  In such a plan year, the current year testing method shall be used for the purpose of testing any employee nondeductible contributions.  Once the current year testing method election has been made, the employer can elect prior year testing for a plan year only if the plan has used current year testing for each of the preceding 5 plan years (or if lesser, the number of plan years the plan has been in existence) or if, as a result of a merger or acquisition described in Code section 410(b)(6)(c)(i), the employer maintains both a plan using prior year testing and a plan using current year testing and the change is made within the transition period described in section 410(b)(6)(c)(ii).  Such elections shall be reflected in Section 3.6.
		

		
			(A)Special Rules for Limitations Under Code Section 401(m)
		

		
			(i)A participant is a highly compensated employee for a particular plan year if he meets the definition of a highly compensated employee in effect for that plan year.  A participant is a nonhighly compensated employee for a particular plan year if he does not meet the definition of a highly compensated employee in effect for that plan year.
		

		
			(ii)For purposes of this Section 5.5(c)(1), the contribution percentage for any participant who is a highly compensated employee and who is eligible to have contribution percentage amounts allocated to his account under two or more plans described in Code section 401(a), or arrangements described in Code section 401(k) that are maintained by the employer, shall be determined as if the total of such contribution percentage amounts were made under each plan and arrangement.  If a highly compensated employee participates in two or more such plans or cash or deferred arrangements that have different plan years, all contribution percentage amounts made during the plan year for this plan under all such plans and arrangements shall be aggregated.  For plan years beginning before January 1, 2006, all such plans and cash or deferred arrangements ending with or within the same calendar year shall be treated as a single arrangement.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, certain plans shall be treated as separate if mandatorily disaggregated under regulations under Code section 401(m).
		

		
			(iii)In the event that this plan satisfies the requirements of Code sections 401(m), 401(a)(4) or 410(b) only if aggregated with one or more other plans, or if one or more other plans satisfy the requirements of such sections only if aggregated with this plan, then this Section 5.5(c)(1) shall be applied by determining the ACP of employees as if all such plans were a single plan.  If more than 10% of the employer's nonhighly compensated employees are involved in a plan coverage change as defined in Regulation section 1.401(m)-2(c)(4), then any adjustments to the nonhighly compensated employees' ACP for the prior year shall be made in accordance with such regulation, unless the employer has elected in Section 3.6 to use the current year testing method.  Plans may be aggregated in order to satisfy Code section 401(m) only if they have the same plan year and use the same ACP testing method.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries45

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(iv)If:  (A) this plan is not a successor plan (as defined in Regulation section 1.401(m)-2(c)(2)(iii)) and (B) this plan is not aggregated under Regulation section 1.401(m)-1(b)(4) for such plan year with any other plan that was or that included a Code section 401(m) plan in the prior year; then, in the case of the first plan year this plan permits any participant to make employee contributions, provides for matching contributions, or both, the amount treated as the ACP for participants who are nonhighly compensated employees for the prior plan year shall be 3% or, if the employer so elects, the ACP for participants who are nonhighly compensated employees as calculated for such first plan year.  Such election shall be set forth in Section 3.6.
		

		
			(v)For purposes of determining the ACP test, employee contributions are considered to have been made in the plan year in which contributed to the trust.  Matching contributions and qualified nonelective contributions will be considered made for a plan year if made no later than the end of the twelve-month period beginning on the day after the close of the plan year.
		

		
			When the prior year testing method is used, qualified nonelective contributions shall not be taken into account.
		

		
			(vi)The plan administrator shall maintain records sufficient to demonstrate satisfaction of the ACP test and the amount of qualified nonelective contributions or qualified matching contributions, or both, used in such test.
		

		
			(vii)Elective deferral contributions may be taken into account; however, the ADP test shall be met before any elective deferrals are used in the ACP test and the elective deferrals needed to meet the ADP test shall not be used to meet the ACP test.  When the current year testing method is used, qualified nonelective contributions shall be taken into account to the extent such contributions are not used to meet the ADP test.
		

		
			(viii)Effective for plan years beginning on or after January 1, 2006, a matching contribution with respect to an elective deferral for a nonhighly compensated employee shall not be taken into account under the ACP test to the extent it exceeds the greatest of:  (A) 5% of compensation; (B) the employee's elective deferrals for a year; and (C) the product of 2 times the plan's representative matching rate and the employee's elective deferrals for a year.  For this purpose, the plan's representative matching rate is the lowest matching rate for any eligible nonhighly compensated employee among a group of nonhighly compensated employees that consists of half of all eligible nonhighly compensated employees in the plan for the plan year who make elective deferrals for the plan year (or, if greater, the lowest matching rate for all eligible nonhighly compensated employees in the plan who are employed by the employer on the last day of the plan year and who make elective deferrals for the plan year).
		

		
			The matching rate for an employee generally is the matching contributions made for such employee divided by his elective deferrals (and employee nondeductible contributions) for the year.  If the matching rate is not the same for all levels of his elective deferrals (and employee nondeductible contributions), the employee's matching rate is determined assuming that his elective deferrals are equal to 6% of compensation.
		

		
			(ix)Applicable limitations when testing changes from current year testing to prior year testing:  The ACP for the prior plan year shall be determined taking into account only:  (A) employee contributions for nonhighly compensated employees made for the prior plan year, (B) matching contributions for nonhighly compensated employees that were taken into account for purposes of the ACP test in the prior plan year under the current plan year testing method, and (C) qualified nonelective contributions not previously taken into account under either the ADP or ACP test.
		

		
			(x)The determination and treatment of the ACP amounts of any participant shall satisfy such other requirements as may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.
		

		
			(B)Definitions (Code Section 401(m) Limitations)
		

		
			(i)Actual Contribution Percentage (ACP) shall mean, for a specified group of participants (either highly compensated employees or nonhighly compensated employees) for a plan year, the average of the contribution percentages of the eligible participants in the group.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries46

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(ii)Contribution Percentage shall mean the ratio (expressed as a percentage calculated to the nearest hundredth of a percentage point) of the participant's contribution percentage amounts to the participant's compensation as defined in Section 1.2(e).
		

		
			(iii)Contribution Percentage Amounts shall mean the sum of the employee nondeductible contributions, employer matching contributions and elective deferrals (to the extent not taken into account for purposes of the ADP test) made under the plan on behalf of the participant for the plan year.  Such contribution percentage amounts shall not include matching contributions that are forfeited either to correct excess aggregate contributions or because the contributions to which they relate are excess deferrals, excess contributions, or excess aggregate contributions.  Qualified nonelective contributions may be included in the contribution percentage amounts.  Elective deferrals may also be used in calculating the contribution percentage amounts so long as the ADP test is met before the elective deferrals are used in the ACP test and the ADP test continues to be met following the exclusion of those elective deferrals that are used to meet the ACP test.  The contribution percentage amounts shall be calculated to the nearest hundredth of a percentage point.
		

		
			(iv)Eligible Participant shall mean any employee who is eligible to make an employee nondeductible contribution, or an elective deferral (if the employer takes such contributions into account in the calculation of the contribution percentage), or to receive an employer matching contribution (including forfeitures).  If an employee nondeductible contribution is required as a condition of participation in the plan, any employee who would be a participant in the plan if such employee made such a contribution shall be treated as an eligible participant on behalf of whom no employee contributions are made.
		

		
			(v)Employee Nondeductible Contribution (or employee contribution) shall mean any contribution (other than Roth elective deferrals) made under Section 3.5 to the plan by or on behalf of a participant that is included in the participant's gross income in the year in which made and that is maintained under a separate account to which earnings and losses are allocated.
		

		
			(vi)Matching Contribution shall mean an employer contribution made to this or any other defined contribution plan on behalf of a participant on account of an employee nondeductible contribution made by such participant, or on account of a participant's elective deferral, under a plan maintained by the employer.
		

		
			(2)Distribution of Excess Aggregate Contributions
		

		
			Notwithstanding any other provision of this plan, excess aggregate contributions, plus any income and minus any loss allocable thereto, shall be forfeited, if forfeitable, or if not forfeitable, distributed no later than the last day of each plan year to participants to whose accounts such excess aggregate contributions were allocated for the preceding plan year.  Excess aggregate contributions shall be allocated to the highly compensated employees with the largest contribution dollar amounts taken into account in calculating the ACP test for the plan year in which the excess arose, beginning with the highly compensated employee with the largest dollar amount of such contributions and continuing in descending order until all of the excess aggregate contributions have been allocated.  If such excess aggregate contributions are distributed more than 21⁄2 months after the last day of the plan year in which such excess amounts arose, a 10% excise tax will be imposed on the employer maintaining the plan with respect to those amounts.  Notwithstanding the preceding, the excise tax will not be imposed if the distribution is made within 6 months after the last day of such plan year if the plan is an eligible automatic contribution arrangement within the meaning of Code section 414(w) that covers all eligible nonhighly compensated employees and highly compensated employees for the entire portion of the plan year for which they are eligible and provides the notice described in Section 5.5(f)(4) even after an affirmative deferral election has been made.  Excess aggregate contributions shall be treated as annual additions under the plan even if distributed.
		

		
			(A)Determination of Income or Loss – Excess aggregate contributions shall be adjusted for any income or loss.  For plan years beginning on or after January 1, 2008, the income or loss allocable to excess aggregate contributions allocated to each participant is the income or loss allocable to the participant's employee nondeductible contribution account, employer matching contribution account (if any, and if all amounts therein are not used in the ADP test) and, if applicable, qualified nonelective contribution account and elective deferral account(s) for the plan 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries47

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		year multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is such participant's excess aggregate contributions for the year and the denominator is the participant's account balance(s) attributable to contribution percentage amounts without regard to any income or loss occurring during such plan year.  Effective solely for the plan year beginning on or after January 1, 2006 and the plan year beginning on or after January 1, 2007, and to the extent the excess contributions were credited with gain or loss as of an accounting date within the gap period (i.e., the period after the close of the plan year and prior to the distribution), allocable income or loss also includes 10% of the amount determined under the preceding sentence multiplied by the number of whole calendar months between the end of the plan year and the date of distribution, counting the month of distribution if distribution occured after the 15th of such month.
		

		
			(B)Forfeitures of Excess Aggregate Contributions – Forfeitures of excess aggregate matching contributions may either be reallocated to the accounts of nonhighly compensated employees or applied to reduce employer contributions, as provided in Section 3.6(e).
		

		
			(C)Accounting for Excess Aggregate Contributions – Excess aggregate contributions allocated to a participant shall be forfeited, if forfeitable or distributed on a pro-rata basis from the participant's employee nondeductible contribution account and employer matching contribution account (and, if applicable, the participant's qualified nonelective contribution account or elective deferral account(s), or both).  For plan years beginning after December 31, 2005, distribution of elective deferrals that are excess aggregate contributions shall be made first from the participant's Roth elective deferral account, to the extent Roth elective deferrals were made for the year.  Excess aggregate elective deferrals shall only be distributed from the 401(k) elective deferral account after the Roth elective deferrals made for the year have been fully distributed.
		

		
			(D)Excess Aggregate Contributions shall mean, with respect to any plan year, the excess of:  (i) The aggregate contribution percentage amounts taken into account in computing the numerator of the contribution percentage actually made on behalf of highly compensated employees for such plan year, over (ii) The maximum contribution percentage amounts permitted by the ACP test (determined by hypothetically reducing contributions made on behalf of highly compensated employees in order of their contribution percentages beginning with the highest of such percentages).
		

		
			Such determination shall be made after first determining excess elective deferrals pursuant to Section 5.5(a) and then determining excess contributions pursuant to Section 5.5(b)(2).
		

		
			(3)Required Forfeitures – Any employer matching contribution attributable to an excess elective deferral determined pursuant to Section 5.5(a) or an excess contribution determined pursuant to Section 5.5(b)(2) shall be forfeited.  Any nonvested excess aggregate contribution determined pursuant to Section 5.5(c)(2) shall also be forfeited.
		

		
			(d)Top-Heavy Requirements
		

		
			Elective deferrals (and for plan years beginning before January 1, 2002 employer matching contributions) will not be taken into account for the purpose of satisfying the minimum top-heavy contribution requirement.  However, qualified nonelective contributions and employer matching contributions (for plan years beginning on or after January 1, 2002) may be taken into account for this purpose as provided in Section 3.2(c) or 3.3(b), as appropriate.
		

		
			(e)Restrictions on Payment of Certain Accounts
		

		
			Elective deferrals, qualified nonelective contributions, and qualified matching contributions, and income allocable to each are not distributable to a participant or his beneficiary in accordance with such person's election, earlier than upon the participant's severance from employment, death, or disability.  All distributions that may be made pursuant to one or more of the distributable events described in this Section 5.5(e) are subject to the spousal and participant consent requirements as described in Section 5.2(a).
		

		
			Such account balances may also be distributed upon:
		

		
			(1)Termination of the plan without the employer maintaining or establishing another defined contribution plan (other than an employee stock ownership plan (as defined in Code section 4975(e)(7) or 409(a)), a simplified employee pension plan (as defined in Code section 408(k)), a SIMPLE IRA plan (as defined in Code section 408(p)), a plan or contract 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries48

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		described in Code section 403(b) or a plan described in Code section 457(b) or (f)) at any time during the period beginning on the date of plan termination and ending 12 months after all assets have been distributed from the plan.  Such a distribution must be made in a lump sum or through the purchase of an annuity contract that shall be owned by the participant (if an annuity payment option is otherwise available under Section 4.3(b)).
		

		
			(2)The attainment of age 591⁄2 in the case of a profit sharing plan.
		

		
			(3)The hardship of the participant as described in Section 4.4(a).
		

		
			(f)Safe Harbor Alternative Compliance
		

		
			(1)If the plan so provides in Section 3.4(a) or Section 3.6 that the safe harbor requirements will be met, the provisions of this Section 5.5(f) shall apply for the plan year as provided in such Sections and any provisions relating to the ADP test described in Section 5.5(b) or the ACP test described in Section 5.5(c) shall not apply.  To the extent that any other provision of the plan is inconsistent with the provisions of this Section 5.5(f), the provisions of this Section 5.5(f) shall govern when Section 3.4(a) or Section 3.6 so provide.  In accordance with Regulation sections 1.401(k)-1(e)(7) and 1.401(m)-1(c)(2), it is impermissible for the employer to use ADP and ACP testing for a plan year in which it is intended for the plan through its written terms to be a Code section 401(k) safe harbor plan and a Code section 401(m) safe harbor plan and the employer fails to satisfy the requirements of such safe harbors for the plan year.
		

		
			(2)ADP Test Safe Harbor Contributions – The plan may provide in Section 3.4(a) that the ADP test safe harbor requirements shall be satisfied by the employer making a safe harbor employer matching contribution as provided under Section 3.6 (or as a separate safe harbor employer matching contribution as provided under Section 3.6A) or by the employer making a safe harbor nonelective contribution of at least 3% of the employee's compensation under Section 3.3 or another defined contribution plan sponsored by the employer.  In any case, the notice described in Section 5.5(f)(4) shall be given.  The participant's accrued benefit derived from ADP test safe harbor contributions shall be nonforfeitable and may not be distributed earlier than provided in Section 5.5(e), regardless of the form of the contribution.
		

		
			If the plan provides in Section 3.4(a) that the safe harbor nonelective contribution will be made in satisfaction of the qualified automatic contribution arrangement requirements, the contribution shall be held under the safe harbor qualified automatic contribution arrangement sub-account.  Such account shall not become 100% vested until the participant has completed 2 years of vesting service.  Any forfeiture therefrom shall be used to reduce the employer’s safe harbor contribution.
		

		
			(3)ACP Test Safe Harbor Requirements – The plan may provide in Section 3.6 that the ACP test safe harbor requirements shall be satisfied by the employer making a safe harbor nonelective contribution under Section 3.3 of at least 3% of the employee's compensation or by the employer making a matching contribution on behalf of each eligible employee that either:
		

		
			(A)is equal to 100% of the elective contributions of the employee to the extent such elective contributions do not exceed 3% of the employee's compensation, plus 50% of the elective contributions of the employee to the extent that such elective contributions exceed 3% but do not exceed 5% of the employee's compensation; or 
		

		
			(B)does not increase as an employee's rate of elective contributions increase and the aggregate amount of which is at least equal to the aggregate amount of matching contributions which would be made if matching contributions were made on the basis of the percentages described in Section 5.5(f)(3)(A).
		

		
			If the plan provides in Section 3.4(a) and Section 3.6(b)(2) that the safe harbor matching contribution will be made in satisfaction of the qualified automatic contribution arrangement requirements, in place of the matching contribution formula described in Section 5.5(f)(3)(A), the employer shall contribute an amount equal to 100% of the elective contributions of the employee to the extent such elective contributions do not exceed 1% of the employee's compensation, plus 50% of the elective contributions of the employee to the extent that such elective contributions exceed 1% but do not exceed 6% of the employee's compensation.
		

		
			In any case, the notice described in Section 5.5(f)(4) shall be given and matching contributions on behalf of any employee shall not be made with respect to an employee's nondeductible contributions 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries49

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		or elective deferrals in excess of 6% of the employee's compensation.  The rate of an employer's matching contribution shall not increase as the rate of an employee's nondeductible contributions or elective deferrals increase nor shall the matching contribution with respect to any highly compensated employee be greater than that with respect to a nonhighly compensated employee.
		

		
			(4)Safe Harbor Notice – If the employer elects to satisfy the safe harbor requirements of this Section 5.5(f) or if the employer wishes to take advantage of the 3.5 month extension for the return of excess contributions and excess aggregate contributions, the plan administrator shall provide to each employee eligible to participate in the plan, no less than 30 days and no more than 90 days prior to any plan year (or his entry date in the case of a new participant), written notice of the employee's rights and obligations under the plan that is sufficiently accurate and comprehensive to apprise the employee of such rights and obligations.  If an employee becomes eligible to participate after the 90th day before the beginning of the plan year and does not receive the notice for that reason, the notice must be provided no more than 90 days before the employee becomes eligible but not later than the date the employee becomes eligible.  This timing requirement shall be deemed satisfied in the case of a plan that provides for participation upon date of employment if the notice is provided as soon as practicable after that date but prior to the pay date for the first payroll period.
		

		
			Notwithstanding the preceding, where the plan is not intended to comply with either the ADP or ACP safe harbor requirements, but only the eligible automatic contribution arrangement requirements of Code section 414(w); the notice shall contain only the items listed in Section 5.5(f)(4)(A)(viii) through (xi).  If the employer wishes to take advantage of the 3.5 month extension for the return of excess contributions and excess aggregate contributions, then the notice shall be provided to all employees eligible to be covered by the plan.  Otherwise, after the initial notice is provided to all eligible employees who have not chosen to make 401(k) deferral contributions, no notice will be provided to employees who have made an affirmative election to defer or not to defer.
		

		
			(A)Contents of the Notice – Such notice shall be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the average employee eligible to participate hereunder.  The notice shall accurately describe:  (i) the safe harbor matching or nonelective contribution formula used under the plan (including a description of the levels of matching contributions, if any, available under the plan); (ii) any other contributions under the plan (including the potential for discretionary matching contributions) and the conditions under which such contributions are made; (iii) the plan to which safe harbor contributions will be made if such contributions will be made to another plan; (iv) the type and amount of compensation that may be deferred under the plan; (v) how to make cash or deferred elections, including any administrative requirements that apply to such elections; (vi) the periods available under the plan for making cash or deferred elections; (vii) withdrawal and vesting provisions applicable to contributions under the plan; (viii) the level of elective contributions that will be made on an employee’s behalf if he does not make an affirmative election; (ix) the employee's right under any automatic salary reduction contribution arrangement to elect not to have elective contributions made on the employee's behalf (or to elect to have such contributions made at a different percentage); (x) if the employee is eligible to make investment elections under Section 3.8, how contributions made under the arrangement will be invested in the absence of any investment election by the employee; and (xi) the employee's right to make a permissible withdrawal, if applicable, and the procedures to elect such a withdrawal.  If eligible employees have been provided with the current summary plan description, the written notice may instead cross-reference the relevant portion with respect to items (ii), (iii), and (iv); however, such notice must also provide the telephone numbers, addresses and, if applicable, electronic addresses, of the individuals or offices from whom employees can obtain additional information about the plan.
		

		
			(B)Alternative Timing of Amendment and Notice for Safe Harbor Nonelective Contribution – If an employer using the current year method to satisfy the ADP test determines that it may choose during a plan year to satisfy the ADP test safe harbor requirements by providing a safe harbor nonelective contribution, the plan administrator shall provide a written notice to eligible employees before the beginning of the plan year that (i) the plan may be amended during the plan year to provide that the employer will make a safe harbor nonelective contribution of at least 3% to the plan for the plan year and (ii) if the plan is so amended, a supplemental notice will be given to eligible employees 30 days prior to the last day of the plan year informing them of such an amendment.  If the employer elects during the plan year to satisfy the ADP test safe harbor requirements by providing a safe harbor nonelective contribution, the amendment shall be adopted not later than 30 days before the last day of the plan year.  The supplemental notice 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries50

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		shall be distributed no later than 30 days prior to the last day of the plan year and shall state that a 3% safe harbor nonelective contribution will be made for the plan year.
		

		
			 
		

		
			ARTICLE VI – ADMINISTRATION OF THE PLAN
		

		
			Section 6.1 – Fiduciary Responsibility
		

		
			(a)Fiduciary Standards – A fiduciary shall discharge his duties with respect to a plan solely in the interest of the participants and beneficiaries and – 
		

		
			For the exclusive purpose of providing benefits to participants and their beneficiaries and defraying reasonable expenses of administering the plan;
		

		
			With the care, skill, prudence, and diligence under the circumstances then prevailing that a prudent man acting in a like capacity and familiar with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a like character and with like aims;
		

		
			By diversifying the investments of the plan so as to minimize the risk of large losses, unless under the circumstances it is clearly prudent not to do so; and
		

		
			In accordance with the documents and instruments governing the plan insofar as such documents and instruments are consistent with the provisions of ERISA.
		

		
			(b)Allocation of Fiduciary Responsibility
		

		
			(1)It is intended to allocate to each fiduciary, either named or otherwise, the individual responsibility for the prudent execution of the functions assigned to him.  None of the allocated responsibilities or any other responsibilities shall be shared by two or more fiduciaries unless specifically provided for in the plan.
		

		
			(2)When one fiduciary is required to follow the directions of another fiduciary, the two fiduciaries shall not be deemed to share such responsibility.  Instead, the responsibility of the fiduciary giving the directions shall be deemed to be his sole responsibility and the responsibility of the fiduciary receiving directions shall be to follow those directions insofar as such instructions on their face are proper under applicable law.
		

		
			(3)Any person or group of persons may serve in more than one fiduciary capacity with respect to this plan.
		

		
			(4)A fiduciary under this plan may employ one or more persons, including independent accountants, attorneys and actuaries to render advice with regard to any responsibility such fiduciary has under the plan.
		

		
			(c)Indemnification by Employer – Unless resulting from the gross negligence, willful misconduct or lack of good faith on the part of a fiduciary who is an officer or employee of the employer, the employer shall indemnify and save harmless such fiduciary from, against, for and in respect of any and all damages, losses, obligations, liabilities, liens, deficiencies, costs and expenses, including without limitation, reasonable attorney's fees and other costs and expenses incident to any suit, action, investigation, claim or proceedings suffered in connection with his acting as a fiduciary under the plan.
		

		
			(d)Named Fiduciary – The person or persons named by the employer as having fiduciary responsibility for the management and control of plan assets shall be known as the "named fiduciary" hereunder.  Such responsibility shall include the appointment of the plan administrator (Section 6.2(a)) and the investment manager (Section 6.4(b)) and the deciding of benefit appeals (Section 6.3).  The employer shall retain the authority to appoint the trustee (Section 6.4(a)).  The named fiduciary possesses exclusive authority to monitor the plan’s receipt of contributions and enforce the collection of delinquent contributions to the trust.
		

		
			Section 6.2 – Plan Administrator
		

		
			(a)Appointment of Plan Administrator
		

		
			The named fiduciary shall appoint a plan administrator who may be a person or an administrative committee consisting of no more than five members.  Vacancies occurring upon resignation or removal of 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries51

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		a plan administrator or a committee member shall be filled promptly by the named fiduciary.  Any plan administrator may resign at any time by giving notice of his resignation to the named fiduciary, and any plan administrator may be removed at any time by the named fiduciary.  The named fiduciary shall review at regular intervals the performance of the plan administrator(s) and shall re-evaluate the appointment of such administrator(s).  After the named fiduciary has appointed the plan administrator and has received a written notice of acceptance, the fiduciary responsibility for administration of the plan shall be the responsibility of the plan administrator or plan administrative committee.
		

		
			(b)Duties and Powers of Plan Administrator
		

		
			The plan administrator shall have the following duties and discretionary powers and such other duties and discretionary powers as relate to the administration of the plan:
		

		
			(1)To determine in a nondiscriminatory manner all questions relating to the eligibility of employees to become participants.
		

		
			(2)To determine in a nondiscriminatory manner eligibility for benefits and to determine and certify the amount and kind of benefits payable to participants.
		

		
			(3)To authorize all disbursements from the fund.
		

		
			(4)To appoint or employ any independent person to perform necessary plan functions and to assist in the fulfillment of administrative responsibilities as he deems advisable, including the retention of a third party administrator, custodian, auditor, accountant, actuary, or attorney.
		

		
			(5)When appropriate, to select an insurance company and annuity contracts that, in his opinion, will best carry out the purposes of the plan.
		

		
			(6)To construe and interpret any ambiguities in the plan and to make, publish, interpret, alter, amend or revoke rules for the regulation of the plan that are consistent with the terms of the plan and with ERISA.
		

		
			(7)To prepare and distribute, in such manner as determined to be appropriate, information explaining the plan.
		

		
			(c)Allocation of Fiduciary Responsibility Within Plan Administrative Committee
		

		
			If the plan administrator is a plan administrative committee, the committee shall choose from its members a chairperson and a secretary.  The committee may allocate responsibility for those duties and powers listed in Section 6.2(b)(1) and (2) (except determination of qualification for disability retirement) and other purely ministerial duties to one or more members of the committee.  The committee shall review at regular intervals the performance of any committee member to whom fiduciary responsibility has been allocated and shall re-evaluate such allocation of responsibility.  After the plan administrative committee has made such allocations of responsibilities and has received written notice of acceptance, the fiduciary responsibilities for such administrative duties and powers shall then be considered as the responsibilities of such committee member(s).
		

		
			(d)Miscellaneous Provisions
		

		
			(1)Plan Administrative Committee Actions – The actions of such committee shall be determined by the vote or other affirmative expression of a majority of its members.  Either the chairperson or the secretary may execute any certificate or other written direction on behalf of the committee.  A member of the committee who is a participant shall not vote on any question relating specifically to himself.  If the remaining members of the committee, by majority vote thereof, are unable to come to a determination of any such question, the named fiduciary shall appoint a substitute member who shall act as a member of the committee for the special vote.
		

		
			(2)Expenses – The plan administrator shall serve without compensation for service as such.  All reasonable expenses of the plan administrator shall be paid by the employer or from the fund.
		

		
			(3)Examination of Records – The plan administrator shall make available to any participant for examination during business hours such of the plan records as pertain only to the participant involved.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries52

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(4)Information to the Plan Administrator – To enable the plan administrator to perform the administrative functions, the employer shall supply full and timely information to the plan administrator on all participants as the plan administrator may require.
		

		
			Section 6.3 – Claims Procedure
		

		
			(a)Notification of Claim Determination – The plan administrator shall notify each participant in writing of his determination of benefits.  If the plan administrator denies any benefit, such written denial shall include:
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			The specific reasons for denial;

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Reference to provisions on which the denial is based;

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A description of and reason for any additional information needed to process the claim; and

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			A description of the plan’s review procedures and the time limits applicable to such procedures, including a statement of the claimant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA section 502(a) following an adverse benefit determination on review. 

		
			If a claim is wholly or partially denied, the plan administrator shall notify the claimant of the plan's adverse benefit determination within a reasonable period of time, but not later than 90 days after receipt of the claim by the plan, unless the plan administrator determines that special circumstances require an extension of time for processing the claim.  If the plan administrator determines that an extension of time for processing is required, written notice of the extension shall be furnished to the claimant prior to the termination of the initial 90‐day period.  In no event shall such extension exceed a period of 90 days from the end of such initial period.  The extension notice shall indicate the special circumstances requiring an extension of time and the date by which the plan expects to render the benefit determination.
		

		
			(b)Appeal – The participant or his duly authorized representative may:
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Make a written request for a review of the participant's case by the named fiduciary;

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Review upon request and free of charge, have reasonable access to, and have copies of, all documents, records, and other information relevant to the claimant's claim for benefits;

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Submit written issues, comments, documents, records, and other information relating to the claim for benefits, without regard to whether such information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.

		
			The written request for review must be submitted no later than 60 days after receiving written notification of denial of benefits.  A document, record, or other information shall be considered relevant to a claimant's claim if such document, record, or other information:
		

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Was relied upon in making the benefit determination;

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Was submitted, considered, or generated in the course of making the benefit determination, without regard to whether such document, record, or other information was relied upon in making the benefit determination; or

			
	
			
				 ·
			

			
	
			
			Demonstrates compliance with the administrative processes and safeguards required by law in making the benefit determination.

		
			(c)Appeal Procedure
		

		
			(1)Except as provided in Section 6.3(c)(2), the named fiduciary must render a decision no later than 60 days after receiving the written request for review, unless circumstances make it impossible to do so; but in no event shall the decision be rendered later than 120 days after the request for review is received.  If the named fiduciary determines that an extension of time for processing is required, written notice of the extension shall be furnished to the claimant by the plan administrator prior to the termination of the initial 60-day period.  The extension notice shall indicate the special circumstances requiring an extension of time and the date by which the plan expects to render the determination on review.
		

		
			(2)If the named fiduciary is a committee or board of trustees that holds regularly scheduled meetings at least quarterly, Section 6.3(c)(1) shall not apply.  The named fiduciary shall instead make a benefit determination no later than the date of the meeting of the committee or board that immediately follows 
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries53

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		the plan's receipt of a request for review, unless the request for review is filed within 30 days preceding the date of such meeting.  In such case, a benefit determination may be made by no later than the date of the second meeting following the plan's receipt of the request for review.  If special circumstances require a further extension of time for processing, a benefit determination shall be rendered not later than the third meeting of the committee or board following the plan's receipt of the request for review.  If such an extension of time for review is required because of special circumstances, the plan administrator shall provide the claimant with written notice of the extension, describing the special circumstances and the date as of which the benefit determination will be made, prior to the commencement of the extension.  The plan administrator shall notify the claimant of the benefit determination as soon as possible, but not later than 5 days after the benefit determination is made.
		

		
			(3)The review shall take into account all comments, documents, records, and other information submitted by the claimant relating to the claim, without regard to whether such information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.  If the claim is denied upon review, the written notice of denial shall include the items listed in Section 6.3(a) and the statement required by Regulation section 2560.503‐1(j)(5)(iii) regarding the possible availability of alternative dispute resolution options.
		

		
			(d)Limitation on Time Period for Litigation of a Benefit Claim – Following receipt of the written rendering of the named fiduciary's decision under Section 6.3(c), the participant shall have 365 days in which to file suit in the appropriate court.  Thereafter, the right to contest the decision shall be waived.
		

		
			Section 6.4 – Trust Fund
		

		
			(a)Appointment of Trustee
		

		
			The employer shall appoint a trustee for the proper care and custody of all funds, securities and other properties in the trust, and for investment of plan assets (or for execution of such orders as it receives from an investment manager appointed for investment of plan assets).  The duties and powers of the trustee shall be set forth in a trust agreement executed by the employer, which is incorporated herein by reference.  The named fiduciary shall review at regular intervals the performance of the trustee and shall re-evaluate the appointment of such trustee.  After the employer has appointed the trustee and the named fiduciary has received a written notice of acceptance of its responsibility, the fiduciary responsibility with respect to the proper care and custody of plan assets shall be considered as the responsibility of the trustee.  Unless otherwise allocated to an investment manager, the fiduciary responsibility with respect to investment of plan assets shall likewise be considered as the responsibility of the trustee.
		

		
			(b)Appointment of Investment Manager
		

		
			The named fiduciary may appoint an investment manager who is other than the trustee, which investment manager may be a bank or an investment advisor registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Investment Advisors Act of 1940.  Such investment manager, if appointed, shall have sole discretion in the investment of plan assets, subject to the funding policy.  The named fiduciary shall review at regular intervals no less frequently than annually, the performance of such investment manager and shall re-evaluate the appointment of such investment manager.  After the named fiduciary has appointed an investment manager and has received a written notice of acceptance of its responsibility, the fiduciary responsibility with respect to investment of plan assets shall be considered as the responsibility of the investment manager.
		

		
			(c)Funding Policy
		

		
			The named fiduciary shall determine and communicate in writing to the fiduciary responsible for investment of plan assets the funding policy for the plan.  The funding policy shall set forth the plan's short-range and long-range financial needs, so that said fiduciary may coordinate the investment of plan assets with the plan's financial needs.
		

		
			(d)Valuation of the Fund
		

		
			The fund shall be valued by the trustee on the last day of each plan year and as of any interim allocation date determined by the plan administrator.  The valuation shall be made on the basis of the current fair market value of all property in the fund.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries54

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(e)Expenses
		

		
			The trust fund may pay the expenses incurred in the administration of the plan and the investment of the fund, provided the cost is reasonable.  Such expenses shall include legal fees incurred by the plan administrator or the trustee, provided such fiduciaries are not proven to have committed a prohibited transaction.  If the trust fund pays the expenses, the expenses shall be allocated against the participant accounts on a pro rata basis, unless otherwise specifically provided in the summary plan description.  Certain expenses incurred with respect to a particular participant or beneficiary may be allocated against the participant's account on a direct basis.  The plan administrator shall communicate such expense charges to the participant through a written notice. 
		

		
			 
		

		
			ARTICLE VII – AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION OF PLAN
		

		
			Section 7.1 – Right to Discontinue and Amend
		

		
			It is the expectation of the employer that it will continue this plan indefinitely and make the payments of its contributions hereunder, but the continuance of the plan is not assumed as a contractual obligation of the employer and the right is reserved by the employer, at any time, to reduce, suspend or discontinue its contributions hereunder.
		

		
			Section 7.2 – Amendments
		

		
			Except as herein limited, the employer shall have the right to amend this plan at any time to any extent that it may deem advisable.  Such amendment shall be stated in writing.  It shall be authorized by action of the board of directors under the corporate by-laws if the employer is a corporation, by action of the agreement of the partners as required under the partnership agreement if the employer is a partnership, or by action of the sole proprietor if the employer is a sole proprietorship.  The authorization of an employer's board of directors shall designate the person to execute the amendment.
		

		
			The employer's right to amend the plan shall be limited as follows:
		

		
			(a)No amendment shall increase the duties or liabilities of the plan administrator, the trustee, or other fiduciary without their respective written consent.
		

		
			(b)No amendments shall have the effect of vesting in the employer any interest in or control over any contracts issued pursuant hereto or any other property in the fund.
		

		
			(c)No amendment to the plan shall be effective to the extent that it has the effect of decreasing a participant's accrued benefit.  This includes a plan amendment that decreases a participant’s accrued benefit, or otherwise places greater restrictions or conditions on a participant’s rights to Code section 411(d)(6) protected benefits, even if the amendment merely adds a restriction or condition that is permitted under the vesting rules in Code section 411(a)(3) through (11).  Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, a participant's account balance may be reduced to the extent permitted under Code section 412(d)(2) or to the extent permitted under Regulation sections 1.411(d)-3 and 1.411(d)-4.  For purposes of this paragraph, a plan amendment that has the effect of decreasing a participant's account balance, with respect to benefits attributable to service before the amendment shall be treated as reducing an accrued benefit.  Furthermore, if the vesting schedule of a plan is amended, in the case of an employee who is a participant as of the later of the date such amendment is adopted or the date it becomes effective, the nonforfeitable percentage (determined as of such date) of such employee's right to his employer-derived accrued benefit will not be less than his percentage computed under the plan without regard to such amendment.
		

		
			(d)No amendment to the plan shall be effective to eliminate or restrict an optional form of benefit.  The preceding sentence shall not apply to a plan amendment that eliminates or restricts the ability of a participant to receive payment of his or her account balance under a particular optional form of benefit if the amendment provides a single-sum distribution form that is otherwise identical to the optional form of benefit being eliminated or restricted.  For this purpose, a single-sum distribution form is otherwise identical only if the single-sum distribution form is identical in all respects to the eliminated or restricted optional form of benefit (or would be identical except that it provides greater rights to the participant) except with respect to the timing of payments after commencement.
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries55

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(e)No amendment to the vesting schedule adopted by the employer hereunder shall deprive a participant of his vested portion of his employer contribution accounts to the date of such amendment.  If the plan's vesting schedule is amended, or the plan is amended in any way that directly or indirectly affects the computation of the participant's nonforfeitable percentage or if the plan is deemed amended by an automatic change to or from a top-heavy vesting schedule, each participant with at least 3 years of service with the employer may elect, within a reasonable period after the adoption of the amendment or change, to have the nonforfeitable percentage computed under the plan without regard to such amendment or change.  For participants who do not have at least one hour of service in any plan year beginning after December 31, 1988, "5 years of service" shall be substituted for "3 years of service" in the preceding sentence.  The period during which the election may be made shall commence with the date the amendment is adopted or deemed to be made and shall end on the latest of:
		

		
			(1)60 days after the amendment is adopted;
		

		
			(2)60 days after the amendment becomes effective; or 
		

		
			(3)60 days after the participant is issued written notice of the amendment by the employer or plan administrator.
		

		
			Section 7.3 – Protection of Benefits in Case of Plan Merger
		

		
			In the event of a merger or consolidation with, or transfer of assets or liabilities to any other plan, each participant will receive a benefit immediately after such merger, consolidation or transfer (if the plan then terminated) that is at least equal to the benefit the participant was entitled to immediately before such merger, consolidation or transfer (if the plan had terminated).
		

		
			Effective October 1, 2008, the transfer of amounts from this trust to a nonqualified foreign trust shall be treated as a distribution from this plan.  Further, the transfer of assets and liabilities from this plan to a plan that satisfies Puerto Rico Code section 1165 shall also be treated as a distribution from this plan.
		

		
			Section 7.4 – Termination of Plan
		

		
			(a)When Plan Terminates – This plan shall terminate upon the happening of any of the following events:  legal adjudication of the employer as bankrupt; a general assignment by the employer to or for the benefit of its creditors; the legal dissolution of the employer; or termination of the plan by the employer.
		

		
			(b)Allocation of Assets – Upon termination, partial termination, or complete discontinuance of employer contributions, the account balance(s) of each affected participant who is an active participant or who is not an active participant but has neither received a complete distribution of his vested accrued benefit nor incurred five one-year breaks in service (as defined in Section 4.1) shall be 100% vested and nonforfeitable.  The amount of the fund assets shall be allocated to each participant, subject to provisions for expenses of administration of the liquidation, in the ratio that such participant's account(s) bears to all accounts.  If a participant under this plan has terminated his employment at any time after the first day of the plan year in which the employer made his final contribution to the plan, and if any portion of any account of such terminated participant was forfeited and reallocated to the remaining participants, such forfeiture shall be reversed and the forfeited amount shall be credited to the account of such terminated participant.
		

		
			 
		

		
			ARTICLE VIII – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
		

		
			Section 8.1 – Exclusive Benefit – Non-Reversion
		

		
			The plan is created for the exclusive benefit of the employees of the employer and shall be interpreted in a manner consistent with its being a qualified plan as defined in section 401(a) of the Internal Revenue Code and with ERISA.  The corpus or income of the trust may not be diverted to or used for other than the exclusive benefit of the participants or their beneficiaries (except for defraying reasonable expenses of administering the plan).
		

		
			Notwithstanding the above, a contribution paid by the employer to the trust may be repaid to the employer under the following circumstances:
		

		

		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries56

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		(a)Any contribution made by the employer because of a mistake of fact must be returned to the employer within one year of the contribution.
		

		
			(b)In the event the deduction of a contribution made by the employer is disallowed under Code section 404, such contribution (to the extent disallowed) must be returned to the employer within one year of the disallowance of the deduction.
		

		
			(c)If the Commissioner of Internal Revenue determines that the plan is not initially qualified under the Internal Revenue Code, any contribution made incident to that initial qualification by the employer must be returned to the employer within one year after the date the initial qualification is denied, but only if the application for the qualification is made by the time prescribed by law for filing the employer's return for the taxable year in which the plan is adopted, or such later date as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe.
		

		
			Section 8.2 – Inalienability of Benefits
		

		
			No benefit or interest available hereunder including any annuity contract distributed herefrom shall be subject to assignment or alienation, either voluntarily or involuntarily.  The preceding sentence shall also apply to the creation, assignment, or recognition of a right to any benefit payable with respect to a participant pursuant to a domestic relations order, unless such order is determined to be a qualified domestic relations order as defined in Code section 414(p), or any domestic relations order entered before January 1, 1985.  A loan made to a participant and secured by his nonforfeitable account balance(s) under Section 4.4(b) will not be treated as an assignment or alienation and such securing account balance(s) shall be subject to attachment by the plan in the event of default.
		

		
			Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, effective with respect to judgments, orders, and decrees issued, and settlement agreements entered into, on or after August 5, 1997, a participant’s benefit (and that of his spouse) shall be reduced to satisfy liabilities of the participant to the plan due to (1) the participant being convicted of committing a crime involving the plan, (2) a civil judgment (or consent order or decree) entered by a court in an action brought in connection with a violation of the fiduciary provisions of part 4 of subtitle B of Title I of ERISA, or (3) a settlement agreement between the Secretary of Labor or the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation and the participant in connection with a violation of such fiduciary provisions of ERISA.  No reduction shall be made pursuant to this paragraph, unless the judgment, order, decree, or settlement agreement shall expressly provide for the offset of all or part of the amount ordered or required to be paid to the Plan against the participant’s benefits provided under the Plan.
		

		
			Section 8.3 – Employer-Employee Relationship
		

		
			This plan is not to be construed as creating or changing any contract of employment between the employer and its employees, and the employer retains the right to deal with its employees in the same manner as though this plan had not been created.
		

		
			Section 8.4 – Binding Agreement
		

		
			This plan shall be binding on the heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns as such terms may be applicable to any or all parties hereto, and on any participants, present or future.
		

		
			Section 8.5 – Separability
		

		
			If any provision of this plan shall be held invalid or unenforceable, such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect any other provision hereof and this plan shall be construed and enforced as if such provision had not been included.
		

		
			Section 8.6 – Construction
		

		
			The plan shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the state in which the employer was incorporated (or is domiciled in the case of an unincorporated employer) and with ERISA.
		

		
			Section 8.7 – Copies of Plan
		

		
			This plan may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be deemed as an original, and said counterparts shall constitute but one and the same instrument that may be sufficiently evidenced by any one counterpart.
		

		
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries57

		

 

		

			

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		Section 8.8 – Interpretation
		

		
			Wherever appropriate, words used in this plan in the singular may include the plural or the plural may be read as singular, and the masculine may include the feminine.
		

		
			 
		

		
			
		

		 

		

			316_W969:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries58

		

 

		

			 

		

		
		

		
			 
		

		

		

		 

		

			 

		

		

			Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan

		

		 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			 
		

		
			
		

		
			The Internal Revenue Service has issued an advisory letter with respect to the volume submitter specimen plan (VS) sponsored by Conrad Siegel Actuaries from which this plan was created.  This letter constitutes a determination as to the qualification of the plan as adopted by a particular employer only under the circumstances, and to the extent, described herein.  An employer adopting a VS plan may rely on that plan's advisory letter if the employer's plan is identical to an approved specimen plan with a currently valid favorable advisory letter, the employer has not amended the plan other than to choose options provided under the approved plan or to adopt compliance amendments provided by the sponsor, and the employer has followed the terms of the plan.  Such an employer can forego filing Form 5307 and can rely on the plan's favorable advisory letter with respect to the qualification requirements, except with respect to the plan’s satisfaction of the nondiscrimination requirements where a safe harbor provision has not been adopted.  The advisory letter does not constitute a ruling or determination as to the exempt status of the related trust.
		

		
			2015 COMPLIANCE AMENDMENT
TO THE
Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan
		

		
			As authorized by Section 7.2 of the Weis Markets, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan ("Plan") as amended and restated effective January 1, 2015, the employer, Weis Markets, Inc.,  hereby amends the Plan to comply with certain law and regulatory changes effective as of the 2015 plan year not otherwise incorporated into the Plan.  This amendment shall supersede the provisions of the Plan to the extent those provisions are inconsistent with the provisions of this amendment.    The employer hereby amends the Plan in the following manner:
		

			
	
			
				 First:
			Spouse

		
			Effective as of June 26, 2013, in response to the overturning of the Defense of Marriage Act, 110 Stat. 2419, section 3 by the Supreme Court in United States v. Windsor, Section 1.7(c) is amended to redefine "spouse" for purposes of the Plan and to reference the marriage certificate as evidence of marriage.  As amended, Section 1.7(c) shall read as follows:
		

		
			(c)Spouse means the person married to the participant at the time of the determination as evidenced by a marriage certificate valid under the marriage licensing laws of the place of issuance.  
		

			
	
			
				 Second:
			Rollover/Transfer Contributions

		
			Section 3.7 is amended to eliminate references to conduit individual retirement accounts and simplify the evidence requirements for the source plan.  As amended, Section 3.7(a) shall read as follows:
		

		
			(a)Rollover Contributions – A participant may contribute to his rollover/transfer account any amounts that he previously received as a lump sum distribution (as defined in Code section 402(e)(4)(D)) provided that he transfers such distribution to this plan within sixty (60) days after receipt.
		

		
			Before accepting a rollover contribution, the trustee may require an employee to furnish satisfactory evidence that the proposed transfer is in fact a "rollover contribution" that the Code permits an employee to make to a qualified plan.  If and to the extent the transferring plan is represented to be a retirement plan qualified under 401(a) that is not sponsored by a church or governmental agency, the employee shall not be required to furnish such evidence, except with respect to Roth or other after-tax accounting.  Further, no evidence shall be required when the check is issued by a financial institution indicating that the distribution is from an individual retirement account, 403(b) account, or a governmental entity 457(b) account previously maintained for the benefit of the employee.  The acceptable sources for a rollover contribution shall be as set forth in Section 3.7(b).  Notwithstanding the preceding or the provisions of Section 3.7(b), this plan will not accept a rollover from a Roth elective deferral account or a Code section 408A Roth individual retirement account.
		

		
			As amended, Section 3.7(b) shall contain an additional provision that shall read as follows:
		

		
			If the plan administrator later determines that the contribution was an invalid transfer contribution, the plan administrator shall distribute the amount of the invalid contribution, plus any earnings attributable thereto, to the employee within a reasonable time after such determination.
		

			
	
			
				 Third:
			Payment Election Procedures

		
			Section 4.3(e) is amended to permit a terminating participant to elect multiple destinations for his direct rollover distributions so that he may designate the allocation of the pretax amounts.  As amended, Section 4.3(e) shall contain an additional paragraph that shall read as follows:
		

		
			If and to the extent the participant elects multiple destinations for his direct rollover distributions, he may designate the allocation of the pretax amounts.
		

			
	
			
				 Fourth:
			Effective Date

		
			This amendment  is effective as of January 1, 2015, except as otherwise provided herein.
		

			
	
			
				 Fifth:
			Remaining Plan Provisions

		
			All other provisions of the Plan remain in full force and effect.
		

		
			 
		

		 

		

			316_«UFD»:Copyright © 2012 by Conrad Siegel Actuaries60

Source: [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00256-of-00352.parquet"}, [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00256-of-00352.parquet"}]]